United States Department of Agriculture
Research, Education, and Economics
ARS * CSREES * ERS * NASS
Manual
Title: | ARS Facilities Design Standards |
Number: | 242.1M-ARS |
Date: | July 24, 2002 |
Originating Office: | Facilities Division, Facilities Engineering Branch, AFM/ARS |
This Replaces: | Manual and P&P 242.1 dated 8/7/98 |
Distribution: | ARS Offices in Headquarters, Areas, and Locations |
This Manual provides design policies and criteria to guide the design of ARS construction projects. |
Table of Contents
1. BASIC REQUIREMENTS
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Purpose of the Manual
1.1.2 Design Principles/Objectives
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
1.2.1 General
1.2.2 Compliance with National Model Codes
1.2.3 Compliance with Other National Codes
1.2.4 Compliance with State and Local Codes
1.2.5 Code Review and Analysis
1.3 COMPLIANCE WITH
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY ACT
1.3.1 The National Environmental Policy Act
1.3.2 NEPA Process for Construction Projects
1.4 PHYSICAL SECURITY
DESIGN
1.4.1 General
1.4.2 Risk Guidelines
1.5 METRIC DESIGN
1.5.1 Metric Conversion Act
1.5.2 Metric Policy for Construction Projects
1.5.3 Design Guide for Metric Construction
1.5.4 Exception/Waiver Process
1.6 ACCESSIBILITY
DESIGN
1.6.1 Architectural Barriers Act
1.6.2 The Americans with Disabilities Act
1.6.3 Accessibility Policy
1.7 ENERGY DESIGN
1.7.1 National Energy Conservation Policy Act
1.7.2 Energy Design for New and Renovation Projects
1.7.3 Special Design Consideration: Greening the Government
1.8 DESIGN
DOCUMENTATION
1.8.1 General
1.8.2 Drawings
1.8.3 Specifications
1.8.4 Design Narratives and Calculations
1.8.5 Cost Estimates
Appendix 1A: List of Abbreviations
2. SITE PLANNING AND LANDSCAPE DESIGN
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
2.1.2 Objectives
2.1.3 Codes and Standards
2.1.4 Site and Landscape Design Submissions and Coordination
2.2 SITE SECURITY
DESIGN
2.2.1 General
2.2.2 Site and Landscape Security Design Considerations
2.3 SITE DESIGN
ELEMENTS
2.3.1 Physical Character of the Site
2.3.2 Grading and Drainage
2.3.3 Building Orientation
2.3.4 Pedestrian and Vehicular Circulation
2.4 LANDSCAPE DESIGN
2.4.1 General Principles
2.4.2 Planting in Public Spaces
2.4.3 Planting Within or Above Portions of Buildings
2.5 SITE
PLANNING/LANDSCAPE DESIGN PROCESSES
2.5.1 General
2.5.2 Coordination of Design Professionals
2.5.3 Site Surveys
2.5.4 Site Analysis
Appendix 2A: Site Design Submission Requirements
Appendix 2B: Site Design Coordination Checklist
Appendix 2C: Site Survey Report
3. ARCHITECTURE
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
3.1.2 Codes and Standards
3.1.3 Architectural Design Submissions and Coordination
3.1.4 Safety and Health
3.1.5 Accessibility
3.2 ARCHITECTURAL
SECURITY DESIGN
3.2.1 General
3.2.2 Architecture and Interior Design Considerations
3.2.3 Parking Security
3.3 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
3.3.1 Scope
3.3.2 Building Area Calculations
3.3.3 Building Efficiency
3.4 SPECIAL DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS
3.4.1 Incorporation of Recycled-Content Materials
3.4.2 Acoustics
3.5 BUILDING ELEMENTS
3.5.1 Exterior
3.5.2 Interior
3.6 BUILDING SUPPORT
SPACES
3.6.1 Service Areas
3.6.2 Mechanical/Electrical Spaces
3.6.3 Parking Facilities
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS
ARCHITECTURAL ISSUES
3.7.1 Building Accessories
3.7.2 Specifying Uncommon Products
Appendix 3A: Architectural Design Submission Requirements
Appendix 3B: Architectural Design Coordination Checklist
4. STRUCTURAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
4.1.2 Codes and Standards
4.1.3 Structural Design Submissions and Coordination
4.2 STRUCTURAL SECURITY
DESIGN
4.2.1 General
4.2.2 General Requirements
4.2.3 New Construction
4.2.4 Existing Construction Modernization
4.2.5 Historic Buildings
4.2.6 Good Engineering Practice Guidelines
4.3 FOUNDATIONS
4.3.1 Procedures and Criteria for the Analysis and Design of
Foundations for Buildings
4.3.2 Subsurface Investigation
4.3.3 Foundation Design
4.3.4 Retaining Walls
4.4 STRUCTURAL
SYSTEMS
4.4.1 Stability
4.4.2 Overall Considerations
4.4.3 Comparative Cost Analysis
4.5 EQUIPMENT
SUPPORTS
4.5.1 Design Loads
4.5.2 Vibration
4.5.3 Foundation Considerations
4.6
ARCHITECTURAL-STRUCTURAL INTERACTION
4.6.1 Drift
4.6.2 Anchoring Exterior Walls
4.6.3 Nonstructural Partitions
4.6.4 Curtain Walls
4.6.5 Floor and Ceiling Details
4.6.6 Cladding and Insulation
4.6.7 Stairwells
4.6.8 Glass and Glazing Details
4.6.9 Waterproofing
4.7 REPAIR AND
ALTERATION OF EXISTING BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES
4.7.1 Design Requirements
4.7.2 Fire Safety
4.7.3 Foundations
4.7.4 Connection to Existing Framing
4.7.5 Contract Documents
4.7.6 Wind and Seismic Designs
Appendix 4A: Structural Design Submission Requirements
Appendix 4B: Structural Design Coordination Checklist
Appendix 4C: Geotechnical Investigation and Engineering Report
5. MECHANICAL
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Objective
5.1.2 Codes and Standards
5.1.3 Design Submissions and Coordination
5.1.4 Energy Conservation and Life Cycle Cost Analyses
5.1.5 Acoustical Requirements
5.1.6 Access to Machines and Equipment
5.1.7 Installation of Equipment for Proper Operation
5.2 MECHANICAL
SECURITY DESIGN
5.2.1 General
5.2.2 Mechanical Engineering Security Considerations
5.2.3 Fire Protection Engineering Security Considerations
5.3 PLUMBING
5.3.1 Fixture Requirements
5.3.2 Water Coolers and Drinking Fountains
5.3.3 Floor Drains
5.3.4 Sanitary System
5.3.5 Storm Water Drains
5.3.6 Water Supply System
5.3.7 Gas Piping
5.3.8 Fire Safety
5.4 HEATING,
VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
5.4.1 Design Criteria
5.4.2 Design Calculations
5.4.3 HVAC Design Coordination
5.4.4 Ventilation and Exhaust Requirements
5.4.5 Air Cleaning Systems
5.4.6 Piping Systems
5.4.7 Air Duct Systems
5.4.8 Air Distribution Devices
5.4.9 Equipment Selection
5.4.10 Automatic Temperature and Humidity Control
5.4.11 Start-up, Testing, and Balancing Equipment and Systems
5.5 UNDERGROUND HEAT
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
5.5.1 General
Appendix 5A: Mechanical Design Submission Requirements
Appendix 5B: Mechanical Design Coordination Checklist
6. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
6.1.2 Codes and Standards
6.1.3 Design Submissions and Coordination
6.1.4 Economic Design
6.1.5 Energy Conservation
6.2
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC SECURITY DESIGN
6.2.1 General
6.2.2 Electrical Security Design Considerations
6.2.3 Electronic Security
6.3 PRELIMINARY
DESIGN CONSIDERATION
6.3.1 Preliminary Data
6.3.2 Estimation of Loads
6.3.3 Standards for Sizing Equipment and Systems
6.3.4 Selection of Power Source
6.3.5 Uninterruptible (No-Break) Power
6.3.6 Installation of Distribution System
6.3.7 Grounding of Distribution Systems
6.4 SERVICES
6.4.1 Service Selection
6.4.2 Short-Circuit Considerations
6.4.3 Service Equipment Rooms
6.4.4 Vaults for Utility Transformers
6.4.5 Service Feeders
6.4.6 Service Feeder Conduits
6.4.7 Service Disconnecting Equipment
6.4.8 Electric Utility Equipment
6.4.9 Ground Fault Protection
6.5 ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT ROOMS
6.5.1 Planning
6.5.2 Clearances
6.5.3 Concrete Curbs
6.5.4 Equipment Removal
6.5.5 Lighting
6.5.6 Ventilation
6.6 PRIMARY
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
6.6.1 General Description
6.6.2 Distribution Feeders
6.6.3 Feeder Raceways
6.6.4 Primary Substations
6.6.5 Secondary Substations
6.6.6 Batteries
6.6.7 Unit Substations
6.7 SECONDARY
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
6.7.1 General
6.7.2 Low-Voltage Switchgear Assemblies
6.7.3 Over Current Protection
6.7.4 Motor Control Centers
6.7.5 Panelboards
6.7.6 Electrical Closets
6.8 UNDERGROUND
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
6.8.1 Direct Burial
6.8.2 Duct Lines
6.8.3 Manholes and Handholes
6.8.4 Underground Cables
6.8.5 Underground Transformers
6.8.6 Safety Considerations
6.9 BRANCH CIRCUIT
WORK
6.9.1 Wiring and Capacities
6.9.2 Switching
6.9.3 Receptacles
6.9.4 Emergency Lighting
6.10 EMERGENCY POWER
6.10.1 General
6.10.2 Applications
6.10.3 Emergency Power Sources
6.10.4 Loads
6.10.5 Uninterruptible Power Requirements
6.10.6 Generators
6.10.7 Total Energy Systems
6.11 ILLUMINATION
6.11.1 Scope
6.11.2 Lighting Systems
6.11.3 Luminaires
6.11.4 Maintenance
6.11.5 Grounding
6.11.6 Switches
6.11.7 Exterior Lighting
6.12 SPECIAL
EQUIPMENT
6.12.1 Computer Room Installations
6.12.2 Elevators
6.12.3 Hazardous Locations
6.12.4 Lightning Protection
6.13
TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNALING SYSTEMS
6.13.1 Telephone Systems
6.13.2 Fire Alarm Systems
6.13.3 Public Address Systems
Appendix 6A: Electrical Design Submission Requirements
Appendix 6B: Electrical Design Coordination Checklist
7. SAFETY AND HEALTH ELEMENTS
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Purpose and Objective
7.1.2 Definition of Laboratory
7.1.3 Codes and Special Requirements
7.2 ELEMENTS OF
DESIGN
7.2.1 HVAC System
7.2.2 Laboratory Ventilation
7.2.3 Fume Hood Requirements
7.2.4 Fume Hood Exhaust Requirements
7.2.5 Radioisotope Fume Hood
7.2.6 Perchloric Acid Hoods
7.2.7 Laminar Flow Hoods
7.2.8 General Purpose Hoods
7.2.9 Incinerators
7.2.10 Chemical Storage
7.2.11 Additional Exits
7.2.12 Occupancy Classification
7.2.13 Emergency Eye/Face Wash and Shower Station
7.2.14 Laboratory Furniture
7.2.15 Asbestos
7.2.16 Fire, Smoke and Heat Safety
7.2.17 Animal Facilities
8. ELEVATORS (VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS)
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope
8.1.2 Codes and Standards
8.1.3 Coordination
8.2 EQUIPMENT
8.2.1 Passenger Elevators
8.2.2 Freight Elevators
8.2.3 Elevator Hoistways
8.2.4 Elevator Pits
8.2.5 Elevator Machine Rooms
8.2.6 Escalators
8.2.7 Dumbwaiters
8.2.8 Wheelchair Lifts
8.2.9 Exterior Power Platforms
9. BIOHAZARD CONTAINMENT DESIGN
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 Scope
9.1.2 Objectives
9.1.3 Basic Requirements
9.1.4 Biohazard
9.1.5 Barriers
9.1.6 Additional Reading
9.2 HAZARD
CLASSIFICATION AND CHOICE OF CONTAINMENT
9.2.1 General
9.2.2 Biosafety Levels
9.3 PRIMARY BARRIERS
(CONTAINMENT EQUIPMENT)
9.3.1 General
9.4 SECONDARY
BARRIERS (FACILITY DESIGN FEATURES)
9.4.1 General
9.4.2 Biosafety Levels 1 and 2 (BSL-1 and BSL-2)
9.4.3 Biosafety Level 3 (BSL-3)
9.4.4 Biosafety Level 3 Agriculture (BSL-3Ag)
9.4.5 Biosafety Level 4 (BSL-4)
9.5 SPECIAL DESIGN
ISSUES
9.5.1 General
9.5.2 Architectural Elements
9.5.3 Mechanical Elements
9.5.4 Electrical Elements
9.6 BID DOCUMENT
PREPARATION
9.6.1 Scope
9.6.2 Summary of Biological Containment Design Elements
9.6.3 Location Access and Special Conditions
9.6.4 Demolition and Temporary Work
9.6.5 Utilities
9.6.6 Containment Boundaries
9.6.7 Penetration Details and Sealing Openings
9.6.8 Pressure Levels and Directional Airflow
9.6.9 Specialized or Uncommon Products
9.6.10 Testing Requirements
9.6.11 Project Close-Out Requirements
9.6.12 Commissioning
Appendix 9A: Project Team Roles and Responsibilities as They
Relate to Biological Safety Issues
Appendix 9B: Testing and Certification Requirements for the
Critical Components of Biological Containment Systems
Appendix 9C: Glossary of Terms
10. ANIMAL FACILITIES
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Scope
10.1.2 ARS Policy
10.2 ANIMAL WELFARE
CONSIDERATIONS
10.2.1 General
10.2.2 Housing System
10.2.3 Caging Systems
10.3 HOUSING
FACILITIES - GENERAL
10.3.1 General
10.3.2 Structural Strength
10.3.3 Water and Electric Power
10.3.4 Storage
10.3.5 Waste Disposal
10.3.6 Washrooms and Sinks
10.4 HOUSING
FACILITIES - INDOORS
10.4.1 Heating
10.4.2 Ventilation
10.4.3 Lighting
10.4.4 Interior Surfaces
10.4.5 Drainage
10.5 HOUSING
FACILITIES - OUTDOORS
10.5.1 Shelter From Sunlight
10.5.2 Shelter From Rain or Snow
10.5.3 Shelter From Cold Weather
10.5.4 Drainage
10.6 DESIGN FEATURES
10.6.1 Physical Relationship of Animal Facilities to Laboratories
10.6.2 Functional Areas
10.6.3 Noise Control
10.6.4 Water Supply
10.6.5 Materials and Finishes
10.6.6 Floors, Walls, and Ceilings
10.6.7 Doors and Windows
10.6.8 Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning
10.6.9 Illumination
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Purpose of the Manual
This Manual establishes Agency policies, design standards and
technical criteria to be applied during the programming, design, construction, alteration,
and renovation of ARS buildings and facilities.
1.1.2 Design
Principles/Objectives
ARS buildings shall be designed and constructed to best meet the
functional, safety, and environmental needs of the programs they house.
A. Environmental and
Functional Needs
1) ARS buildings
shall provide an environment in which occupants can do their work with maximum efficiency
at the optimum level of comfort, taking the following factors into consideration.
2) Arrangement of
Space. Space relationships within buildings shall be planned to optimize the functions
being performed by the occupant. Interaction areas shall be provided within the building
to promote informal discussion between scientists.
3) Access for the
Disabled. Buildings shall meet the needs of individuals with physical disabilities. Design
shall conform to the requirements as outlined in Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards (UFAS) or the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
(ADAAG) whichever is more stringent.
4) Illumination.
Natural and artificial illumination shall be sufficient to meet requirements of the tasks
performed by the occupants.
5) Thermal
Environment. The thermal environment shall be such as to provide healthy working
conditions for the occupants and proper climatic conditions for the work being performed.
Provision of flexibility and suitable control is
necessary.
6) Acoustical
Environment. New buildings and alterations shall be planned and designed to minimize noise
that disturbs occupants unduly or interferes with their ability to do their work. An
adequate level of privacy shall be provided so that occupants can perform their tasks
effectively with minimum outside disturbance. The level of privacy required will vary
depending on the tasks involved.
7) Maintenance and
Operation. Designs shall be based on user needs and maintenance capabilities and shall
satisfy the functional requirements for efficient operation of the facility. Materials and
projects shall be durable, easily maintained, and appropriate for the intended use.
8) Harmony with
Environment. Special attention shall be paid to the arrangement of streets and public
space of which the building is a part. Within budgetary and site limitations, designs
shall include generous development of well-landscaped, inviting, people-oriented space.
9) Regional
Character. Buildings shall reflect the architectural character of the locale. Local
building ordinances and zoning practices shall generally be followed. Use of materials and
products indigenous to the locale of the project shall be given preference.
B. Safety, Health and Security
1) ARS buildings
shall provide an environment that is safe and healthful for occupants, and that offers
them maximum protection during emergencies or disasters.
2) Structural
Adequacy. Design of buildings shall be adequate for the functions to be performed and the
loads imposed by building equipment, occupants, and their activities. Soil and other
geotechnical problems shall be carefully analyzed and resolved during the design process.
3) Protection
against Disaster. Design shall provide minimum exposure to fire, earthquake, or natural
disaster, and shall provide egress and refuge for all people, including the disabled, in
an emergency.
4) Security.
Buildings shall be designed to minimize security risk to persons, research animals, and
property. Security must be an integral part of building and site planning, starting at the
earliest phase and continuing throughout the process. Appropriate security design criteria
shall be determined for each project, based on a facility-specific risk assessment and an
analysis of all available information on security considerations, constraints, and tenant
needs.
5) Accident
Prevention Design. Design shall be the result of safety analyses and shall address unsafe
conditions that cause injury, illness, or property damage.
6) Health Hazards.
Materials and products with known or suspected properties that are hazardous to the health
of occupants and installers shall be avoided. Only materials that are lead or asbestos
free shall be used in ARS buildings. This includes materials such as paint, adhesives,
sealers, sealants, floor tiles, etc.
7) Repair,
Renovation, and Alterations. Design shall be accomplished to reduce or eliminate hazardous
exposure through selection and use of materials and methods. Prior to any renovation or
demolition project, the Architect-Engineer (A-E) shall identify any existing hazardous
building constituents - asbestos or lead etc. If lead or asbestos containing materials are
present, the contractor shall be required to submit relevant management and abatement
plans as part of their proposal for ARS approval prior to initiating work.
C. Economy
1) ARS buildings
shall be designed at the most reasonable cost in terms of combined initial and long-term
expenditures, without compromising other project requirements.
2) Site
Adaptation. In many, if not most, instances, a site has already been selected before
design begins; however, design professionals shall, where possible, have a part in the
selection. The design of the building shall be sited economically and efficiently.
3) Efficient
Utilization. The ratio of net usable to gross area shall be as high as possible consistent
with program objectives. Space allocation for occupants shall be as low as possible
consistent with General Services Administration (GSA) guidelines and the intended
functions.
4) Economical
Materials. Materials, products, and systems of proven dependability shall be used in the
design or alteration of buildings. Materials shall be as economical as possible, in terms
of combined initial and long-term cost and consistent with program objectives. To the
extent possible, standard commercially available products shall be used.
5) Cost
Alternatives. Alternatives shall be considered to ensure long-term, cost-effective design.
6) Maintenance,
Operation, Repair, and Replacement Costs. Buildings shall be designed, and materials
selected, to minimize the cost of maintenance and repair.
7) Foster Maximum
Competition in Bidding. Buildings shall be designed and building materials, components,
and systems incorporated into the design so as to foster maximum competition among
bidders, suppliers, and contractors.
8) Project
Administration. Projects shall be planned and scheduled to ensure effective and efficient
design.
D. Conservation and Resources.
Energy conservation shall be given prime
consideration in the design of ARS buildings. Products, materials, and systems shall be
selected with a view toward minimizing the use of nonrenewable resources.
E. Historical Preservation
Special sensitivity shall be shown in
altering and retrofitting ARS buildings of historical significance to preserve and
highlight their architectural integrity. The improvement design shall make no major impact
upon the qualities which make these structures significant in accordance with the National
Historic Preservation Act of 1966, as amended.
1.2 CODES AND
STANDARDS
1.2.1 General
The Public Buildings Act of 1959, as amended by the Public
Buildings Amendments of 1988 (Public Law 100-678) requires that each building constructed
or altered by a Federal agency shall be constructed or altered, to the maximum extent
feasible, in compliance with one of the nationally recognized model building codes and
with other applicable nationally recognized building codes. Additional requirements
include compliance with State and local codes and special rules regarding State and local
government consultation, review, and inspections
1.2.2 Compliance
with National Model Codes
The design shall adhere to one of the following national building
codes as applicable to the project site and as further qualified in Section 1.2.3 (B) of
this document.
A. Uniform Building Code (UBC), maintained
by the International Conference of Building Officials. (Http://www.icbo.org/ )
B. National Building Code (BOCA),
maintained by the Building Officials and Code Administrators. (Http://www.bocai.org/ )
C. Standard Building Code (SBC), maintained
by the Southern Building Code Congress International. (Http://www.sbcci.org/ )
D. International Building Code (IBC),
maintained by the International Code Counsel. (Http://www.intlcode.org/ )
1.2.3 Compliance
with Other National Codes
Each ARS building shall be constructed or altered, to the maximum
extent feasible, in compliance with other applicable nationally recognized codes. These
codes shall include, but not limited to, electrical codes, fire and life safety codes, and
plumbing codes. ARS has established the following policy:
A. General. For all projects, the
requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Fire Codes shall
apply in lieu of other code references.
B. Plumbing Requirements. For all projects,
the plumbing requirements of the National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC)
shall apply in lieu of other code references.
C. Telecommunications Requirements. For all
projects, the Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) Design and Codes
shall apply in lieu of other code references.
In addition to BICSI the following Codes
and Standards should be used.
1) Electronic
Industry Alliance (EIA)
2) Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
3) American
National Standards Institute (ANSI)
4) Telecommunications
Industry Association (TIA)
1.2.4 Compliance
with State and Local Codes
A. General. The policy of ARS is to comply
with local building codes to the greatest extent possible In addition to using the
applicable national model codes as a minimum standard, special requirements directly
related to local practices or circumstances which do not compromise the best interest of
the Government, shall be incorporated into project design.
During the planning process and
development of associated environmental documentation for ARS new construction or
renovation projects, the A-E shall consider all requirements (other than procedural
requirements) of zoning laws and laws relating to landscaping, open space, minimum
distance of a building from the property line, maximum height of a building, and historic
preservation, esthetic qualities of a building, and other similar laws of a state or
political subdivision of a state which would apply to the building if it were not a
building constructed or altered by the Federal Government.
B. State and Local Government Consultation,
Review, and Recommendations. For purposes of meeting the requirements of the Public
Buildings Amendments of 1988 (Public Law 100-678), local and/or State officials shall be
given the opportunity to review ARS projects for compliance with local requirements.
To effectively deal with local code
compliance:
1) The A-E shall
consult/meet with local code officials prior to schematic design to determine local
requirements for the proposed building construction or alteration project.
2) Once the local
requirements are identified, the A-E can proceed with the design and develop the documents
necessary for a building department plan review as a prerequisite to obtaining a building
permit.
3) Upon request,
the A-E shall submit design plans for a building department plan review, in close
coordination with the project submittal schedule.
4) Local officials
may make recommendations concerning measures which should be taken in the construction or
alteration of ARS buildings.
The A-E shall
then give consideration to any such recommendations, but ARS has the final authority to
accept or reject any of the recommendations.
1.2.5 Code
Review and Analysis
A. General Code criteria shall be reviewed
by each discipline to assure that tasks accomplished during the design of the project meet
code requirements. The A-E is responsible for obtaining copies of all applicable codes and
standards from the issuing authorities.
B. Code Edition. The current edition of
each applicable code, in effect at the time of design contract award, shall be used
throughout the project's design and construction. To ensure flexibility, it is ARS policy
to make maximum use of equivalency clauses in all recognized codes.
C. Code/Criteria Analysis. The A-E shall
prepare a code/criteria analysis that documents an investigation of various codes and ARS
criteria that will govern the design of a specific project. This analysis should alert the
Government to any conflicts in the project's design criteria so that they can be resolved
early.
D. Conflict Between Codes and ARS
Requirements. All conflicts between ARS requirements and either national or state/local
codes, shall be resolved by designing for the most stringent requirements.
1) Any
deviations/equivalency's concepts proposed for use by the A-E must be submitted to the
Government for approval no later than the 35 percent design stage through the Engineering
Project Manager (EPM) for Facilities Division (FD)- administered projects, or Area Office
Engineer (AOE) for Area-administered projects.
2) The request
must state the deviation/equivalency concept proposed, reasons for the request, and
supporting rationale.
3) The EPM or AOE
will coordinate the request with the appropriate office and provide a response to the A-E.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
WITH NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY ACT
1.3.1 The
National Environmental Policy Act
The National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) was established
January 1, 1970, to ensure Federal agencies consider the potential impacts of their
actions on the environment. As required under NEPA, USDA and ARS published regulations to
supplement the Council on Environmental Quality (CEQ) guidelines for NEPA implementation.
The CEQ regulations appear at 40 CFR 1500-1508, USDA's at 7 CFR 1b,
and ARS' at 7 CFR 520.
These regulations provide managers and decision-makers a means to
evaluate the direct, indirect, and cumulative environmental consequences of proposed
actions at the earliest possible time (i.e., before irreversible commitment of resources).
They also specify how to document efforts to identify, evaluate, quantify, and consider
both the positive and negative environmental effects of proposed actions.
It is ARS policy to fully comply with the NEPA law and applicable
regulations. Whenever possible, consideration should be given to avoiding or mitigating
adverse environmental effects.
Within ARS, separate procedures for evaluating the environmental
effects of research programs and construction projects have been established. Procedures
for conducting environmental reviews of research programs/projects are described in the
ARS CRIS Documentation Manual while procedures for Area and Headquarters construction
projects are described below. The Area Director (AD) is responsible for making and
documenting all NEPA decisions. AD's having signatory authority on all final NEPA
documentation. The AD will establish a process to insure that analysis and preparation of
NEPA documentation is made by appropriate staff having information relevant to the final
determination. The specific process should be consistent with the management structure of
the Area.
1.3.2 NEPA
Process for Construction Projects
The AD will categorize each construction project upon the
submission of an AD 700. One of the following types of decisions must be made for each
construction project:
A. Categorical exclusion; Environmental
Assessment (EA) not required;
B. EA required - Finding of No Significant
Impact (FONSI); and
C. Environmental Impact Statement (EIS)
required.
Since each research project conducted at the facility will undergo
separate NEPA consideration, only the physical impacts of the actual construction on the
environment need to be addressed.
Proposed construction projects can be categorically excluded from
EA or EIS requirements if the action to be taken is non-controversial and meets one of the
following criteria:
1) Repair and maintenance of an existing
facility, including alterations and renovations.
2) Planning, inventory, survey, data
collection, and permit activities.
3) Emergency actions to protect life,
property, environment; to preserve human health and safety; and to comply with legal
requirements.
If the proposed action is not exempt from EA or EIS requirements,
for example, new construction, then generally, an EA is prepared (i.e., the AD may decide
to move directly to an EIS if the human environmental impacts of the project are
significant and warrant it.)
An EA is a concise public document that is prepared during the
planning and design phases of a construction project. The EA include a discussion of the
need for the proposed action, alternatives to the proposed action, the environmental
impacts of the proposed action and its alternatives, and a listing of agencies and persons
consulted. The EA should assess the direct, indirect, and cumulative effects of the
proposed project. This assessment provides the AD with the information necessary to
determine whether an EIS should be prepared or if an FONSI can be made.
If the AD makes an FONSI decision, then justification explaining
why the proposed action does not have a significant impact on the human environment is
documented. If the EA highlights several human or environmental impacts that are known or
anticipated to be controversial, then review of the proposed action must continue to an
EIS.
An EIS is a detailed document presenting an evaluation and
analysis of all relevant factors where a determination is made that Agency actions will
significantly affect the quality of the human environment. The EIS process begins with the
publication of a Notice of Intent in the Federal Register. The Agency begins the scoping
process to determine the issues to be addressed in the EIS. Public participation is
encouraged during the scoping process through public hearings. Once concluded, a draft EIS
is prepared based on the identified issues. The public is then provided a 45-day comment
period for review of the draft EIS. During this time, members of the public, Federal,
State, and local agencies, American Indian Tribes, and other interested parties can review
and comment. In addition, a copy of the draft EIS must besubmitted to the EPA for review.
After the review process, the Agency responds to all comments and
incorporates these into the final document. The final EIS is published in the Federal
Register for a 30- day public comment period. At the end of this time, the AD makes a
decision on the proposed action. To justify and explain the course of action, a Record of
Decision (ROD) is published for public review.
1.3.3 List of NEPA Issues for Potential
Consideration When Developing Environmental Assessment
Will proposed construction action:
A. Cause or contribute to soil erosion by
wind or water?
B. Affect soil surface stability?
C. Degrade water quality in a sole source
aquifer?
D. Decrease aquifer yield or affect water
rights?
E. Affect aquatic life?
F. Cause or contribute flow variation in a
stream or spring?
G. Degrade the aesthetic properties and/or
potential uses of either ground or surface waters?
H. Affect chemical quality of ground or
surface waters (pH, dissolved oxygen, nutrients, dissolved solids, pesticides, etc.)?
I. Affect physical quality of ground or
surface waters (suspended solids, turbidity, color, oil, temperature, etc.)?
J. Cause odors or release odoriferous
substances to air or water?
K. Release toxic substances to the air in
quantities that could affect human health or safety, or environmental quality?
L. Release particulate matter to the air?
M. Change local meteorological conditions
or air movement patterns?
N. Release substances for which there is a
National Ambient Air Quality Standard(i.e., sulfur oxides, nitrogen oxides, carbon
monoxide, lead, particulate matter, etc.)?
O. Affect undisturbed natural areas or a
wild and scenic river?
P. Affect game animals or fish or their
taking?
Q. Affect rare, threatened, or endangered
species, or a critical habitat? (A consultation with U.S. Fish & Wildlife Service
under Section 7 of the Endangered Species Act may be required).
R. Affect species balance, especially among
predators?
S. Involve special hazards, such as
radioactivity or electromagnetic radiation?
T. Affect or to be located in a wetland,
flood plain, or the coastal zone?
U. Affect a known or potential cultural,
historical, or archaeological site, district, or area? (A consultation with the State
Historical Preservation Officer is required).
V. Affect local or regional systems related
to:
1) Transportation?
2) Water supply?
3) Power and
heating?
4) Solid waste
management?
5) Sewer or storm
drainage?
W. Affect local land use through effects
on:
1) Flood plains or
wetlands?
2) Location land
use?
3) Aesthetics?
4) Access to
minerals?
X. Affect socioeconomic aspects of an area
including:
1) Population?
2) Housing supply
or demand?
3) Employment?
4) Commercial
activities?
5) Industrial
activities?
6) Cultural
patterns?
7) Environmental
justice?
Y. Cause or contribute to unacceptable
noise level?
Z. Affect public health or safety?
AA. Cause public reaction or controversy?
1.4 PHYSICAL
SECURITY DESIGN
1.4.1 General
A. Security design shall be an integral
part of the planning, design, and construction. Appropriate security design criteria and
standards for each project shall be determined based on a facility-specific risk
assessment and an analysis of all available information on security considerations,
constraints and tenant needs.
B. Security criteria shall focus on
detecting, deterring, and delaying terrorist and criminal attacks through planning,
programming, design, access control, and engineering measures. The primary goal must be to
save lives and prevent injury, and secondarily to protect ARS buildings, functions, and
assets.
C. Project-specific security requirements
shall be developed based on the standards and risk assessment methodology outlined in
Interagency Security Committee (ISC) Security Design Criteria for New Federal Office
Buildings and Major modernization Projects.
1.4.2 Risk
Guidelines
A. Project-Specific Requirements. The
building's specific security requirements shall be based on a risk assessment done at the
earliest stages of programming. The risk assessment shall consider, at a minimum, the risk
factors, tactics, and the severity level of the risk to the building as defined in the ISC
Security Design Criteria document.
Once the risk has been defined and
quantified, funding, costs, site requirements, and other considerations or restrictions
shall be factored in to develop building-specific design requirements. If the desired
mitigation of identified risks is not attainable, some portion of the risk may have to be
accepted. One of the objectives of a risk assessment system is to achieve a responsible
and prudent balance between risk and mitigation measures, considering available agency
resources to implement every countermeasure.
B. Assessment Designation. The ISC Security
Criteria use designations ranging from Low to Higher for two purposes. The first is to
indicate the severity of the risk to a facility; the second is to designate the
appropriate protection level, which means the degree to which the building should offer
protection against specific tactics.
C. Risk Factors. For the purposes of the
criteria, risk levels are rated Low, Medium/Low, Medium, or Higher. The risk levels are
communicated by tactic severity. For example, the vehicle bomb tactic is categorized
according to the varying charge weights of the explosives. The lowest weight dealt within
this document is considered a Low risk; the heaviest weight is a Higher risk.
A building-specific risk assessment shall
consider the following factors, at a minimum
1) Symbolic
Importance: Some facilities are highly visible symbols of this country, either nationally,
regionally, or locally. The Alfred P. Murrah Federal Building, for instance, was the
primary symbol of the U.S. Government in Oklahoma City
2) Criticality:
This measures the degree to which a building houses operations and functions critical to
national or regional interests of the United States.
3) Consequence:
This measures a successful attack's impact on a building's occupants, assets, and
functions, as well as on the larger community
4) Threats: These
are classified as either criminal or terrorist threats. Tactics may include bombs, forced
entry, chemical and biological attacks, criminal acts, etc.
D. Protection levels. As used in the ISC
Security Criteria document, protection levels Low, Medium/Low, Medium, and Higher refer to
how the building is to perform during an emergency, and the degree to which the building
and its constituent elements should offer protection against specific tactics.
The designation of protection levels, as
well as the actual planning, design, and construction of a project should be closely
guided by emergency operations objectives to ensure that the resulting Occupant Emergency
Plans (OEPs) are reliable, efficient, and cost effective. For example, if an OEP calls for
evacuation down a stairwell, the plan for the building should consider where the stairs
will discharge, the need for pressurization, and the need for a source of electrical power
that will function in that area if a design-basis event occurs. If a project-specific OEP
does not exist, use either a generic OEP or an OEP from a similar project.
An entire building should not simply be
assigned a single protection level. A facility with a low protection requirement for bomb
blast may require a higher protection level for crime; a building's structure may require
a higher protection level than its mechanical system; a building requiring low structural
protection may need a higher protection level CCTV system.
E. Risk Assessment Methodology. A security
risk assessment for each new or major alteration is essential, first because it channels
limited budgets to best minimize risk, and second because it optimizes the performance of
a building during a criminal or terrorist event.
The risk assessment is a major element in
determining which security criteria apply to a facility. Since many building features,
including structure and mechanical and electrical systems, are difficult and costly to
change, risk must be carefully and thoughtfully evaluated in all its complexity. Risk
assessors should have intelligence on past, current, and future threats. Projections must
be made over the life of the facility - as difficult as that may be to do -because of the
inflexibility of most building systems, some of which may be designed tolast 30-100 years.
Risk assessors also need to consider the
separate characteristics as well as the interrelatedness of building systems. Each element
and system, e.g., architectural, mechanical, electrical, structural, etc., should receive
its own protection level rating. Throughout the security design process, professionals
from many disciplines need to consider how threats and mitigating measures applied to one
element affect the rest of the facility.
1.5 METRIC
DESIGN
1.5.1 Metric
Conversion Act
The Metric Conversion Act of 1975 (Public Law 94-168), as amended
by the Omnibus Trade and Competitiveness Act of 1988 (Public Law 100-418, Section 5164)
and the Savings in Construction Act of 1996 (Public Law 104-289), including Executive
Order 12770, Metric Usage in Federal Government Programs, requires Federal procurement,
grant, and other business-related activities to be metric by September 1992,
to the extent feasible.
1.5.2 Metric
Policy for Construction Projects
ARS Policies and Procedures (P&P) 242.6 provides policy and
guidance for implementing the metric system of measurements in procurement, grants, and
construction program activities of the Agency. In construction, the policy of ARS is to
implement the metric system in a manner and on schedule consistent with Section 5164 of
Public Law 100-418, Public Law 104-289, Executive Order 12770 of July 25, 1991, and the
U.S. Department of Agriculture regulation 1020-38 of May 25, 1992.
A. All ARS new building construction shall
be designed and built in metric. All measurements in drawings, plans, specifications, and
cost estimates shall be stated exclusively in metric. Commercial and industrial products
made to hard metric sizes, dimensions, or characteristics shall be specified, purchased
and used to the extent possible. Refer to GSA Metric Design Guide for
general listing and information on hard metric product availability.
B. All designs for repair and maintenance,
renovation, and alteration work shall be done with the measurement system in which the
existing facility, system, or equipment is originally designed.
C. When specifying structures or systems of
concrete masonry or recessed lighting fixtures for ARS metric
construction projects, hard metric versions of these products may be specified only when:
the product's application requires it to coordinate dimensionally into the 100-millimeter
building module; marketresearch demonstrates the product's availability, sufficient to
ensure competitive process; and the product's total installed cost is reasonable.
1.5.3 Design
Guide for Metric Construction
The A-E shall use the current edition of the Metric Guide
for Federal Construction (published by the National Institute of Building Sciences)
and the GSA Metric Design Guide (published by the Public Building Services of
the General Services Administration) as guidance in the design of ARS metric construction
projects. Copies of these guides maybe obtained from the National Institute of Building
Sciences, Publications Department, 1090 Vermont Avenue N.W., Suite 700, Washington, D.C.
20005 (Phone: 202-289-7800).
1.5.4 Exception/Waiver
Process
A. Exception Guidance. Federal law and
implementing guidance and regulations allow for exceptions to metric usage within certain
constraints. ARS has identified the following conditions or circumstances for excepting
metric use in construction projects.
1) Metric use will
cause an inability of the agency to fulfill its responsibilities under the laws of the
Federal government and the United States.
2) Metric use is
impractical or will likely cause significant inefficiencies to or loss of markets to U.S.
firms such as when a U.S. industry sector is predominantly non metric and cannot easily
supply a product to metric specifications, which could give an unintended competitive
advantage to foreign-owned firms.
3) Metric use
would substantially reduce competition for federal contracts.
B. Request for Waiver from Metric Design.
Within the above guidelines, when use of metric is deemed impractical for a specific
construction project not generally exempted, a waiver or partial waivers to metric
requirements maybe submitted and approved by the Chief, Facilities Engineering Branch
(FEB), Facilities Division (FD). Waiver requests shall be submitted to Chief FEB, by the
contractor through the EPM (for FD projects) or AOE (for Area projects). Waiver requests
will not be considered without the submission of documentation demonstrating the economic
or technical infeasibility of a metrication. The evaluation criteria for waiver requests
will include such factors as initial life-cycle costs or loss of markets to U.S. firms,
and unavailability of industry-accepted metric standards.
1.6 ACCESSIBILITY
DESIGN
1.6.1 Architectural
Barriers Act
The Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 (ABA) (Public Law 90-480),
as amended, requires that Federal and federally-funded facilities built or altered after
1968 be accessible to persons with disabilities. The Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards (UFAS) is a document that sets uniform standards for design, construction,
& alteration of Federal buildings so that they are accessible/usable by disabled
individuals.
1.6.2 The
Americans with Disabilities Act
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) was signed into law in
1990 (P. L. 101- 336). The ADA is an anti discrimination statute that guarantees equal
opportunity for individuals with disabilities in employment, public transportation,
accommodations, State and Local government services and telecommunications. The Americans
with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) is a document that sets
guidelines for accessibility to places of public accommodation and commercial facilities
by individuals with disabilities.
1.6.3 Accessibility
Policy
ARS is committed to providing accessible work places and
environments as mandated by Public Laws. The design of ARS projects shall conform to the
requirements of UFAS or ADAAG, whichever is more stringent.
1.7 ENERGY
DESIGN
1.7.1 National
Energy Conservation Policy Act
The National Energy Conservation Policy Act (Public Law 95-61 9),
as amended by the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (PL 102-486), and including all applicable
Executive Orders, set out and reinforce long-standing requirements for energy conservation
in Federal buildings and facilities. The ARS Policies and Procedures (P&P)134.2 , ARS
Energy Management Plan, was established in response to these mandates and is based on
a policy that fosters cost effective energy management practices to ensure the efficient
use of energy, while maximizing the ability of the Agency to accomplish its mission and
maintaining the health and safety of ARS employees and visitors. Details of this plan are
available at http: //www.afm.ars.usda.gov/ppweb
1.7.2 Energy
Design for New and Renovation Projects
A. New Construction and Major Renovation
Projects. All new construction projects including major renovation projects (where an
entire facility is to berenovated), shall be designed in accordance with the energy design
standard of 10 CFR, Part 435, Energy Conservation Voluntary Performance Standards for
Commercial and Multi-Family High Rise Residential Buildings; Mandatory for New Federal
Buildings; Interim Rule.
ARS has adopted the latest edition of
ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings, published by the American Society of Heating Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) for energy conservation. The performance of
buildings designed according to ASHRAE 90.1 will be equivalent to those designed to 10 CFR
435. Any text phrased as a recommendation in the ASHRAE Standard 90.1 will be understood
as a mandatory requirement.
B. Minor Renovation/Alteration Projects.
For minor renovation/alteration work, the following standards shall apply.
1) ASHRAE Standard
100.3 - Energy Conservation in Existing Buildings.
2) ASHRAE Standard
100.5 - Energy Conservation in Existing Buildings - Institutional.
3) ASHRAE Standard
100.6 - Energy Conservation in Existing Buildings - Public Assembly.
1.7.3 Special
Design Consideration: Greening the Government
Several executive orders have been issued which promote and
mandate the greening of the Federal Government affecting facilities. The A-E's design
therefore shall provide for the protection of the environment through energy efficiency,
recycling, pollution prevention, and affirmative procurement.
A. Pursuant to Executive Order (E.O.)
13101, Greening the Government Through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and Federal
Acquisition (September 14, 1998), ARS is committed to recycling and buying recycled
content and environmentally preferable products, (including bilobated products). The A-E's
design shall maximize the use of environmental preferable products.
B. Pursuant to E.O. 13123, Greening the
Government Through Efficient Energy Management (June 3, 1999), ARS shall select, where
life-cycle cost effective, ENERGY STAR� and other energy efficient products when
acquiring energy- using products. The A-E shall specify products that are in the upper 25
percent of energy efficiency as designated by the Federal Energy Management Program
(FEMP). The A-E's design shall meet ENERGY STAR� building criteria for energy performance
and indoor environmental quality in eligible ARS facilities.
C. Pursuant to E.O. 13134, Developing
and Promoting Biobased Products and Bioenergy (August 12, 1999), ARS shall
significantly extend procurement activities related to biobased products and services.
Biobased products are made from renewable agricultural, animal, or forestry materials,
such as vegetable-based lubricants, biofuels, compost, and construction materials. The
A-E's design shall maximize the use of cost-effective biobased products and bioenergy.
D. Pursuant to E.O. 13148, Greening the
Government Through Leadership in Environmental Management (April 21, 2000), the A-E's
design shall maximize the use of cost-effective environmentally sound landscaping
practices to reduce adverse impacts to the natural environment, prevent pollution and
potential future liabilities at ARS facilities.
1.8 DESIGN
DOCUMENTATION
1.8.1 General
The A-E's design submission shall consist of a combination
of drawings, specifications, narratives, calculations, and cost estimates. The
requirements listed here shall be considered minimum standards for documentation. Specific
submission requirements for each discipline are contained in subsequent chapters of this
Manual.
1.8.2 Drawings
A. Drawing Media. All drawings shall
be prepared in ink on 24 inches x 36 inches or 30 inches x 42 inches Mylar sheets. Sample
cover sheets and title block sheets (in electronic format) will be provided by ARS. The A-E
is responsible for providing the balance of sheets necessary for the project.
B. Lettering. Lettering on drawings must be
legible when drawings are reduced to half size. Generally, lettering shall be vertical,
all caps, single stroke commercial Gothic style, 1/8 inch minimum height. The lettering
may be produced either freehand, by the use of mechanical lettering instruments, or any of
the newer mechanical-electrical lettering devices if they otherwise conform to the height
and general style requirements.
C. Drawing Scales. Scales shall be selected
to avoid overcrowding and allow for half-size reductions. Scales shall be illustrated
graphically on the drawings. Scale of drawings shall be appropriate for high resolution
and legibility to include half-size reduced copies.
D. Line Weights. During the initial
selection of line weights, important features and outlines shall be more prominently
depicted than those of secondary or unrelated features.
E. Uniformity. When making alterations or
additions to existing drawings, special care shall be exercised to follow the same style
and size lettering, as well as other conventions on the drawing(s) in the interest of
uniformity.
F. Computer-Aided Design and Drafting
(CADD). CADD systems may be utilized for drafting production. However, the
computer-generated drawings should exhibit the same general high quality standards
specified for manual drafting (i.e., ink pen-plotting, clarity, appropriate lettering size
and style, etc.) If CADD is used, it is required (for archival purposes) that each
submittal includes a copy of the design specifications and design drawings in electronic
format (to be submitted in a CD-ROM). The design specifications are to be submitted in
(Portable Documents Format - PDF), and the design drawings are to be submitted in DWG and
DWF format - AutoCAD.
G. Dimensioning. For metric projects, the
millimeter shall be the only unit of measurement to appear on construction documents for
building plans and details for all disciplines except civil engineering, which shall be
stated in meters. However, building elevation references are stated in meters. Use of
millimeters is consistent with how dimensions are specified in major codes, such as BOCA.
No dimension requires the mm label. On the drawings the unit symbol is
eliminated and only explanatory note such as: All dimensions are shown in
millimeters or All dimensions are shown in meters, is
provided. Whole numbers always indicate millimeters; decimal numbers taken to three places
always indicate meters. Centimeters will not be used for dimensioning.
H. Seals. Each sheet of the construction
documents must bear the seal and signature of the responsible design professional.
(Specification and calculations cover pages only.)
I. Cover Sheet. Provide code certification
statement for compliance with specified codes and standards by each discipline with the
professional seal and signature. The intent is to formally recognize the responsibility
for compliance.
1.8.3 Specifications
A. General. The Unified Facilities
Guide Specifications (UFGS) shall be the standard specification for all ARS-FD
administered projects. The A-E may purchase a set of current UFGS specifications from:
National Institute
of Building Sciences,
ATTN: CCB
1015 15th Street,
NW, Suite 700
Washington, D.C.
20005 (202) 347-5710
B. Format. Specifications should be
produced according to the Construction Specification Institute (CSI) division format. Each
page should be numbered. Numbering of sections within the divisions and section format
shall follow CSI recommendations. Specifications should be bound and include a Table of
Contents. The specifications shall include instructions to bidders and Division 1, edited
to ARS requirements.
C. Editing of Specifications. It is the
A-E's responsibility to edit all specifications to reflect the project design intent.
Specifications must be carefully coordinated with drawings to ensure that everything shown
on the drawings is specified. Specification language that is not applicable to the project
shall be deleted.
1.8.4 Design
Narratives and Calculations
A. Format. Typed, bound narratives should
be produced for each design discipline.
B. Content. Narratives shall serve to
explain the design intent and to document decisions made during the design process. Like
drawings and specifications, narratives are an important permanent records of the building
design. Drawings and specifications are records of WHAT systems, materials and components
the building contains; narratives should record WHY they were chosen. The narrative of
each submittal may be based on the previous submittal, but it must be revised and expanded
at each stage to reflect the current state of the design.
C. Calculations. Manual and/or
computer-based calculations should accompany narratives where required to support
technical analysis. Each set of calculations should start with a summary sheet, which
shows all assumptions, references, applicable codes and standards, and lists the
conclusions. Calculations should include engineering sketches as an aid to understanding
by reviewers. Thecalculations for each submittal should be cumulative, so that the final
submittal contains all calculations for the project. Calculations submitted at early
stages of the project must be revised later to reflect the final design.
1.8.5 Cost
Estimates
A. Cost estimates must be provided at
various stages of the design process and must follow the 16 division systems prescribed by
CSI. Costs shall be itemized by sections within the divisions.
B. The A-E shall follow cost trends of the
work so that any possibility of cost overrun is recognized at the early stages of design.
When cost estimates exceed the project's estimated construction cost (ECC), the A-E shall
immediately notify the Government in writing of this problem. With such notification, the
A-E shall include his recommendations for effectively providing the work within the ECC
described in narrative form. The Government will act on such proposals according to the
evaluations made thereof.
Appendix 1A: List of
Abbreviations
AAALAC American Association for the Accreditation of Laboratory
Animal Care
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienist
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
A-E Architects and Engineers
AFM Administrative and Financial Management, ARS
AIA American Institutes of Architects
AGA American Gas Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APHIS Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service
ARS Agricultural Research Service
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
BAS Building Automation System
BOCA (National Building Code) Building Officials and Code
Administrators
BSC Biological Safety Cabinet
BSL Biosafety Level
CDC Center for Disease Control
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CO Contracting Officer
CPG Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (EPA)
CSI Construction Specifications Institute
DDC Direct Digital Control
DOE Department of Energy
ECC Estimated Construction Cost
EIA Electronics Industry Association
EO Executive Order
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
EPM Engineering Project Manager
FD Facilities Division, AFM
FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency
FEMP Federal Energy Management Program
FPMR Federal Property Management Regulations
GFP Ground Fault Protection
HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Air
HVAC Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
IBC International Building Code
ICSSC Interagency Committee on Seismic Safety in Construction
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
NC Noise Criterion
NEBB National Environmental Balance Bureau
NEC National Electric Code
NEHRP National Earthquake hazards Reduction Program
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NIC Noise Isolation Class
NIH National Institutes of Health
NRC Noise reduction Coefficient
NSPC National Standard Plumbing Code
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
P&P Policies and Procedures
PL Public Law
POR Program of Requirements
RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
REE Research, Education, and Economics
SBC Standard Building Code
SOW Statement of Work
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
STC Sound Transmission Class
TIA Telephone Industry Association
UBC Uniform Building Code
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
UFGS Unified Facilities Guide Specifications
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
USDA United States Department of Agriculture
VAV Variable Air Volume
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
This chapter provides general objectives, considerations, and
procedures for site planning and landscape design. For new construction, planning and
design shall be for a predetermined site identified to the A-E by ARS. It is also assumed
that detailed studies of the requirements of the project, its employees, its visitors, and
facilities to be included in the site plan have been determined during the programming
phase.
2.1.2 Objectives
A. Site Potential. Full advantage shall be
taken of existing site and landscaping potential by preserving the site's natural features
to the greatest extent possible.
B. Relationship of Elements. A proper and
harmonious relationship shall be established between elements on a common site, and
between the site and the surrounding environment.
C. Functionality and Efficiency. Provide a
site plan and landscape design that are economical to construct, functionally efficient,
and easy to maintain.
D. Energy Conservation. The site plan and
landscaping scheme shall contribute to the energy efficiency of the project through use of
natural site features, planting, etc.
E. Accessibility. Select materials, and
design landscaping features to allow unrestricted use by individuals with physical
disabilities. The A-E's design shall maximize the use of cost-effective environmentally
sound landscaping practices to reduce adverse impacts to the natural environment, prevent
pollution and potential future liabilities at ARS facilities.
F. Security. Effective site planning and
landscape design can enhance the security of a facility and eliminate the need for some
engineering solutions. Security considerations shall be an integral part of all site
planning, perimeter definition, lighting, and landscape decisions.
G. Greening the Government. Pursuant to
E.O. 13148: Greening the Government Through Leadership in Environmental Management
(April 21, 2000), the A-E's design shall maximize the use of cost effective
environmentally sound landscaping practices to reduce adverse impacts to the natural
environment, prevent pollution and potential future liabilities at ARS facilities.
2.1.3 Codes
and Standards
A. General. The design shall comply with
the requirements of the site applicable codes and standards that apply to site design. The
current edition of each applicable code, in effect at the time of design contract award,
shall be used throughout the project's design and construction. See Chapter 1: Basic
Requirements for complete discussion of codes and other special requirements.
B. Code Review and Analysis and Waiver
Process. The code criteria shall be reviewed by the A-E to the degree of detail necessary
to assure that tasks accomplished during design meet code requirements. All deviations
from code/ARS requirements and any equivalency concepts proposed for use must be
identified by the A-E and submitted to the Government for approval no later than the 35
percent design stage. See section 1.2.5 for requirements.
2.1.4 Site
and Landscape Design Submissions and Coordination
A. General. The A-E shall submit
site and landscape design concepts, drawings, sketches, calculations, specifications, etc.
at various stages throughout the design process as outlined in the A-E contract. (Refer to
section 1.8, Design Documentation and Appendix 2A, Site Design Submission
Requirements.)
B. Coordination Checklist. To insure
inter-discipline and intra discipline coordination, a review checklist is provided in
Appendix 2B, Site Design Coordination Checklist. The A-E shall make sure that all
of these items, and others that pertain to good project coordination, are reviewed and
addressed before submission of the documents to ARS.
C. Survey Report. If a survey is part of
the scope of work for the project, see Appendix 2C, Site Survey Report, for
information requirement.
2.2 SITE
SECURITY DESIGN
2.2.1 General
A. From the earliest programming
stages, security considerations shall be an integral part of site planning, perimeter
definition, lighting, signage, and landscaping decisions. Site and landscape design can
help protect a building - particularly by keeping threats away and by incorporating Crime
Prevention Through Environmental Design (CPTED) principles - and decrease the need for
costly building engineering solutions to safety concerns.
Note: For further information on CPTED,
see publications by the National Institute of Law Enforcement and Criminal Justice. See
also Crowe, Timothy D. Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design. National Crime
Prevention Institute (1991).
B. Appropriate site security design
criteria and standards for a project shall be determined based on project-specific risk
assessment done in accordance with the methodology outlined in Interagency Security
Committee (ISC) Security Design Criteria for New Federal Office Buildings and Major
modernization Projects. (See also section 1.4, Security Design)
2.2.2 Site and
Landscape Security Design Considerations
A. Vehicular Control. Blast
pressures from an exploding vehicle bomb decrease rapidly with distance from the
explosion. When a vehicle bomb is identified as a threat, consideration must be given to
how the site design can offer maximum protection to the building, or whether site
constraints require design modifications to the structure of the building itself. Consider
the following design strategy to mitigate blast effects.
1) Maintain as
much distance as possible between a vehicle bomb and the facility.
2) Consider using
various types and designs of buffers and barriers such as walls, fences, trenches, ponds
and water basins, planting, trees, and street furniture.
3) Design site
circulation to prevent high speed approaches by vehicles.
4) Offset vehicle
entrances as necessary from the direction of a vehicle's approach to force a reduction in
speed.
B. Site Lighting. Provide necessary
lighting for security and cameras. The following are examples of effective site lighting
levels: at vehicular and pedestrian entrances (15 horizontal maintained foot candles) and
for a perimeter and vehicular and pedestrian circulation areas (five horizontal maintained
foot candles). In most circumstances, perimeter lighting should be continuous and on both
sides of the perimeter barriers, with minimal hot and cold spots and sufficient to support
CCTV and other surveillance. However, for safety reasons and/or for issues related to
camera technology, but lower levels may be desirable. Other codes or standards may
restrict site lighting levels.
C. Site Signage. Include appropriate
signage to reduce confusion. Confusion over site circulation, parking, and entrance
locations can contribute to a loss of site security. Signs shall be provided of the site
and at entrances; there shall be on-site directional, parking, and cautionary signs for
visitors, employees, service vehicles, and pedestrians. Unless required by other
standards, signs shall generally not be provided that identify sensitive areas.
D. Landscaping. Use design elements to
enhance security. Landscaping design elements that are attractive and welcoming can
enhance security. For example, plants can deter unwanted entry; ponds and fountains can
block vehicle access; and site grading can also limit access. Avoid landscaping that
permits concealment of criminals or obstructs the view of security personnel and CCTV, in
accordance with accepted CPTED principles.
2.3 SITE
DESIGN ELEMENTS
2.3.1 Physical
Character of the Site
To achieve the objectives of good site planning, the designer must
analyze the physical character of the site and the surrounding area and develop a design
that both respect and reinforce the individual character of the site considering the
following:
A. Topography. The topography shall form a
strong influence on design of the project site. On large project sites of open campus-like
development, every effort shall be extended to blend the development with existing
contours. For projects within urban areas where site area is limited, the topography
within and surrounding the site is equally important.
B. Natural Features. Natural site features
such as existing trees, ground forms, and water shall be preserved and utilized to the
maximum extent possible. Usenative plants and water-efficient landscaping practices to the
fullest extent possible. Refer also to the guidance issued by the Office of the Federal
Environmental Executive (August 1995) which provides guidance for the Presidential
Memorandum on Environmentally and Economically Beneficial Landscape Practices on Federal
Landscaped Grounds.
C. Undesirable Conditions that Surround the
Site. Hazards and nuisances adjacent to the project site must be considered when
developing the site plan. Adverse effects of excessive noise, odors, smoke, dust, etc.,
must be alleviated to the extent possible by proper orientation of the structures,
grading, planting screens, and protective buffer strips.
D. Pursuant to E.O. 11988, Floodplain
Management, and E.O. 11990, Wetlands Protection, ARS is required to avoid direct or
indirect support of floodplain development and new construction in wetlands wherever there
is a practicable alternative. When there is no practicable alternative, and if the site is
located in a floodplain, wetland, or could be exposed to flood hazards, this fact shall be
stated on the working drawings. If so, occupied spaces and mechanical and electrical
components shall not be located below the anticipated high water level.
2.3.2 Grading
and Drainage
Grading schemes shall consider the following:
A. Disposal of surface water as quickly as
possible.
B. Preservation of the character of the
natural terrain by minimum disturbance of existing ground forms.
C. Balancing of cut and fill.
D. Avoidance of steps in sidewalks.
E. Meet ground level of existing trees to
be saved, or plan for tree wells as a part of the overall site design concept.
F. The minimum desirable slope for turf
areas shall be not less than 1.5 percent. Maximum slope for turf areas shall not exceed
one foot rise in 3 feet of run.
G. Minimum slope for parking and terrace
areas shall be not less than 1.5 percent or more than 7 percent.
H. Proposed contours must meet existing
grades at the property line or contract limit lines in smooth flowing curves.
I. Banks with slopes in excess of one foot
of rise in 3 feet of run are too steep for mowing. A vine or shrub type ground cover shall
be installed to ensure slope stabilization and reduce maintenance. If a design results in
slopes of two to one or steeper, a retaining wall or revetment shall be provided.
J. Surface drainage shall be directed to
drainage structure inlets within the site limits.
2.3.3 Building
Orientation
Orientation of structure on the site should take full advantage of
sunlight, prevailing breezes, trees and vegetation, topography, and other natural features
that would reduce construction costs and annual maintenance and energy expenditure
2.3.4 Pedestrian
and Vehicular Circulation
Pedestrian and vehicular traffic patterns shall be direct,
convenient, safe, and allow for accessibility by individuals with physical disabilities.
Pedestrian and vehicular traffic shall be separated to the extent possible. Access for
emergency vehicles shall be provided.
2.4 LANDSCAPE
DESIGN
2.4.1 General
Principles
A. The landscape design shall be an
integral component of the total project environment, and shall respect and preserve its
existing natural attributes.
B. The landscape maintenance capability of
buildings management, or designated services contract, shall be a major consideration in
the amount and complexity of the landscape design.
C. The design shall be kept simple in form
but of sufficient quantity to create the mass effect of the design concept.
D. The use of hardy plants that will thrive
in the climate hardiness zone of the site is mandatory.
E. Living plants have set habits of growth,
texture, form, and color. These habits must be fully understood to avoid over planting,
excessive maintenance, and conflict with other plants and structures.
F. The screening of objectionable views and
the visual separation of functional elements is desirable; however, visibility and easy
accessibility shall be provided for fire department connections.
G. Use of deciduous planting adjacent to
west and south facing walls shall be encouraged for those climates with seasonal change.
H. Areas within the project boundaries,
except those clearly intended to be modified by development, shall be preserved in their
existing condition, or so improved that they will be compatible with both the new
construction and the surrounding landscape.
2.4.2 Planting
in Public Spaces
The agency has no authority to expend funds to plant trees or
shrubs in areas not owned by the Federal Government. If a city has a master plan for
street tree planting, the project landscape architect shall coordinate with the city plan.
The project plan shall then be submitted to the city for inclusion in its next street
improvement project. However, many city codes require that street tree planting must be
included in all building projects. Local codes should be followed using the type of tree
specified on the street tree plan.
2.4.3 Planting
Within or Above Portions of Buildings
Planting within or above portions of buildings poses special
problems in the selection of plant material and the provisions to maintain the planting.
Planting around air exhaust openings and over utility tunnels shall be avoided whenever
possible. High winds and extreme temperature changes require added maintenance for plants
within, or on, buildings.
2.5 SITE
PLANNING/LANDSCAPE DESIGN PROCESSES
2.5.1 General
Site planning and landscape design, like the other design
processes, demand that several tasks be performed and several plans be produced in order
to develop a responsive, effective design.
2.5.2 Coordination
of Design Professionals
A. In any project that includes a
substantial site area development, it is essential that a landscape architect be a member
of the project design team. The landscape architect must maintain a close liaison during
each design phase of the project. Decisions regarding the location and operation of the
mechanical, structural, and utility systems have a major impact on the site plan and
landscaping. Cooperative decisions as to how and where they can best be accommodated are
mandatory. In order to become acquainted with the area and its surroundings, the designer
shall make frequent visits to the site during the stages of site plan development. This
will facilitate accurate determination of the proposed plan's adaptability to the site.
B. If landscape design drawings are
required, a registered landscape architect shall prepare the landscape plans.
2.5.3 Site
Surveys
Before preparing project site studies, a site survey shall be
performed to obtain comprehensive information on existing site and landscape conditions.
New construction sites shall be evaluated for the presence of radon. Where radon is
present, design of facilities shall include appropriate measures to keep radon
concentration below the EPA recommended action level. Refer to Appendix 2C, Site Survey
Report for information requirement. Contact the USDA Radiation Safety Staff for
information on conducting radon site surveys.
2.5.4 Site
Analysis
After the site surveys have been completed, a thorough analysis of
existing site and landscaping conditions shall be developed as part of the design concept
phase.
A. This analysis shall include
consideration of the following site conditions: topography, views and vistas, traffic
patterns (pedestrian and vehicular), noise, permanent site features, planting, climate,
solar orientation, wind conditions, environmental and historical preservation impacts, and
land ownership status, including potential impacts to existing rights-of-way, easements,
etc.
B. Site analysis shall also include the
evaluation of the geography for radon. Where radon presence is likely, special features
for radon mitigation in the initial construction design must be considered.
Appendix
2A: Site Design Submission Requirements
2A-1. 15 Percent Site Design (Concepts) Submittal
A. General. This submittal stage is
required on the more complex projects, and/or where architectural design elements are
required to obtain coordinated interior design development, or development of exterior
design considerations.
B. Site Survey. If a survey is part of the
scope of work for the project, see Appendix 2C, Site Survey Report for
requirements.
C. Drawings.
1) Site location
plan showing the site relative to location of city center, major landmarks, major parking
facilities, major roads and airport etc.
2) Existing site
plans (at least one block around the site), describing: site boundaries, approximate
topography, existing buildings, setbacks and easements; climatic conditions; location of
on-site and off-site utilities; natural landscape; pedestrian and vehicular circulation.
Include direction of traffic on adjoining streets.
3) Site plans for
each design scheme, showing: building location and massing; building expansion potential;
and parking and service areas.
D. Narrative (in Executive
Summary format)
1) Site statements,
describing:
a.) Existing
site features.
b.) Climatic
conditions.
c.) A
topography and drainage patterns.
d.) Any
existing erosion conditions.
e.) Wetlands
and locations of flood plains.
f.) Surrounding
buildings (style, scale).
g.) Circulation
patterns around the site.
h.) Site
access.
i.) Noise/visual
considerations.
j.) Local
zoning restrictions.
k.) Hazardous
waste.
l.) Pollution.
m.) Potential
archeological artifacts.
n.) Historic
preservation considerations, if applicable.
2) Site
photographs, showing contiguous areas.
3) Existing major
site utilities.
4) Description of
site and landscape design concept
a.) Circulation.
b.) Parking.
c.) Paving.
d.) Landscape
design.
e.) Irrigation,
if any.
f.) Utility
distribution and collection systems.
g.) Method
for storm water detention or retention.
h.) Landscape
maintenance concept.
i.) Fire
protection, water supplies, fire hydrants, and fire apparatus access roads.
j.) Accessibility
paths for the physically disabled.
2A-2. 35 Percent Site Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis
1) Listing of
applicable codes.
2) Site security
considerations
3) Environmental
considerations and permitting requirements
4) Responses to the
15 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and
Specifications
1) Site plan
showing:
a) All
buildings, roads, walks, parking and other paved areas (including type of pavement).
b) Accessible
route from parking areas and from public streets to main facility
entrance.
c) Fire
apparatus and fire lanes.
2) Grading and
drainage plan, showing site grading and storm drainage inlets, including storm water
detention features.
3) Site utility's
plan, showing sizes and locations of domestic and fire protection water supply lines,
sanitary sewer lines, steam/condensate lines, and chilled water supply and return lines,
if applicable.
4) A landscape
design plan, showing general areas of planting, paving, site furniture, water features,
etc.
5) Irrigation plan,
if applicable.
6) List of
Specifications sections to be used.
2A-3 50 Percent Site Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis
1) Revisions from
the 35 percent submittal.
2) Narrative
Description of Site/Landscape systems.
3) Description of
site security measures.
4) Description of
energy conservation measures.
5) Site storm
drainage combined with building storm drainage, and sanitary sewer calculations.
6) Storm water
detention calculations, if applicable
7) Parking
calculations, if applicable.
8) Dewatering
calculations.
9) Pipe sizing
calculations for water and sewer pipes.
10) Responses to
the 35 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications.
1) Marked-up
specifications.
2) Preliminary
schedules
3) Demolition
plans, if required.
4) A site plan.
a) Location
of all buildings, roads, walks, accessible routes from parking and public streets to
building entrance, parking and other paved areas, and planted areas.
b) Limits
of construction.
c) Locations
and sizes of fire protection water supply lines, fire hydrants, fire apparatus access
roads, and fire lanes.
d) Location
of flood plains and wetlands.
5) Grading and a
drainage plan, showing:
a) Existing
and new contours.
b) Spot
elevations at all entrances and elsewhere as necessary.
c) Elevations
for walls, ramps, terraces, plazas and parking lots.
d) All
surface drainage structures.
e) Water
retainage and conservation.
6) Site utility's
plan, showing all utilities, including inlets, manholes, clean- outs and invert
elevations.
7) Planting plans,
showing:
a) Building
outline, circulation, parking and major utility runs.
b) Size
and location of existing vegetation to be preserved (include protection measures during
construction).
c) Location
of all new plant material (identify function, such as a windbreak or visual screen where
appropriate).
d) Erosion
control.
8) Planting
schedules, showing quantity of plants, botanical names, planted size and final size.
9) Irrigation plan,
if applicable. Include schematic of irrigation control system.
10) Planting and
construction details, profiles, sections, and notes as necessary to fully describe design
intent.
11) Construction
phasing, if part of a project.
12) Potential
archeological artifacts.
2A-4 95 Percent Site Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis.
1) Any revisions
from the 50 percent submittal.
2) Narrative
Description of HVAC systems
3) Responses to the
50 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Essentially
complete drawings and specifications with only minor coordination and technical issues to
be resolved.
2A-5 100 Percent Site Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis.
1) Complete Design
Analysis incorporating the final calculations, narrative, equipment selections, review
comments etc.
2) Responses to the
95 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Complete drawing
and specification packages suitable to "Issue for Construction."
Appendix
2B: Site Design Coordination Checklist
2B-1. General
This checklist is intended to provide an interdisciplinary
coordination review.
A. Piping and other utility locations and
inverts at building penetrations coordinated with mechanical drawings.
B. Electrical service coordinated with
electrical drawings.
C. Interference of utilities with
underground electrical runs checked.
D. Interference between planting and
utilities checked.
E. Elevations of entrances coordinated with
architectural drawings.
F. Required reinforcement showed for all
free standing and retaining walls.
G. Connections to foundation drainage
coordinated.
H. Sub-surface drainage shown.
I. Location of underground storage tanks
shown.
J. Construction of underground storage
tanks detailed.
Appendix
2C: Site Survey Report
2C-1. General
The criteria listed here are not absolute; they shall be modified
by the civil engineer to suit the particular conditions of the project. All surveys shall
be prepared and sealed by a surveyor licensed in the state where the project is located.
2C-2. Information Requirements
Surveys shall contain the following information:
A. Locations of all permanent features
within limits of work, such as buildings, structures, fences, walls, concrete slabs and
foundations, aboveground tanks, cooling towers, transformers, sidewalks, steps, power and
light poles, traffic control devices, manholes, fire hydrants, valves, culverts,
headwalls, catch basins or inlets, property corner markers, benchmarks, etc.
B. Location of all adjacent and abounding
roads or streets and street curbs within limits of work, including driveways and
entrances. Type of surfacing and limits shall be shown. For public streets, right-of-way
widths and center lines shall also be shown.
C. Location of all trees, shrubs, and other
plants within limits of work shall be indicated. For trees, caliper size shall be shown;
dead trees shall be indicated.
D. Location of all overhead telephone and
power lines within the limits of work and their related easements.
E. Based on existing records, location of
underground utilities, such as gas, water, steam, chilled water, electric power, sanitary,
storm, combined sewers, telephone, etc., shall be shown. Sizes of pipes (I.D.), invert
elevations, inlet or manhole rim elevations shall be indicated. Where appropriate,
information shall be verified in the field.
F. Based on existing records, location of
underground storage tanks or other subsurface structures.
G. Topography field criteria shall include
such items as contour intervals plotted on a grid system appropriate to the scale of the
survey; elevations at top and bottom of ditches and at any abrupt changes in the grade;
periodic top-of-curb and gutter elevations, as well as street centerline elevations;
elevations at all permanent features within the limits of work; ground floor elevations
for all existing buildings.
H. Bearings and distances for all property
lines within the limits of work.
I. Official datums upon which elevations
are based and the benchmark on or adjacent to the site to be used as a starting point.
J. Official datums upon which horizontal
control points are based.
K. If there are not already two benchmarks
on the site, establish two permanent benchmarks.
L. Elevations of key datum points of all
building structures and improvements directly adjacent the project site
M. Delineate location of any wetlands or
flood plains, underground streams or water sources.
N. Presence of radon in accordance with
Departmental Regulation 1650-3. (Contact the USDA Radiation Safety Staff for information
on conducting radon site surveys.)
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
This chapter provides general objectives, considerations, and
procedures of architectural elements in the design of ARS buildings and related
structures.
3.1.2 Codes
and Standards
A. General. The design shall comply with
the requirements of the site applicable codes and standards that apply to architectural
design. The current edition of each applicable code, in effect at the time of design
contract award, shall be used throughout the project's design and construction. See
Chapter 1: Basic Requirements for complete discussion of codes and other special
requirements
B. Code Review and Analysis and Waiver
Process. The code criteria shall be reviewed by the A-E to the degree of detail necessary
to assure that tasks accomplished during design meet code requirements. All deviations
from code/ARS requirements and any equivalency concepts proposed for use must be
identified by the A-E and submitted to the Government for approval no later than the 35
percent design stage. See Section 1.2.5 for requirements.
3.1.3 Architectural
Design Submissions and Coordination
A. General. The A-E shall submit
architectural design concepts, drawings, sketches, calculations, specifications, etc. at
various stages throughout the design process as outlined in the A-E contract. (Refer to
section 1.8, Design Documentation and Appendix 3A, Architectural Design
Submission Requirements.)
B. Coordination Checklist. To insure
inter-discipline and intra discipline coordination, a review checklist is provided in
Appendix 3B, Architectural Design Coordination Checklist. The A-E shall make sure
that all of these items, and others that pertain to good project coordination, are
reviewed and addressed before submission of the documents to ARS.
3.1.4 Safety
and Health
Materials and products with known or suspected properties that are
hazardous to the health of occupants and installers shall be avoided. Only materials that
are lead or asbestos free shall be used in ARS buildings. This includes materials such as
paint, adhesives, sealers, sealants, floor tiles, etc.
3.1.5 Accessibility
Public Law 90-480 requires that Federal buildings, including site
work, be designed to ensure that individuals with physical disabilities will have ready
access to, and use of, such buildings. ARS requires compliance with UFAS and ADAAG
whichever is more stringent.
3.2 ARCHITECTURAL
SECURITY DESIGN
3.2.1 General
A. Appropriate architectural security design
criteria and standards for a project shall be determined based on project-specific risk
assessment done in accordance with the methodology outlined in the ISC Security Design
Criteria for New Federal Office Buildings and Major modernization Projects.
(See also section 1.4, Security Design)
B. This section focuses on using
interior planning to safeguard occupants and critical building systems. The location of
functions away from high risk areas can reduce vulnerability and the consequences of
various tactics. The careful selection of materials can improve building performance and
enhance the Occupant Emergency Plan (OEP).
3.2.2 Architecture
and Interior Design Considerations
A. Planning
1) Office
Locations. Locate vulnerable offices out of public view. Offices of vulnerable officials
shall be placed or glazed so that the occupant cannot be seen from an uncontrolled public
area such as a street. Whenever possible, these offices shall face courtyards, internal
sites, or controlled areas. If this is not possible, suitable obscuring glazing or window
treatment shall be provided.
2) Mixed
Occupancies. Separate high and low-risk tenants. When possible,high-risk tenants shall not
be housed with low-risk tenants. If they are housed together, publicly accessible areas
shall be separated from high-risk tenants.
3) Public Toilets
and Service Areas. Do not place public toilets and service areas in unsecured locations.
Public toilets, service spaces, or access to vertical circulation systems shall not be
located in any non secure areas, including the queuing area before screening at the public
entrance.
4) Loading Docks
and Shipping and Receiving Areas. Separate loading docks and shipping and receiving from
utilities. Protecting utility systems and/or locating them away from vulnerable areas
helps assure that services will provide life safety and operations support after an
attack.
Loading docks and
receiving and shipping areas shall be separated from utility rooms, utility mains, and
service entrances including electrical, telephone/data, fire detection/alarm systems, fire
suppression water mains, cooling and heating mains, etc. Loading docks shall be located so
that vehicles will not be driven into or parked under the building.
5) Stairwells.
Locate emergency stairwells away from high-risk areas. Stairwells required for emergency
egress should be designed to support the OEP. Specify related requirements.
Stairwells
required for emergency egress shall be located as remotely as possible from areas where
blast events might occur. Wherever possible, stairs should not discharge into lobbies,
parking, or loading areas.
6) Mail room.
Locate mail room away from critical components. The basic strategy is to detect delivered
bombs before they explode. Space may need to be provided for equipment to examine incoming
packages and for special containers. In some areas, an off-site location may be cost
effective, or several buildings may share one mail room.
The mail room
shall be located away from facility main entrances, areas containing critical services,
utilities, distribution systems, and important assets. In addition, the mail room shall be
located at the perimeter of the building with an outside wall or window designed for
pressure relief. It shall have adequate space for explosive disposal containers. An area
near the loading dock may be a preferred mail room location.
B. Interior Construction
1) Lobby Doors and
Partitions. Security procedures and OEPs will have a major impact on lobby design.
Identify whether or not access control and screening are required, the level of
protection, and the location. Concepts such as self-enclosed screening systems at the
lobby, result in a different lobby design than screening stations within the building and
impact other building systems, including egress, queuing, HVAC, and fire protection.
2) Critical
Building Components. Assuming that the building has structurally survived a bomb blast,
evacuation and rescue are the most important concerns. The goal is to increase the
likelihood that emergency systems will remain operational during a disaster. Separate the
following critical building components from high-risk areas. One obvious strategy to avoid
the cost of hardening is to locate the se systems away from attack locations such as main
entrance, vehicle circulation, parking, or maintenance area.
a) Emergency
generator including fuel systems, day tank, fire sprinkler, and water supply;
b) Normal
fuel storage.
c) Main
switchgear.
d) Telephone
distribution and main switchgear.
e) Fire
pumps.
f) Building
control centers.
g) UPS
systems controlling critical functions.
h) Main
refrigeration systems if critical to building operation.
i) Elevator
machinery and controls.
j) Shafts
for stairs, elevators, and utilities.
k) Critical
distribution feeders for emergency power.
C. Exterior Entrances
The entrance design must balance
aesthetic, security, risk, and operational considerations. One strategy is to consider
co-locating public and employee entrances. Entrances should be designed to avoid
significant queuing.
1) Equipment
Space. Public and employee entrances shall include space for possible future installation
of access control and screening equipment.
2) Entrance
Co-location. Combine public and employee entrances.
3) Garage and
Vehicle Service Entrances. All garage or service area entrances for government controlled
or employees permitted vehicles that are not otherwise protected by site perimeter
barriers shall be protected by devices capable of arresting a vehicle of the designated
threat size at the designated speed.
D. Additional Features
1) Areas of
Potential Concealment. To reduce the potential for concealment of devices before screening
points, avoid installing features such as trash receptacles and mail boxes that can be
used to hide devices. If mail or express boxes are used, the size of the openings shall be
restricted to prohibit insertion of packages.
2) Roof Access.
Design locking systems to limit roof access to authorized personnel
3.2.3 Parking
Security
Parking restrictions help keep threats away from a building. In
urban settings, however, curbside or underground parking is often necessary and/or
difficult to control. Mitigating the risks associated with parking requires creative
design and planning measures, including parking restrictions, perimeter buffer zones,
barriers, structural hardening, and other architectural and engineering solutions.
A. Parking
1) Parking on
Adjacent Streets. Restrict adjacent street parking. Parking is often permitted in curb
lanes with a sidewalk between the curb lane and the building. Where distance from the
building to the nearest curb provides an insufficient setback, and compensating design
measures do not sufficiently protect the building from the assessed threat, parking in the
curb lane shall be restricted as follows
a) Allow
unrestricted parking.
b) Allow
government-owned and key employee parking only.
c) Use
the lane for stand-off. Use structural features to prevent parking.
2) Parking on
Adjacent Properties. Maintain prescribed distance between parked cars and facility. The
recommended minimum setback distance between the building and parked vehicles range from 5
ft to 100 ft depending on the protection level desired for the project. Adjacent public
parking should be directed to more distant or better protected areas, segregated from
employee parking and away from the facility.
B. Parking Facilities
1) Natural
Surveillance. Design parking facilities to enhance natural surveillance. For all
stand-alone above ground parking facilities, maximizing visibility across as well as into
and out of the parking facility shall be a key design principle.
The preferred
parking facility design employs express or non parking ramps, speeding the user to parking
on flat surfaces.
Pedestrian paths
should be planned to concentrate activity to the extent possible. For example, bringing
all pedestrians through one portal rather than allowing them to disperse to numerous
access points improves the ability to see and be seen by other users. Likewise, limiting
vehicular entry/exits to a minimum number of locations is beneficial. Long span
construction and high ceilings create an effect of openness and aid in lighting the
facility. Shear wails should be avoided, especially near turning bays and pedestrian
travel paths. Where shear walls are required, large holes in shear walls can help to
improve visibility. Openness to the exterior should be maximized.
It is also
important to eliminate dead-end parking areas as well as nooks and crannies.
Landscaping should
be done judiciously so as not to provide hiding places. It is desirable to hold planting
away from the facility to permit observation of intruders.
2) Stair Towers
and Elevators
a) Parking
facilities shall have open stair and tower and elevator lobbies. Stair tower and elevator
lobby design shall be as open ascode permits. The ideal solution is a stair and/or
elevator waiting area totally open to the exterior and/or the parking areas. Designs that
ensure that people using these areas can be easily seen - and can see out - should be
encouraged. If a stair must be enclosed for code or weather protection purposes glass
walls will deter both personal injury attacks and various types of vandalism. Potential
hiding places below stairs should be closed off; nooks and crannies should be avoided.
b) Elevator
cabs should have glass backs whenever possible. Elevator lobbies should be well lighted
and visible to both patrons in the parking areas and the public out on the street. When
enclosure is required, such as in underground parking garages, an automatic fire door, or
for a larger opening, a rolling fire shutter with an access door can be employed so that
the area is wide open during normal use. Either the door or shutter will be closed by a
smoke detector when needed instead of a tire-rated door that remains closed all the time.
3) Perimeter
Access Control
a) Consider
alternatives to fencing. Security screening or fencing may be provided at points of low
activity to discourage anyone from entering the facility on foot while still maintaining
openness and natural surveillance.
b) Use
fencing, grills, or doors to close access when necessary. A system of fencing, grilles,
doors, etc. should be designed to completely close down access to the entire facility in
unattended hours, or in some cases, all hours. Any ground level pedestrian exits that open
into non secure areas should be emergency exits only and fitted with panic bar hardware
for exiting movement only.
4) Surface
Finishes and Signage. Provide parking facilities with clear signage and light surface
finishes. Interior walls shall be painted a light color (i.e., white or light blue) to
improve illumination. Signage shall be clear to avoid confusion and direct users to their
destination efficiently. If an escort service is available, signs should inform users.
5) Lighting.
Parking facilities shall have adequate lighting levels. Lighting levels shall comply with
the following table:
[(From Chrest
Anthony P. Smith Mary S.. and Bhuyan. Sam. Parking Structures: Planning. Design
Construction. Maintenance and Repair. 2nd edition. Chapman and Hall. (1 996).]
Maintained Illumination Levels (Footcandles)
Low | Low/Med | Medium | Higher | |
Horizontal illumination at the pavement, minimum: | ||||
1.25 | 1.50 | 1.75 | 2.00 | |
0.25 | 0.50 | 0.75 | 1.00 | |
2.5 | 3.5 | 4.5 | 5.5 | |
minimum) | 4:1 | 4:1 | 4:1 | 4:1 |
minimum) | 20:1 | 20:1 | 20:1 | 20:1 |
Vertical illumination 5 feet above the pavement, minimum: | ||||
0.625 | 0.75 | 0.875 | 1 | |
0.125 | 0.25 | 0.375 | 0.5 | |
1.25 | 1.75 | 2.25 | 2.75 |
The lighting level
standards recommended by the Illuminations Engineering Society of North Arnerica (IESNA)
Subcommittee on Off-Roadway Facilities are the lowest acceptable lighting levels for any
parking facility. The above table adjusts the lighting levels according to the protection
level. A point by point analysis should be done in accordance with the IESNA standards.
6) Emergency
Communications. Parking facilities shall be provided with emergency duress stations.
Emergency intercom/duress buttons or assistance stations should be placed on structure
columns, fences, other posts, and/or freestanding pedestals and brightly marked with
stripping or paint visible in low light. If CCTV coverage is available, automatic
activation of corresponding cameras should be provided, as well as dedicated
communications with security or law enforcement stations. It is helpful to include
flashing lights that can rapidly pinpoint the location of the calling station for the
response force, especially in very large parking structures. It should only be possible to
reset a station that has been activated at the station with a security key. It should not
be possible to reset the station from any monitoring site.
A station should
be within 50 feet of reach.
7) CCTV
a) Parking
facilities shall be provided with CCTV cameras at entry and exit ramps. Color CCTV cameras
with recording capability and pan-zoom-tilt drivers, if warranted should be placed at
entrance and exit vehicle ramps. Auto-scanning units are not recommended.
b) Fixed-mount
fixed-lens color or monochrome cameras should be placed on at least one side of regular
use and emergency exit doors connecting to the building or leading outside. In order for
these cameras to capture scenes of violations, time-delayed electronic locking should be
provided at doors, if permitted by governing code authorities. Without features such as
time-delayed unlocking or video motion detection, these cameras may be ineffective.
3.3 SPACE
REQUIREMENTS
3.3.1 Scope
Space requirements for a project shall be in compliance with
applicable Federal Property Management Regulations (FPMR) as contained in the Program of
Requirements (POR). It is the responsibility of the designer to adhere to the space
requirements as contained in the POR, and to design a project that can be constructed
within the time and budget constraints.
3.3.2 Building
Area Calculations
These shall be defined and computed in accordance with the
American Institute of Architects (AIA) Guidelines, Publication D101.
3.3.3 Building
Efficiency
The ratio of net to gross area shall be established in the project
POR. Spaces shall be sized to support the intended function without wasted footage. Use
AIA Guidelines Publication D101 for calculating building efficiency ratios.
3.4 SPECIAL
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3.4.1 Incorporation
of Recycled-Content Materials
The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) requires
agencies to buy recycled-content products designated by EPA. ARS is committed to
maximizing the use of recycled and recycled-content materials specified in the
construction of Federal building projects. The greatest opportunity to implement these
requirements is in the selection of architectural materials. The most common building
products incorporating recycled materials currently available on the market are:
A. Fiberboard
B. Laminated paperboard
C. Insulation
D. Carpet
E. Cement
F. Concrete
G. Paint
H. Resilient Flooring
The EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG) provide
extensive information on the designated products containing recycled materials for
purchase and use by Federal agencies and their contractors.
Information on specifying and purchasing recycled-content products
can be found on the internet at http://www.epa.gov/cpg.
3.4.2 Acoustics
A. General. ARS has adopted the following
standards to ensure adequate acoustics in buildings.
B. Parameters used in Acoustic Design. The
following parameters are used to establish acoustical standards for ARS buildings.
1) Ambient Noise
Level. This parameter refers to the level of noise within a space. Generally, the lower
the level of ambient noise the more comfortable inhabitants will feel. On the other hand,
mechanical sound is sometimes introduced into a space to mask background noise and/or
raise the level of speech privacy. Ambient noise level is quantified by Noise Criterion
(NC) Curves, published in ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
2) Noise
Isolation. This parameter refers to the amount of noise transmitted through the perimeter
of a space. The better the sound barrier, the higher its Sound Transmission Class (STC).
3) Noise Isolation
Class. This is a classification established by ASTM E-336 for determining noise isolation
between existing building spaces. A modification of the rating, Speech Privacy Noise
Isolation Class (NIC), is used to rate ceiling tile and freestanding space dividers in
open plan office space.
4) Reverberation
Control. Reverberation defines the amount and direction of sound reflected from a given
material. A harder surface produces a reflected noise level. Soft surfaces absorb sound
waves and reduce the ambient noise level. The ability of a given material to absorb sound
is expressed by its Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC)
C. Design Criteria for Building Spaces. The
most effective way to control noise propagation in buildings is to provide buffers between
noisy and quiet areas. Buffers can be unoccupied space, shafts, filing or archive areas.
1) Class A Spaces:
These are critical, noise sensitive spaces. The category includes auditoria. The
acoustical treatment of these spaces must be designed by a qualified acoustical consultant
or specialist. Technical criteria and design variables should be established by an
acoustical specialist based on an analysis of the user's needs.
2) Class B1
Spaces: This category describes spaces where meetings take place on a regular basis,
including conference rooms and training rooms.
a) The
design ambient noise levels must not exceed NC 30. Air supply and return systems should be
equipped with sound traps or insulated ductwork to meet this criterion.
b) Sound
isolation at partitions enclosing Class B1 space is a minimum STC of 45. Doors must be
gasketed.
c) Acoustical
ceilings must have a minimum of NRC of 0.55 if the space is carpeted or 0.65 if not
carpeted. Background masking should not be used.
3) Class B2
Spaces: This category consists of spaces where people are likely to speak in a higher than
normal tone of voice and spaces where concentrations of noisy equipment are located,
including laboratories (with fume hoods), dining areas, ADP areas, computer equipment
rooms and rooms housing high speed copiers.
a) The
design ambient noise levels must not exceed NC 55. Noise measurements for laboratory space
with fume hoods shall be taken with all the fume hoods operating and with sashes opened
halfway.
b) Sound
isolation at partitions enclosing class B2 space must be a minimum STC of 45. Doors must
be gasketed.
c) Acoustical
ceilings must have minimum NRC of 0.55 if the space is carpeted or 0.65 if not carpeted.
If background sound masking is used, the NRC criteria do not apply.
4) Class C1
Spaces: Enclosed general office space falls in this category.
a) The
design ambient noise levels must not exceed class NC 35.
b) Partition
and ceiling assemblies must have a minimum STC of 40. Partitions should terminate at the
underside of the ceiling. Floors should be carpeted, unless unusual circumstances exist.
c) Acoustical
ceiling units must have a minimum NRC of 0.55 if the space is carpeted or 0.65 if not
carpeted. This does not apply to spaces with background masking systems.
5) Class C2
Spaces: This category describes open plan spaces.
a) The
design ambient noise levels must not exceed NC 35.
b) Noise
isolation must meet the requirements of at least NIC 20.
c) Acoustical
ceiling units must have a minimum NRC of 0.55 if the space is carpeted. Ceiling ratings do
not apply to spaces withbackground sound masking. Where background sound masking is used,
the system should be designed by qualified acoustical consultant.
6) Class D Spaces:
Occupied spaces where speech privacy is not a significant consideration, such as internal
corridors, circulation stairs and file rooms, are part of this category.
a) The
same criteria apply as for Class C1, except that noise isolation is not a requirement.
7) Class E Spaces:
These are public spaces and support spaces: lobbies, atria, toilets and locker rooms.
a) The
design ambient noise levels must not exceed class NC 40.
b) There
are no specific sound isolation requirements, but Class E spaces should be separated as
far as possible from quiet areas. In large lobbies, acoustical treatment must be provided
on some surfaces to mitigate reverberation, especially if the space is programmed for
assembly uses.
8) Class F Spaces:
These are warehouses, parking garages and fire stairs not used for normal circulation.
a) The
design ambient noise levels must not exceed NC 50.
b) Class
F spaces should be separated as far as possible from quiet areas.
9) Class X Spaces:
These are spaces where noisy operations are located, including kitchens, mechanical,
electrical and communications equipment rooms, elevator machine rooms and trash compactor
rooms.
a) The
design ambient noise level has no fixed limit, but treatment should be considered if NC 60
is exceeded.
b) Should
isolation between Class X spaces and other spaces shall be a minimum of STC 45.
Consideration must be given to sound transmission through floors and ceilings to spaces
above and below. Sound isolation floors are recommended for all mechanical room floors
where space below is occupied.
D. Sound Isolation From Exterior Noise
Sources. The exterior construction systems recommended in these standards will screen out
ordinary traffic noise. Buildings located near airports or other sources of high noise
levels shall have special exterior glazing and gasketing systems, designed with the
assistance of a qualified acoustical consultant.
3.5 BUILDING
ELEMENTS
3.5.1 Exterior
A. Configuration and Orientation. The
configuration and orientation of any new structure shall be carefully analyzed to make
optimum use of site potentialities and to reduce energy consumption. When selecting highly
reflective exterior finishes, the designer shall establish whether surrounding structures
will be adversely influenced by increased solar load and, if so, avoid the adverse impact
by properly locating these surfaces. To the extent allowed by site constraints, the design
shall be such that existing neighboring structures that make use of passive or active
solar design shall not be compromised by the new design.
B. Roofing. Roof drains shall be located at
low points. Buildings with nominally flat roofs, shall have the finished roofing system
sloped a minimum of 1/4-inch per foot to the roof drains. The pattern of roof drains, high
points, and slope to drain shall be indicated on the roof plan.
C. Roof-Mounted Equipment. Since it is a
potential source of leaks, roof-mounted equipment shall be held to a minimum. Wherever
possible, roof penetrations shall be consolidated or grouped together utilizing a common
roof curb flashing platform.
Permanent access shall be provided to
roof-mounted equipment requiring maintenance. The access shall be from the building
interior, preferably a permanent stairway or door leading onto the roof from a penthouse
or a higher portion of the building. Where this is not feasible, a permanently installed
ship's ladder to a roof hatch of the counterbalanced type shall be provided. The access
shall be located in a portion of the building available to operating and maintenance
personnel at all times. Walkways or duckboards shall be provided on the roof along routes
to and around equipment requiring maintenance. Where the walkways are close to a vertical
drop of 12 inches or more, they shall be provided with handrails to prevent falling.
Supports for cooling towers and other
equipment shall not be constructed directly on the roof membrane. If such equipment must
be located on the roof, a supplementary elevated roof platform shall be constructed to
minimize membrane penetrations. The supplementary platform shall extend a minimum of 3
feet clear around the perimeter of the equipment, and permit access to the roof surface
below. Penetrations in the roof deck shall be protected againstleakage. For existing
buildings, the structural capacity of the existing roof structure shall be determined
before equipment is redesigned.
D. Windows and Glazing. Safety glass shall
be used for glazed doors and sidelights, and other areas adjacent to, or in, the line of
pedestrian traffic. Partitions and exterior fenestration that are glazed to the floor line
shall have protective barriers at push bar height.
Air infiltration of exterior glazing
systems, whether fixed or operable, shall be no greater than 0.20 cfm/linear feet of sash
perimeter, per American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E 263 at a static
pressure of 6.24 psf. Exterior windows shall be provided with an internally controllable
shading device. The type and location of shading systems shall be based on the building
exposure and tenants' occupancy. For physical security design considerations, refer to
sections 1.4 and 3.2.
E. Building Entry. Weather protection for
building entry areas shall be provided by such methods as building overhangs, entry
vestibules, canopies, roof projections, or recessed doorways. Designs shall attempt to
minimize the accumulation of snow at building entrances through use of canopies,
overhangs, and other such devices. For physical security design considerations, refer to
sections 1.4 and 3.2.
3.5.2 Interior
A. Floors. For acoustical considerations,
carpet or carpet tile is required in office space designed to accommodate open-plan or
office landscaped space. To facilitate removal when remodeling or renovation is necessary,
carpeting shall be attached to a substrate with strippable adhesives, whenever it is
glued. For foam backed carpeting and carpeting with a separate pad, use stretch type
installation.
B. Ceilings. The minimum clear ceiling
height, i.e., vertical distance from floor to lowest obstruction above, shall be 8 feet;
however, there may be other job-related factors to be considered which necessitate a
higher ceiling, such as addition of access floor for computer areas.
For fire safety considerations, a
suspended ceiling is unacceptable as a component of a fire resistive floor/ceiling
assembly. If a fire rating is required with steel joist construction, a permanent
fire-resistive membrane must be fixed to the underside of the joists. Approved designs are
illustrated in the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistive Directory. If desired, an
additional finished ceiling may be suspended below.
Where it is necessary to obtain access to
the space above a suspended ceiling formaintenance work, the ceiling shall be fully
accessible. No panel shall exceed 15 square feet in size in order to facilitate removal by
one person.
C. Doors. Except for closet doors, minimum
door width shall be 3 feet and minimum height shall be 6 feet 8 inches. In order to permit
future lowering of suspended ceilings, tops of doors shall be a minimum of one foot below
the ceiling.
Fire doors shall meet the requirements
contained in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 80. Doors, hardware,
and frames of fire door assemblies shall bear the label of the Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc., Factory Mutual, or other approved testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM E 152.
D. Finishes. Walls within general work
spaces shall be painted a single neutral color. The number of coats shall be held to a
minimum, but must completely cover the existing substrate, and the designer shall consider
this factor in selecting the color.
In order to reduce lighting loads, light
colors shall be used for painted and unpainted surfaces in general work spaces. Ceilings
shall have a coefficient of reflectivity of not less than 75 percent, walls not less than
50 percent, and floors not less than 20 percent.
3.6 BUILDING
SUPPORT SPACES
3.6.1 Service
Areas (i.e., ancillary areas of a building that house its maintenance/
operational support functions).
Building service areas shall be located to best serve their
function. Partitions in such locations shall be constructed of durable easily maintained
materials, such as masonry or concrete.
Centrally located service closets and gear rooms shall be provided
on each floor as close as possible to the elevators. Adequate, easily accessible storage
facilities shall be provided for all required exterior ground maintenance equipment.
3.6.2 Mechanical/Electrical
Spaces
Building design shall incorporate adequate access and space to
permit the installation, maintenance, and replacement of mechanical and electrical
equipment. Effective means must be included in the design to prevent the transmission of
objectionable noise and vibration. Use of acoustical material in research laboratories and
animal rooms may be restricted or prohibited.
3.6.3 Parking
Facilities
For dimensional criteria involving maneuvering clearances and
layouts for parking facilities, refer to the AIA publication Architectural Graphic
Standards.
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS
ARCHITECTURAL ISSUES
3.7.1 Building
Accessories
A. Flagpoles. A ground-mounted flagpole,
located at the left of the building entrance, shall be provided for new ARS buildings.
Where ground-mounted poles are not feasible, a roof-mounted pole is permissible; or, if
roof mounting is not suitable, an outrigger pole may be used. Only one flagpole need be
provided for a complex of buildings on a common site. Flagpoles shall be of standard
economical design and manufacture.
B. Public Telephones. Provisions for public
telephones for building occupants and the public shall be located in, or visible from,
each public lobby. For reasons of accessibility, telephone booths are not acceptable;
however, recesses may be provided for telephone shelves.
C. Identification Signs, Building
Directories, and Bulletin Boards. When required by the project, the identification signs,
building directories, and bulletin boards shall be designed in compliance with the
requirements specified in P&P 243.2 - REE Signage Policy.
D. Lightning Protection. All metal
flagpoles and metal stacks either attached to buildings or free standing shall be
grounded. See section 6.12.4.
3.7.2 Specifying
Uncommon Products
A. General. In historical preservation or
restoration work and special laboratory or laboratory support work, it may be necessary to
specify materials or products which are not commonly used and may be hard to find. In such
cases it is permissible to specify the source of the uncommon product by stating the
supplier's name, address, and trade name of the product subject to the following
conditions:
1) When more than
one source of the uncommon product is found, each source shall be named.
2) The project
specification shall contain the following statement:
"The use
of a trade name and supplier's name and address in the specification is to indicate a
possible source of the product. The same type of product from other sources shall not be
excluded, provided they possess like functional performance, physical characteristics,
color, and texture. If the product is from a foreign supplier, it shall be subject to the
Buy American Act."
Appendix
3A: Architectural Design Submission Requirements
3A-1. 15 Percent Architectural Design (Concepts)
This submittal stage is required on the more complex projects,
and/or where architectural design elements are required to obtain coordinated interior
design development, or development of exterior design considerations.
A. Drawings
Three or more distinctly different
architectural design schemes and sufficient narrative to allow comparison and selection of
a design direction. Each design scheme shall include:
1) schematic floor
plans indicating spatial relationships and functional arrangements, and elevations.
2) schematic site
plans for each alternate indicating building location and orientation, approximate grades,
and landscaping.
B. Narrative
1) Description of
each architectural design scheme, explaining: organizational concept; expansion potential;
building efficiency; energy efficiency and sustainable design considerations; security
considerations; advantages and disadvantages; and historic preservation considerations, if
applicable.
2) List of
applicable code and code statement. Building classification, occupancy groups,
fire-resistance requirements and general egress requirements that relate to the site and
occupancy use.
3) Construction
cost of alternative schemes. Verify that each design scheme presented can be constructed
within the project budget.
3A-2. 35 Percent Architectural Design
A. Design Analysis
1) Listing of
applicable codes and code compliance statement.
2) Occupant load
and egress calculations
3) Building area
calculations and calculated occupant loads for every space and room in the building.
4) Building
efficiency ratio calculations
5) Acoustical
calculations
6) Toilet fixture
count.
7) Fire resistance
rating of building structural elements.
8) Review of
building compliance with life safety requirements and building security requirements.
9) Interior finish
requirements as they pertain to life safety.
10) Responses to
the 15 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Floor plans,
showing as a minimum: entrances, lobbies, corridors, stairways, elevators, work areas,
special spaces and service spaces (with the principal spaces labeled). Also, floor plans
shall show locations of firewalls and smoke partitions and occupancy type for every space
and room in building shall be identified. Dimensions for critical clearances, such as
vehicle access, should be indicated.
2) Building
sections (as necessary), showing: floor-to-floor heights and other critical dimensions;
labeling of most important spaces; and labeling of floor and roof elevations.
3) Perspective
sketches, renderings and/or presentation model, if included in the project scope.
4) Diagrams
illustrating the ability to access, service and replace mechanical/electrical equipment
showing the pathway with necessary clearance.
5) Location of
accessible pathways and services for the physically disabled.
6) List of
specifications sections to be used.
3A-3. 50 Percent Architectural Design
A. Design Analysis
1) Revisions from
the 35 percent submittal.
2) Responses to the
35 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications.
1) Building floor
plans, showing: spaces individually delineated and labeled; enlarged layouts of special
spaces; and dimensions.
2) Building roof
plan, showing: drainage design, including minimum roof slopes; dimensions; and a membrane
and insulation configuration of the roofing system.
3) Elevations,
showing: entrances, window arrangements, doors; exterior materials with major vertical and
horizontal joints; roof levels; raised flooring and suspended ceiling space; and
dimensions.
4) One longitudinal
and one transverse section, showing: floor-to-floor dimensions; stairs and elevators;
typical ceiling heights; and general roof construction.
5) Exterior wall
sections, showing: materials of exterior wall construction, including flashing,
connections, method of anchoring, insulation, vapor retarders, and glazing treatments; and
vertical arrangement of interior space, including accommodation of mechanical and
electrical services in the floor and ceiling
6) Marked-up
specifications.
7) Room finish
schedules
3A-4. 95 Percent Architectural Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis.
1) Any revisions
from the 50 percent submittal.
2) Responses to the
50 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Essentially
complete drawings and specifications with only minor coordination and technical issues to
be resolved.
3A-5. 100 Percent Architectural Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis.
1) Complete Design
Analysis incorporating the final calculations, narrative, equipment selections, review
comments etc.
2) Responses to the
95 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Complete drawing
and specification package suitable to "Issue for Construction." Listing of
applicable codes.
Appendix
3B: Architectural Design Coordination Checklist
3B-1. General
This checklist enumerates some of the interfaces between
architectural and engineering disciplines that require close coordination.
A. Interference with structural framing
members coordinated.
B. Locations and details of below-grade and
other waterproofing shown, and coordinated with structural drawings.
C. Anchorage of exterior wall elements
shown.
D. Expansion and/or seismic joints shown
and detailed.
E. Adequate clearances to install, service,
repair and replace mechanical and electrical equipment. (Verify all space requirements are
incorporated into the floor plans.)
F. Rooftop mechanical equipment shown.
G. Adequate clearances under rooftop
mechanical and electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance, repair and replacement of
the roofing system.
H. Location of roof drains and floor drains
coordinated with mechanical drawings.
I. Air diffusers and registers coordinated
with mechanical drawings.
J. Louver sizes and locations coordinated
with mechanical drawings.
K. Light fixture types and locations
coordinated with mechanical and electrical drawings.
L. Wall and roof sections coordinated with
heat loss calculations.
M. Adequate envelope design details to
ensure thermal/air/moisture control.
N. For a pressurized plenum raised
flooring, assure an effective barrier to prevent air passage to exterior walls.
O. Acoustical wall treatments shown in
mechanical rooms (if applicable).
P. Location of access panels in plaster
ceilings and soffits coordinated with mechanical drawings.
Q. Plumbing fixture mounting heights
coordinated with mechanical drawings.
R. Coordination of architectural elements
with exposed structural members.
S. Location of air supply and exhaust
systems.
T. Security light fixtures required and
locations coordinated with electrical drawings.
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
This chapter provides general objectives and criteria pertinent to
design of structural elements for ARS buildings.
4.1.2 Codes
and Standards
A. General. The design shall comply with
the requirements of the site applicable codes and standards that apply to structural
system design. The current edition of each applicable code, in effect at the time of
design contract award, shall be used throughout the project's design and construction. See
Chapter 1: Basic Requirements for complete discussion of codes and other special
requirements
B. Code Review and Analysis and Waiver
Process. The code criteria shall be reviewed by the A-E to the degree of detail necessary
to assure that tasks accomplished during design meet code requirements. All deviations
from code/ARS requirements and any equivalency concepts proposed for use must be
identified by the A-E and submitted to the Government for approval no later than the 35
percent design stage. See section 1.2.5 for requirements.
4.1.3 Structural
Design Submissions and Coordination
A. General. The A-E shall submit
structural design concepts, drawings, sketches, calculations, specifications, etc. at
various stages throughout the design process as outlined in the A-E contract. Refer to
section 1.8, Design Documentation and Appendix 4A, Structural Design Submission
Requirements.
B. Coordination Checklist. To insure
inter-discipline and intra discipline coordination, a review checklist is provided in
Appendix 4B, Structural Design Coordination Checklist. The A-E shall make sure that
all of these items, and others that pertain to good project coordination, are reviewed and
addressed before submission of the documents to ARS.
C. Geotechnical Investigation. If a
geotechnical investigation is part of the scope of work for the project, see Appendix 4C, Geotechnical
Investigation and Engineering Report for information requirement.
4.2 STRUCTURAL
SECURITY DESIGN
4.2.1 General
A. Appropriate structural engineering
security design criteria and standards for a project shall be determined based on
project-specific risk assessment done in accordance with the methodology outlined in the
ISC Security Design Criteria for New Federal Office Buildings and Major modernization
Projects. (See also section 1.4, Security Design)
B. The structural criteria shall address
bombing, forced entry, and small arms tactics. The intent shall be to reduce the potential
for widespread catastrophic structural damage and the resulting injury to people.
C. For new construction, the criteria shall
require protection against progressive collapse as well as resistance to blast loads. For
existing construction, however, progressive collapse measures are called for only if the
structure is undergoing a structural renovation, such as a seismic upgrade. The same blast
features that apply to new buildings apply to existing buildings, if technically and
economically feasible.
4.2.2 General
Requirements
A. Designer Qualifications. For buildings
designed to meet Medium or Higher Protection Levels, a blast engineer must be included as
a member of the design team. He or she should have formal training in structural dynamics,
and demonstrated experience with accepted design practices for blast resistant design and
with referenced technical manuals.
B. Design Narratives. A design narrative
and copies of design calculations shall be submitted at each phase identifying the
building-specific implementation of the criteria. Security requirements shall be
integrated into the overall building design starting with the planning phase.
C. Compliance. Full compliance with the
risk assessment and this section is expected. Specific requirements should be in
accordance with the findings of the facility risk assessment.
D. New Techniques. Alternative analysis and
mitigation methods are permitted, provided that the performance level is attained. A peer
group shall evaluate new and untested methods.
E. Methods and References. All building
components requiring blast resistance, shall be designed using established methods and
approaches for determiningdynamic loads, structural detailing, and dynamic structural
response. Design and analysis approaches should be consistent with those in the technical
manuals (TMs) below.
The following are primary TMs:
Air Force Engineering and Services Center.
Protective Construction Design Manual, ESL-TR-87-57. Prepared for Engineering and Services
Laboratory, Tyndall Air Force Base, FL. (1989)
U.S. Department of the Army. Fundamentals
of Protective Design for Conventional Weapons. TM 5-855-1. Washington, D.C., Headquarters,
U.S. Department of the Army. (1986)
U.S. Department of the Army. Security
Engineering, TM 5-853 and Air Force AFMAN 32-1071. Volumes 1, 2, 3, and 4. Washington. DC.
Departments of the Army and Air Force. (1994)
U.S. Department of the Army. Structures to
Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions, Army TM 5-1300, Navy NAVFAC P-397, AFR 88-2.
Washington. D.C., Departments of the Army. Navy and Air Force. (1990)
U.S. Department of Energy. A Manual for
the Prediction of Blast and Fragment Loading on Structures, DOEJIC 11268. Washington,
D.C., Headquarters, U.S. Department of Energy. (1992)
F. Structural and Non-Structural Elements
To address blast, the priority for
upgrades should be based on the relative importance of a structural or non-structural
element, in the order defined below:
1) Primary
Structural Elements - the essential parts of the building's resistance to catastrophic
blast loads and progressive collapse, including columns, girders, roof beams, and the main
lateral resistance system.
2) Secondary
Structural Elements - all other load bearing members, such as floor beams, slabs, etc.
3) Primary
Non-Structural Elements - elements (including their attachments) which are essential for
life safety systems or elements which can cause substantial injury if failure occurs,
including ceilings or heavy suspended mechanical units.
4) Secondary
Non-Structural Elements - all elements not covered in primary non-structural elements,
such as partitions, furniture, and light fixtures.
Priority shall be given to the critical
elements that are essential to mitigating the extent of collapse. Designs for secondary
structural elements shall minimize injury and damage. Consideration shall also be given to
reducing damage and injury from primary as well as secondary non-structural elements.
G. Loads and Stresses
Where required, structures shall be
designed to resist blast loads. The demands on the structure will be equal to the combined
effects of dead, live, and blast loads. Blast loads or dynamic rebound may occur in
directions opposed to typical gravity loads.
For purposes of designing against
progressive collapse, loads shall be defined as dead load plus a realistic estimate of an
actual live load. The value of the live load may be as low as 25 percent of the
code-prescribed live load.
The design should use ultimate strengths
with dynamic enhancements based on strain rates. Allowable responses are generally post
elastic.
H. Protection Levels
The entire building structure or portions
of the structure will be assigned a protection level according to the facility-specific
risk assessment. Protection levels for ballistics and forced entry are described in 4.2.3.
The following are definitions of damage to the structure and exterior wall systems from
the bomb threat for each protection level.
1) Low and
Medium/low Level Protection - Major damage. The facility or protected space will sustain a
high level of damage without progressive collapse. Casualties will occur and assets will
be damaged. Building components, including structural members, will require replacement,
or the building may be completely unrepairable, requiring demolition and replacement.
2) Medium Level
Protection - Moderate damage, repairable. The facility or protected space will sustain a
significant degree of damage, but thestructure should be reusable. Some casualties may
occur and assets may be damaged. Building elements other than major structural members may
require replacement.
3) Higher Level
Protection - Minor damage, repairable. The facility or protected space may globally
sustain minor damage with some local significant damage possible. Occupants may incur some
injury, and assets may receive minor damage.
4.2.3 New
Construction
A. Progressive Collapse.
Design to prevent progressive collapse.
Design to mitigate progressive collapse is an independent analysis to determine a system's
ability to resist structural collapse upon the loss of a major structural element. It is
not a part of traditional blast analysis. It is possible, however, that a blast may be the
cause of the removal of structural members. ASCE 7-95 describes progressive collapse and
offers additional guidelines.
Designs that facilitate or are vulnerable
to progressive collapse must be avoided, At a minimum, all new facilities shall be
designed for the loss of a column for one floor above grade at the building perimeter
without progressive collapse. This design and analysis requirement for progressive
collapse is not part of a blast analysis. It is intended to ensure adequate redundant load
paths in the structure should damage occur for whatever reason. Designers may apply static
and/or dynamic methods of analysis to meet this requirement. Ultimate load capacities may
be assumed in the analyses.
In recognition that a larger than design
explosive (or other) event may cause a partial collapse of the structure, new facilities
with a defined threat shall be designed with a reasonable probability that, if local
damage occurs, the structure will not collapse or be damaged to an extent disproportionate
to the original cause of the damage.
In the event of an internal explosion in
an uncontrolled public ground floor area, the design shall prevent progressive collapse
due to the loss of one primary column, or the designer shall show that the proposed design
precludes such a loss. That is, if columns are sized, reinforced, or protected so that the
threat charge will not cause the column to be critically damaged, then progressive
collapse calculations are not required for the internal event. For design purposes, assume
there is no additional standoff from the column beyond what is permitted by the design.
Discussions as an example, if an explosive
event causes the local failure of onecolumn and major collapse within one structural bay,
a design mitigating progressive collapse would preclude the additional loss of primary
structural members beyond this localized damage zone, i.e., the loss of additional
columns, main girders, etc. This does not preclude the additional loss of secondary
structural or non-structural elements outside the initial zone of localized damage,
provided the loss of such members is acceptable for that performance level and the loss
does not precipitate the onset of progressive collapse.
B. Building Materials
All building materials and types
acceptable under model building codes are allowed. However, special consideration should
be given to materials which have inherent ductility and which are better able to respond
to load reversals (i.e.. cast in place reinforced concrete and steel construction).
Careful detailing is required for material such as prestressed concrete, precast concrete,
and masonry to adequately respond to the design loads. The construction type selected must
meet all performance criteria of the specified Level of protection.
C. Exterior Walls
1) Design to
limited loads - applies to Medium Protection Level. Design exterior walls up to 4 psi
(design pressure) and 28 psi-msec.
The designer
should also ensure that the walls are capable of withstanding the dynamic reactions from
the windows.
Shear walls that
are essential to the lateral and vertical load-bearing system, and that also functions as
exterior walls, shall be considered primary structures. Design exterior shear walls to
resist the actual blast loads predicted from the threats specified.
Where exterior
walls are not designed for the full design loads, special consideration shall be given to
construction types that reduce the potential for injuries (see 4.2.3.B)
2) Design to full
load - applies to Higher Protection Level. Design the exterior walls to resist the actual
pressures and impulses acting on the exterior wall surfaces from the threats defined for
the facility (see also discussions in 4.2.3.C). The suggested design pressures are 10 psi
(incident pressure) and 89 psi-msec.
3) Forced Entry.
For doors, criteria shall be based on ASTM standards. Security of swinging door assemblies
(ASTM F 476 Grade 30). Measurement of forced entry resistance of horizontal sliding door
assemblies (ASTM F 842 Grade 30).
D. Exterior Windows
1) No restriction
on the type of Glazing - applies to Low Protection Level.
2) Limited
protection - applies to Medium/Low Protection Level. These windows do not require design
for specific blast pressure loads. Rather, the designer is encouraged to use glazing
materials and designs that minimize the potential risks.
a) Preferred
systems include: thermally tempered heat strengthened or annealed glass with a security
film installed on the interior surface and attached to the frame; laminated thermally
tempered, laminated heat strengthened or laminated annealed glass; and blast curtains.
b) Acceptable
systems include: thermally tempered glass and thermally tempered heat strengthened or
annealed glass with film installed on the interior surface (edge to edge, wet glazed, or
daylight installations are acceptable).
c) Unacceptable
systems include untreated monolithic annealed or heat strengthened glass and wire glass.
The minimum
thickness of film that shall be considered is 4 mils. In a blast environment, glazing can
induce loads three or more times that of conventional loads onto the frames. This must be
considered with the application of anti shatter security film.
The designer shall
design the window frames so that they do not fail prior to the glazing under lateral
loads. Likewise, the anchorage shall be stronger than the window frame, and the supporting
wall shall be stronger than the anchorage.
The design
strength of a window frame and associated anchorage is relatedto the breaking strength of
the glazing. Thermally tempered glass is roughly four times as strong as annealed, and
heat strengthened glass is roughly twice as strong as annealed.
3) Design up to
specified loads. Window systems design, i.e., glazing, frames, anchorage to supporting
walls, etc. on the exterior facade shall be balanced to mitigate the hazardous effects of
flying glazing following an explosive event. The walls, anchorage, and window framing
shall fully develop the capacity of the glazing material selected.
Glazing
alternatives are as follows;
* Preferred
systems include: thermally tempered glass with a security film installed on the interior
surface and attached to the frame; laminated thermally tempered, laminated heat
strengthened, or laminated annealed glass; and blast curtains.
* Acceptable
systems include monolithic thermally tempered glass with or without film if the pane is
designed to withstand the full design threat.
* Unacceptable
systems include untreated monolithic annealed or heat-strengthened glass and wire glass.
In general,
thicker anti shatter security films provide higher levels of hazard mitigation than
thinner films. Testing has shown that minimum of 7 mils thick film, or specially
manufactured 4 mil thick films, is the minimum to provide hazard mitigation from blast.
The minimum film thickness that should be considered is 4 mils.
Not all windows in
a public facility can reasonably be designed to resist the full forces expected from the
design blast threats. As a minimum, design window systems, i.e., glazing, frames, and
anchorage, for the actual blast pressure and impulse acting on the windows up to a maximum
of 4 psi and 28 psi-msec (for Medium Protection Level) and up to 10 psi and 89 psi-msec
(for Higher Protection Level). A common goal is that 90 percent of the glazing should meet
the performance standard specified.
In some cases, it
may be beneficial and economically feasible to select a glazing system that demonstrates a
higher, safer performance condition. Where tests indicate that one design will perform
better at significantly higher loads, that design could be given greater preference.
Where peak
pressures from the design explosive threats can be shown to be below 1 psi acting on the
face of the building, the designer may use thereduced requirements of 4.2.3.D.
E. Non-Window Openings. Non window openings
such as mechanical vents and exposed plenums should be designed to the level of protection
required for the exterior wall. Designs should account for potential in-filling of blast
over pressures through such openings. The design of structural members and all mechanical
system mountings and attachments should resist these interior fill pressures
F. Interior Windows. Interior glazing
should be minimized where a threat exists. The designer should avoid locating critical
functions next to high risk areas with glazing, such as lobbies, loading docks, etc.
G. Parking. The following criteria apply to
parking inside a facility where the building superstructure is supported by the parking
structure:
1) The designer
shall protect primary vertical load carrying members by implementing architectural or
structural features that provide a minimum 6-inch standoff
2) All columns in
the garage area shall be designed for an unbraced length equal to two floors, or three
floors where there are two levels of parking.
H. Selected Design Areas. For lobbies and
other areas with specified threats:
1) The designer
shall implement architectural or structural features that deny contact with exposed
primary vertical load members in these areas. A minimum standoff of at least 6 inches from
these members is required.
2) Primary
vertical load carrying members shall be designed to resist the effects of the specified
threat.
I. Loading Docks. The loading dock design
should limit damage to adjacent areas and vent explosive force to the exterior of the
building. Significant structural damage to the walls and ceiling of the loading dock is
acceptable. However, the areas adjacent to the loading dock should not experience severe
structural damage or collapse. The floor of the loading dock does not need to be designed
for blast resistance if the area below is not occupied and contains no critical utilities.
J. Mailrooms and Unscreened Retail Spaces.
Mail rooms where packages are received and opened for inspection, and unscreened retail
spaces shall be designed to mitigate the effects of a blast on primary vertical or lateral
bracing members. Where these rooms are located in occupied areas or adjacent to critical
utilities, walls, ceilings, and floors, they should be blast and fragment resistant.
Significant structural damage to the walls, ceilings, and floors of the mail room is
acceptable. However, the areas adjacent to the mail room should not experience severe
damage or collapse.
K. Venting. The designer should consider
methods to facilitate the venting of explosive forces and gases from the interior spaces
to outside of the structure. Examples of such methods include the use of the blow out
panels and window system designs that provide protection from blast pressure applied to
the outside but that readily fail and vent if exposed to blast pressure on the inside.
4.2.4 Existing
Construction Modernization
Existing structures undergoing a modernization should be
upgraded to new construction requirements when required by the risk assessment except
where noted in 4.2.4.B. The requirements of new construction apply to all major additions
and structural modifications.
A. Protection Levels. Risk assessments
based on the new construction criteria shall be performed on existing structures to
examine the feasibility of upgrading the facility. The results, including at a minimum
recommendations and cost, shall be documented in a written report before submission for
project funding.
B. Progressive Collapse. Existing buildings
will not be retrofitted to prevent progressive collapse unless they are undergoing a
structural renovation, such as a seismic upgrade.
4.2.5 Historic
Buildings
Historic buildings are covered by these criteria in the same
manner as other existing buildings
4.2.6 Good
Engineering Practice Guidelines
The following are rules of thumbs commonly used to mitigate the effects
of blast on structures. Details and more complete guidance are available in the Technical
Manuals listed in 4.2.2.E and in the references below. The following guidelines are not
meant to be complete, but are provided to assist the designer in the initial evaluation
and selection of design approaches.
For higher levels of protection from blast, cast-in-place
reinforced concrete is normally the construction type of choice. Other types of
construction such as properly designed and detailed steel structures are also allowed.
Several material and construction type while not disallowed by these criteria, may be
undesirable and uneconomical for protection from blast.
A. To economically provide protection from
blast, inelastic or post elastic design is standard. This allows the structure to absorb
the energy of the explosion through plastic deformation while achieving the objective of
saving lives. To design and analyze structures for blast loads, which are highly nonlinear
both spatially and temporally, it is essential that proper dynamic analysis methods be
used. Static analysis methods will generally result in un achievable or uneconomical
designs.
B. The designer should recognize that
components might act in directions for which they are not designed. This is due to the
engulfment of structural members by blast, the negative phase, the upward loading of an
elements and dynamic rebound of members. Making steel reinforcement (positive and negative
faces) symmetric in all floor slabs, roof slabs, walls, beams and girders will address
this issue. Symmetric reinforcement also increases the ultimate load capacity of the
members.
C. Lap splices should fully develop the
capacity of the reinforcement.
D. Lap splices and other discontinuities
should be staggered.
E. Ductile detailing should be used for
connections, especially primary structural member connections.
F. There should be control of deflections
around certain members, such as windows, to prevent premature failure. Additional
reinforcement is generally required.
G. Balanced design of all building
structural components are desired. For example, for window systems the frame and anchorage
shall be designed to resist the hill capacity of the weakest element of the system.
H. Special shear reinforcement including
ties and stirrups is generally required to allow large post elastic behavior. The designer
should carefully balance the selection of small but heavily reinforced (i.e., congested)
sections with larger sections with lower levels of reinforcement.
I. Connections for steel construction
should be ductile and develop as much moment connection as practical. Connections for
cladding and exterior walls to steel frames shall develop the capacity of the wall system
under blast loads.
J. In general, single point failures that
can cascade, producing wide spread catastrophic collapse, are to be avoided. A prime
example is the use of transfer beams and girders that, if lost, may cause progressive
collapse and are therefore highly discouraged.
K. Redundancy and alternative load paths
are generally good in mitigating blast loads. One method of accomplishing this is to use
two-way reinforcement schemes where possible.
L. In general, column spacing should be
minimized so that reasonably sized members can be designed to resist the design loads and
increase the redundancy of the system. A practical upper level for column spacing is
generally 30 ft for the levels of blast loads described herein.
M. In general, floor to floor heights
should be minimized. Unless there is an overriding architectural requirement, a practical
limit is generally less than or equal to 16 ft.
N. It is recommended that the designer use
fully grouted and reinforced CMU construction in cases where CMU is selected.
O. It is essential that the designer
actively coordinate structural requirements for blast with other disciplines including
architectural and mechanical.
P. The use of one-way wall elements
spanning from floor-to-floor is generally a preferred method to minimize blast loads
imparted to columns.
Q. In many cases, the ductile detailing
requirements for seismic design and the alternate load paths provided by progressive
collapse design assist in the protection from blast. The designer must bear in mind,
however, that the design approaches are at times in conflict. These conflicts must be
worked out on a case by case basis.
R. The following additional references are
recommended:
1) Biggs, John M:
Introduction to Structural Dynamics, McGraw-Hill. (1964).
2) The Institute
of Structural Engineers: The Structural Engineer's Response to Explosive Damage, SETO,
Ltd., 11 Upper Belgrave Street London SWIXSBH. (1995).
3) Mays, G.S. and
Smith. P.D. Blast Effects on Buildings: Design of Buildings to Optimize Resistance to
Blast Loading. Thomas Telford Publications, 1 Heron Quay, London E14 4JD. (1995).
4) National
Research Council. Protecting Buildings from Bomb Damage. National Academy Press. (1995).
4.3 FOUNDATIONS
4.3.1 Procedures
and Criteria for the Analysis and Design of Foundations for Buildings
A. The A-E, with the geotechnical
consultant, shall prepare all necessary documents to contract for subsurface soil
exploration. The Statement of Work (SOW) and related documents must be submitted to the
Contracting Officer (CO) for approval.
B. The A-E shall submit recommendations for
foundation systems based on data contained in the subsurface investigation report. An
economic comparison of the alternate foundation systems shall be made and submitted with
each tentative submission.
C. After review and approval of the design
concept by the EPM, the A-E shall prepare the foundation design.
D. Consultant geotechnical engineering
services shall be provided for projects and related work that require subsurface
engineering analysis.
4.3.2 Subsurface
Investigation
A. General. The A-E, along with the
geotechnical consultant, shall develop the subsurface investigation program. The
subsurface investigation shall be of sufficient scope to provide the A-E with adequate
information to design the foundation system. Where borings are required, the A-E shall
prepare a boring location plan and specifications in conformity with requirements of this
section.
Upon written authorization from the CO,
the A-E shall contract for the subsurface investigation work. The contract shall be
awarded after authority for right of entry onto the property has been issued, and after
approval by the CO of the soils investigation contract.
B. Geotechnical Report. The report on the
subsurface investigation, and geotechnical consultant's recommendations for type of
foundation, allowable soil bearing values based on bearing capacity and settlement
analysis, and protection against surface and subsurface water shall be submitted to the CO
for approval. Pro-con evaluation of systems and subsystems divided into a technical part
and a cost comparison chart shall be provided. Refer to Appendix 4C, Geotechnical
Investigation and Engineering Report.
4.3.3 Foundation
Design
A. Basis for Foundation Design. Foundation
design shall proceed on the basis of the approved geotechnical report. Foundations must
satisfy the following requirements:
1) Ultimate
bearing capacity of soils must be sufficiently larger than design loads to ensure
foundation safety.
2) Total
differential settlements must be sufficiently smaller than settlement tolerance of the
structure to ensure that the structure will function properly.
3) Effects of the
structure and its construction operation on adjoining property, buildings, and facilities
must be examined and evaluated, and protective measures must be taken.
B. Foundation Depths. At a minimum, bottom
of the footings shall be located one foot below the frost line. Footings shall not be
located in zones of high volumechange due to moisture fluctuations. Footings shall not
bear on soft or uncompacted soils. The water table and its fluctuation record should be
obtained before establishing elevation of the foundation.
Individual footings on pile caps shall be
braced to resist lateral forces in seismic area in accordance with requirements of the
governing State/local building code or Federal Standards.
C. Protection and Support of Adjoining
Property. Building codes of cities differ in the requirements for the protection of
adjoining property. Local building codes shall be checked in each case to determine where
temporary or permanent protection is required. When construction of such protection
requires access to adjoining property, the CO shall be notified so that the CO, through
the appropriate real property office, may obtain the necessary permit.
The contractor shall design and provide
sheet piling, underpinning, shoring, and bracing to protect banks and sides of excavation,
buildings, structures, facilities, and utilities adjacent thereto against damage,
including that from surface drainage. The project specifications shall be developed to
require the contractor to conduct a survey of the condition of adjoining properties,
including photographs and records of prior settlement or cracking of walls, partitions, or
floors that may become the subject of possible damage claims. Before the start of
construction, a complete survey report shall be submitted to the CO or designated
representative. The A-E and his geotechnical consultant shall review design calculations
and construction drawings to ensure that the contractor's design and construction
procedures are safe, and satisfy design criteria and geotechnical recommendations.
Permission shall be obtained from city
authorities before proceeding to project footings beyond the lot line onto public
property.
4.3.4 Retaining
Walls
To make the structure safe against failure by overturning and
excessive settlement, pressure beneath the base must not exceed the allowable soil
pressure, and the structure as a whole must have an adequate factor of safety with respect
to sliding along its base or along some weak stratum below its base. The entire structure,
as well as each of its parts, must possess adequate strength. Corresponding pressures and
forces provide the basis for checking the ultimate structural strength at various critical
sections.
Exposed faces of retaining walls shall be battered half an inch
per foot of height to avoid the appearance of tilting. The bottom of the base of retaining
walls on soil shall be below the frost line, but not less than 2 feet below the finished
grade at the exposed face of the wall. A four-inch diameter weep holes shall be provided
for drainage,placed 6 inches above the lower grade at the exposed face of the wall, and
spaced not more than 15 feet on centers. Joints in retaining walls shall be provided in
accordance with the requirements for reinforced concrete or masonry units laid with
mortar.
4.4 STRUCTURAL
SYSTEMS
4.4.1 Stability
Structures shall be designed with a lateral-resistant system to
meet stability requirements that conform to recognized engineering principles. Design
stability shall provide resistance against sliding, uplift forces, and overturning moments
caused by wind, gravity, and seismic forces. Choice of resistant system shall be made by
comparing rigidity of horizontal elements (floors and roof) with that of vertical elements
(frame and walls).
4.4.2 Overall
Considerations
The optimum structural system for a given application is one that
will satisfy functional and architectural requirements of the finished structure at
minimum cost. Consideration shall be given to future uses of the structure, possibilities
of alterations, maintenance costs, and ease of demolition of temporary structures or
dismantling of portable structures. Preferred systems utilize material efficiently,
provide maximum usable space, minimize use of special equipment, and can be constructed by
following conventional procedures.
4.4.3 Comparative
Cost Analysis
A comparative cost analysis of the various structural systems
shall be performed and submitted to the EPM for approval.
4.5 EQUIPMENT
SUPPORTS
4.5.1 Design
Loads
The recommended design live loads shall be in accordance with
governing code requirements for intended functional use.
4.5.2 Vibration
Supports for high-speed machinery having heavy vibrational
tendencies, such as turbo generators, turbine-driven or motor-driven pumps and fans, and
motor generators, shall be designed to reduce vibration to a minimum.
Design beams or girders supporting machines so that maximum
deflection will be within accepted limits (impact included). Take the span as the distance
center-to-center of columns with the ends considered as supported without restraint. The
structure shall be designed so that a horizontal transverse force, equal to one-half of
the weight of the machine, applied at the level of the shaft, will not produce a
horizontal deflection greater than 1/50 of an inch at the base of the machine.
Consider use of vibration and shock isolators to reduce magnitude
of the force transmitted to supports for the machinery. Consider use of vibration
absorbers where it is required to eliminate vibration of supporting structure. In seismic
areas, all equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators, which shall be provided with
seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 100 percent of the weight of
the equipment (50 percent for equipment secured and anchored to the building.)
4.5.3 Foundation
Considerations
Foundations for vibrating machinery require careful consideration.
Minimum weight of the foundation shall be 1.5 times the weight of vibrating machinery. In
determining required foundation weight, consider proportion of the weight of rotating or
reciprocating part of the machine to total machine weight and restrictions on lateral
movement of the foundation.
Foundations for heavy machinery shall be completely isolated from
foundations and floors of buildings. The gap between machine foundation and other
construction shall be at least one inch. This gap shall be maintained, clear or filled
with a soft caulking material.
4.6 ARCHITECTURAL-STRUCTURAL
INTERACTION
4.6.1 Drift
Lateral deflection of a building under wind or seismic loading
shall be such so as to preclude creating discomfort for occupants or damage to the
superstructure. Specifically, when lateral stability is afforded by moment-resisting
framing, deflections of frames must be allowed to occur by providing tangible connections
between masonry walls and concrete columns, walls, or beams. This form of construction
shall also be considered where tall flexible shear walls are utilized inmultistory
buildings to obtain lateral stability. The A-E shall develop supporting calculations to
verify acceptable building response under lateral loading, and shall follow the process of
designing a high-rise building as outlined below.
A. Establish criteria for minimum lateral
stiffness, supported by an established authority.
B. Find the geometry that results in the
least material to safely sustain stresses.
C. Choose strength level for the material
to safely sustain stresses.
4.6.2 Anchoring
Exterior Walls
Anchoring or bonding of exterior wall elements, such as facing
stones or brick veneer, cornices, coping, precast panels, and ornamental features, shall
be designed to ensure adequate support for such elements. Anchoring or bonding system
shall be jointly developed by the architect and the structural engineer.
Provision shall be made for the following. The system shall take
into account weight of the element itself plus loading due to wind, earthquake, or blast
for which the structure was designed, construction tolerances, and loadings induced by
erection process. The system shall be designed to permit anticipated movement of the
element due to thermal expansion, moisture expansion, and deflection or creep of supports.
4.6.3 Nonstructural
Partitions
Nonstructural partitions shall be designed and constructed to
remain stable and to function compatibly with the building. Walls and partitions for
interior space compartmentalization shall not be used inadvertently as structural
components because of insufficient allowances for assumed or actual deformation of
building structure.
4.6.4 Curtain
Walls
Curtain walls and exterior nonstructural enclosures shall be
designed and constructed with suitable support and anchoring systems to function
compatibly with the rest of the building.
4.6.5 Floor
and Ceiling Details
Attention shall be given to type of floor covering and finishes,
and to type and location of ceilings to establish correct measurements and location of
structural system. Sufficient information shall be provided in contract documents by the
structural engineer to convey construction requirements.
4.6.6 Cladding
and Insulation
Type, location, and thickness of cladding and insulation to be
used separately or together shall be coordinated with design and construction
requirements. Adequate support and anchoring shall be designed for cladding and
insulation.
4.6.7 Stairwells
Design and construction of stairwells shall be consistent with
maintaining structural integrity and stability of stairwells and building frames.
Requirements for enclosing stairwells shall be addressed in design phases.
4.6.8 Glass
and Glazing Details
The structural engineer shall provide satisfactory design systems
incorporating glass and glazing details to be used in the building. Their adequacy to
withstand actual and assumed forces shall be considered by the structural engineer.
Coordinate structural requirements with the architect.
4.6.9 Waterproofing
Attention shall be given to requirements for the type, location,
and extent of waterproofing which shall be consistent with the requirements of the
building structure.
4.7 REPAIR
AND ALTERATION OF EXISTING BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES
4.7.1 Design
Requirements
The A-E shall be responsible for gathering information necessary
to execute the professional services contract. The project may require the following
functions to be performed.
A. Existing Drawings. Construction or
as-built drawings shall be reviewed and data shown thereon shall be verified by field
observations and measurements,before the information is used to develop a new design.
B. Subsoil Investigation. The A-E shall
appraise existing subsoil information, determine the extent of additional subsurface
investigation required, and submit proposed foundation design concept based on review of
new or existing subsurface information.
C. Exploratory Field Work. In the absence
of original contract documents, or when information is required to define in-place
construction, the structural engineer shall determine the nature, location, and extent of
exploratory field work.
1) Chemical
analysis may be used as a means of establishing procedures for welding to older steel
framing.
2) The
Magneto-inductive method (reinforcing bar detector) may be used to determine size and
location of reinforcing in the concrete members.
D. Structural Calculations. A decision to
use existing structure for purposes not originally intended shall be supported by
structural calculations for affected framing elements. Calculations may reflect current
design approaches such as live load reduction factors and unit loads for various
occupancies. Careful judgment, supported by necessary testing, shall be exercised as to
whether the usefulness of deteriorating members can be effectively extended.
E. Hazardous Materials/Waste. The A-E Shall
be responsible for identifying hazardous materials which may affect the project
activities. The A-E shall use certified inspectors and planners for any hazardous
materials investigation. Laboratory analysis of sample materials may be required. Examples
of hazardous materials are asbestos, lead paint, and PCBs.
1) The A-E shall
be responsible for securing any permits/approvals which may be required to perform the
work.
2) The A-E shall
determine if waste generated is hazardous waste, and shall properly manage and dispose of
any waste generated by the project activities.
4.7.2 Fire
Safety
For extensions to buildings, the fire-resistant rating of existing
structure shall be upgraded to conform to current fire safety criteria. If this is not
feasible, fire wall separation may be required to isolate new from existing areas. In no
case shall a major alteration reduce the fire-resistant rating of the building below that
afforded by the original structure. The A-E shall perform a complete code analysis of the
extension related to existing structure.
4.7.3 Foundations
The ability of new foundations to support new construction
adjacent to old construction must be carefully considered. Where stress applied to the
soil may cause consolidation of the soil, the A-E shall establish initial floor elevations
to accommodate anticipated vertical movement so that final adjacent surfaces in connecting
halls and passageways are at or near the same elevation. The effect of construction
operations on existing structure, such as pile driving, shall be recognized and guarded
against. An estimate of settlement anticipated, supported by calculations, shall be
included with the submittal by the A-E. Use of reduced allowable bearing pressures for
spread foundations, or use of foundations such as caissons or piles, for new construction
may reduce differential settlement between old and new structures. Preloading of the site
may also be considered, provided it does not adversely affect the old construction. To
allow for possible differential settlement between new and old construction, use of
expansion joints may also be investigated.
4.7.4 Connection
to Existing Framing
Contract documents shall clearly delineate aspects of construction
that require special attention.
Following is a partial list of items that shall be covered.
Existing steel framing shall be adequately shored and braced if extensive welding is to be
made thereto. When holes or expansion shields are to be installed in existing concrete
framing elements, extreme care shall be exercised to avoid cutting or damaging main
reinforcement. The Magneto-inductive method (reinforcing bar detector) may be a useful
tool to determine the location of the reinforcement. If a special sequence is essential
for the successful completion of construction, it shall be clearly defined in the drawings
and specifications.
4.7.5 Contract
Documents
Contract documents shall be developed in a manner that will
clearly indicate the work to be performed. In addition, a system shall be devised that
will clearly differentiate between new and existing construction and will define the
limits of the contract.
4.7.6 Wind
and Seismic Designs
A. General. Often, construction details of
older buildings are not consistent with current criteria for wind or seismic loading.
Therefore, careful judgment (supported by structural calculations) shall be used to
determine whether the new and existing unit should be separated, or tied together to make
them respond in unison. The latter approach is reserved for low, light structures where
connections can be devised that will satisfactorily transmit internal stresses.
The tendency of adjoining structures to
sway out of a phase shall be considered in establishing the width of separation or the
adequacy of the structural connection between them. In establishing requirements for an
earthquake joint, the A-E shall consider whether it is satisfactory to make the joint
width twice that of the static drift of the structure.
B. General Design Considerations for
Structural Upgrading Seismic Performance
1) Executive Order
12941, Seismic Safety of Existing Federally Owned or Leased Buildings, adopted ICSSC
RP4, Standards of Seismic Safety for Existing Federally Owned or Leased Buildings published
by the Interagency Committee on Seismic Safety in Construction (ICSSC) as minimum
standards for all future seismic safety evaluation and rehabilitation projects for
federally owned or leased buildings.
2) The performance
objective of a seismic upgrade is life safety, defined as the safeguarding against partial
or total building collapse, obstruction of entrance or egress routes and the prevention of
falling hazards in a design basis earthquake. Not all seismic deficiencies warrant
remedial action. Seismic upgrading is an expensive and often disruptive process, and it
may be more cost effective to accept a marginally deficient building than to enforce full
compliance with current code requirements.
3) The following
FEMA Guidelines shall be incorporated into the structural design for all projects:
a) Federal
Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) Publications:
* NEHRP
(National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic
Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures, Part 1: Provisions (FEMA- 302A,
with 15 maps) and Part 2: Commentary (FEMA-303A).
* Interim
Guidelines: Evaluation, Repair, Modification and Design of Steel Moment Frames (FEMA-267)
and Interim Guidelines: Evaluation, Repair, Modification and Design of Welded Steel Moment
Frame Structures (FEMA-267B).
* NEHRP
(National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program) Handbook for the Seismic Evaluation
of Buildings_A Pre- standard (FEMA_310).
* NEHRP
(National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program) Recommended Guidelines for the
Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings, Part 1: Guidelines (FEMA-273, with the NEHRP
maps) and Part 2: Commentary (FEMA-274).
b) American
Society of Civil Engineers: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,
ASCE 7.
c) Standards
of Seismic Safety for Existing Federally Owned or Leased Buildings and Commentary
(ICSSC RP 4) prepared by the Interagency Committee on Seismic Safety in Construction _
Recommended Practice 4.
Appendix 4A: Structural
Design Submission Requirements
4A-1. 15 Percent Design (Concepts) Submittal
A. Drawings.
1) Plans, showing
framing plans of the proposed structural system showing column locations; bay sizes; and
location of expansion or seismic joints.
B. Narrative.
1) Identification
of unusual local code requirements.
2) Code compliance
statement including : names of model building code followed; building classification;
identification of seismic zones, wind speed, etc.; and identification of special
requirements.
3) For new
buildings located in moderate and high risk seismic areas only:
a.) Statement
certifying that the structural engineer has reviewed the building configuration for
seismic adequacy. This statement must be signed by the structural engineer and the
architect.
4A-2. 35 Percent Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis
1) Listing of
applicable codes.
2) Comparative cost
analysis of at least three potential framing systems.
3) Description of
recommended structural concept, including:
a.) Choice
of framing system, including lateral load-resisting elements, and proposed foundation
design.
b.) Verification
of adequacy of all assumed dead and live loads.
4) Identify all
code requirements and provide a complete analysis as it pertains to this project including
but not limited to:
a.) Required
fire-resistance rating of structural elements.
b.) Summary
of special requirements resulting from applicable local codes.
5) Geotechnical
Engineering Report, including final boring logs (if part of scope of work). See Appendix
4C, Geotechnical Investigation and Engineering Report.
6) Responses to the
15 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Framing plans
and key details.
2) List of
specifications sections to be used.
4A-3. 50 Percent Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis
1) Revisions from
the 35 percent submittal.
2) Narrative
description of structural systems.
3) Gravity load and
lateral load calculations, with tabulated results showing framing schedules.
4) Foundation
calculations.
5) Calculations
showing that the system is not vulnerable to progressive collapse.
6) Vibration
calculations.
7) Blast
calculations.
8) Responses to the
35 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications.
1) Structural plans
and key details.
2) Marked-up
specifications.
3) Preliminary
schedules for foundations, columns, walls, beams, slabs, and decks, as applicable.
4A-4. 95 Percent Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis.
1) Any revisions
from the 50 percent submittal.
2) Narrative
Description of structural systems
3) Responses to the
50 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Essentially
complete drawings and specifications with only minor coordination and technical issues to
be resolved.
4A-5. 100 Percent Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis
1) Complete Design
Analysis incorporating the final calculations, narrative, equipment selections, review
comments etc.
2) Responses to the
95 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Complete drawing
and specification package suitable to "Issue for Construction." Listing of
applicable codes.
Appendix
4B: Structural Design Coordination Checklist
4B-1. General
This checklist enumerates some of the interfaces between
structural engineering, architectural and other engineering disciplines that require close
coordination.
A. Floor elevations shown on drawings.
B. Camber requirements shown on drawings.
C. Beam and girder connections detailed.
D. Clearances for bolts and fasteners shown
(steel and wood construction).
E. Fire resistance of structural members
indicated.
F. Beam reactions shown for moment
connections.
G. Equipment, piping and ductwork supports
detailed (may be shown on structural, mechanical or electrical drawings, as applicable).
H. Hoists shown in major mechanical rooms
(if required).
I. Interference with piping and ductwork
coordinated.
J. Interference with electrical ducts and
conduit coordinated.
K. Anchorage of architectural, mechanical
or electrical systems and components.
L. Roof drains coordinated with
architectural and mechanical drawings.
M. Subdrainage and foundations coordinated
with mechanical drawings/piping.
N. Waterproofing of foundation walls,
retaining walls and other structural elements coordinated with architectural drawings.
Appendix 4C: Geotechnical
Investigation and Engineering Report
4C-1. General
The requirements for geotechnical work for the building designs
are defined here. They apply whether ARS contracts for geotechnical work separately or
includes the geotechnical investigation in the scope of the A-E services.
4C-2. Purpose
The purpose of the geotechnical investigation during building
design is to determine the character and physical properties of soils or rock strengths,
stability, settlement characteristics, etc. The type of structure to be built and
anticipated geologic and field conditions have a significant bearing on the type of
investigation to be conducted. The investigation must therefore be planned with a
knowledge of the intended project size and anticipated column loads, land utilization and
a broad knowledge of the geological history of the area.
The guidelines given here are not to be considered as rigid.
Planning of the exploration, sampling and testing programs and close supervision must be
vested in a competent geotechnical engineer and/or engineering geologist with experience
in this type of work and licensed to practice engineering in the jurisdiction where the
project is located.
4C-3. Analysis of Existing Conditions
The report shall address the following:
A. Description of terrain.
B. Brief geological history.
C. Brief seismic history.
D. Surface drainage conditions.
E. Groundwater conditions and associated
design or construction problems.
F. Description of exploration and sampling
methods and outlines of testing methods.
G. Narrative of soil identification and
classification, by stratum.
H. Narrative of difficulties and/or
obstructions encountered during previous explorations of existing construction on or
adjacent to the site.
I. Description of laboratory test borings
and results.
J. Plot plans, drawn to scale, showing test
borings or pits.
K. Radon tests in areas of building
location.
L. Soils resistivity tests, identifying
resistivity of soil for corrosion protection of underground metals and electrical
grounding design.
M. Boring logs, which identify sample
number and sampling method. Other pertinent data deemed necessary by the geotechnical
engineer for design recommendations, such as:
1) Unconfined
compressive strength.
2) Standard
penetration test values.
3) Subgrade
modulus.
4) Location of a
water table.
5) Water tests for
condition of groundwater.
6) Location and
classification of rock.
7) Location of
obstructions.
8) Atterberg tests.
9) Compaction
tests.
10) Consolidation
tests.
11) Triaxial
compression tests.
12) Chemical tests
(pH) of the soil.
13) Contamination.
4C-4. Engineering Recommendations
Engineering recommendations based on borings and laboratory
testing shall be provided for the following:
A. Recommendations for foundation design,
with discussion of alternate solutions, if applicable, including:
1) Allowable soil
bearing values.
2) Feasible deep
foundation types and allowable capacities, where applicable, including allowable tension
(pull out) and lateral subgrade modulus.
3) Feasibility of a
slab on grade versus structurally supported ground floor construction, including
recommended bearing capacities and recommended subgrade modulus.
4) Discussion of
evidence of expansive surface materials and recommended solutions.
5) Lateral earth
design pressures on retaining walls or basement walls, including dynamic pressures.
6) Design frost
depth, if applicable.
7) Removal or
treatment of objectionable material.
8) Discussion of
potential for consolidation and/or differential settlements of substrata encountered, with
recommendations for total settlement and maximum angular distortion.
9) Use and
treatment of in-situ materials for controlled fills.
10) Recommendations
for future sampling and testing.
11) Recommendations
for pavement designs, including base and sub-base thickness and subdrains.
12) Recommendations
for foundation and subdrainage, including appropriate details.
13) Discussion of
soil resistivity values.
14) Discussion of
radon values and recommendation for mitigating measures, if required.
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Objective
The Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC), Plumbing,
and Fire Protection systems shall be selected for long-term durability, energy efficiency,
flexibility, accessibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and efficient life-cycle
owning and operating costs.
5.1.2 Codes
and Standards
A. The design shall comply with the
requirements of the site applicable codes and standards, including the guidelines
referenced therein, that apply to mechanical and plumbing system design. The current
edition of each applicable code, in effect at the time of design contract award, shall be
used throughout the project's design and construction. See Chapter 1, for complete
discussion of codes and other special requirements.
See Chapter 7, for additional requirements
for safety and health.
See Chapter 9 for additional requirements
for biohazard containment design.
See Chapter 10 for additional requirements
for animal facilities.
B. Mechanical Design Standards. The design
shall conform with the following publications and codes. The term Recommended
as used in the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE) Standards shall be considered Required.
1) National Fire
Protection Association: National Fire Codes
2) American
National Standards Association: ANSI Z 9.5 American National Standard for Laboratory
Ventilation
3) American
National Standards Association: ANSI Z358.1 American National Standard for Emergency
Eyewash and Shower Equipment
4) ASHRAE:
Handbook of Fundamentals.
5) ASHRAE:
Handbook of HVAC Applications.
6) ASHRAE:
Handbook of Refrigeration.
7) ASHRAE:
Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment.
8) ASHRAE:
Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
9) ASHRAE:
Standard 62: Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
10) ASHRAE:
Standard 90.1: Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings.
11) ASHRAE:
Standard 100: Energy Conservation in Existing Buildings.
12) ASHRAE:
Guideline 12: Minimizing the Risk of Legionellosis Associated with Building Water Systems
13) National
Standard Plumbing Code
14) All applicable
State and Local codes.
15) Federal,
State, and local environmental requirements
16) Uniform
Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)
C. Mechanical Design Guides. The latest
editions of the standards listed here are intended as guidelines for design and to
establish a basic level of engineering practice. They are mandatory only where referenced
as such in the text of this chapter, in applicable codes, or in the A-E's Scope of Work.
The list is not meant to restrict the use of additional guides or standards.
1) ASHRAE:
Laboratory Design Guide
2) ASHRAE:
Standard 55: Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy.
3) ASHRAE:
Standard 105: Standard Method of Measuring and Expressing Building Energy Performance.
4) ASHRAE:
Standard 111: Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building
HVAC&R Systems.
5) ASHRAE:
Standard 114: Energy Management Control Systems Instrumentation.
6) ASHRAE:
Standard 135: BACnet: A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control
Networks.
7) ASHRAE:
Guideline 1: The HVAC Commissioning Process
8) ASHRAE:
Guideline 4: Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.
9) ASHRAE:
Guideline 5: Commissioning Smoke Management Systems
10) ASHRAE
Guideline 13: Specifying Direct Digital Control Systems
11) NEBB:
Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning
12) American
Society of Plumbing Engineers: ASPE Data Books.
13) Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA):
a) HVAC
System Duct Design.
b) HVAC
Duct Construction Standards: Metal and Flexible.
c) HVAC
Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
d) Fire,
Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems.
e) Seismic
Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
D. Code Review and Analysis and
Waiver Process. The code criteria shall be reviewed by the A-E to the degree of detail
necessary to assure that tasks accomplished during design meet code requirements. All
deviations from codes/ARS requirements and any equivalency concepts proposed for use must
be identified by the A-E and submitted to the Government for approval no later than the 35
percent design stage. See section 1.2.5 for requirements.
5.1.3 Design
Submissions and Coordination
A. The A-E shall submit mechanical design
concepts, drawings, sketches, calculations, specifications, etc. at various stages
throughout the design process as outlined in the A-E contract. Refer to section 1.8, Design
Documentation and Appendix 5A, Mechanical Design Submission Requirements.
B. Coordination Checklist. To insure
inter-discipline and intra discipline coordination, a review checklist is provided in
Appendix 5B, Mechanical Design Coordination Checklist. The A-E shall make sure that
all of these items, and others that pertain to good project coordination, are reviewed and
addressedbefore submission of the documents to ARS.
5.1.4 Energy
Conservation and Life Cycle Cost Analyses
A. General. A major concern in the design
of a project is energy conservation and the need for all facilities to be energy
efficient. For this reason, the A-E must direct attention to all areas where the greatest
impact in energy savings can be made.
B. Life-Cycle Cost Analyses. Considering
the requirements for HVAC on an integrated basis, the A-E shall perform Life Cycle Cost
(LCC) analysis comparing three viable energy efficient HVAC systems. The A-E shall use the
life-cycle cost methodologies described in the latest edition of Handbook 135,
Life-Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy Management Program,
published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). The life cycle
cost analysis must include investment costs, energy costs, non fuel operation and
maintenance costs, repair and replacement costs, and salvage values. For new construction,
one HVAC alternative shall utilize a renewable energy source, and one shall be appropriate
for the particular site conditions e.g., if district steam or chilled water is available.
Analyses of energy-conserving designs
shall include all relevant effects of the building envelope, lighting energy input,
domestic water heating, efficient use of local ambient weather conditions, building
zoning, efficient part load performance of all major HVAC equipment and the ability of
involved building automation equipment to automatically adjust for building partial
occupancies, optimized start-stop times and systems resets.
C. Specifying Energy Efficient Products and
Equipment
1) The A-E shall
specify those energy consuming goods or products which are life-cycle cost effective,
including building energy system components lighting systems, office equipment, and other
energy using equipment. To assist the A-E's in specifying energy efficient products, the
Department of Energy (DOE) provides product energy efficiency recommendations and other
information at http: // www.eren.doe.gov/ femp/procurement
2) The A-E shall
specify products that are in the upper 25 percent of energy efficiency for all similar
products, or products that are at least 10 percent more efficient than the minimum level
that meets Federal standards. This requirement shall apply wherever such information is
available through either Federal or industry approved testing and rating procedures.
3) The A-E shall,
to the greatest extent possible, incorporate energy efficientcriteria consistent with
ENERGY STAR� and other FEMP-designated energy efficiency levels into project
specifications developed for new construction and renovation.
4) The A-E shall
specify environmentally preferable products.
D. Energy Efficiency/Conservation. The A-E
shall explore life-cycle cost- effective efficiency opportunities for steam systems,
boiler operation, air compressor systems, industrial processes, fuel switching,
cogeneration, and other efficiency and renewable energy technologies. The A-E shall
evaluate and consider heat reclaim as energy conservation method.
E. Renewable Energy. The A-E shall
incorporate the use of renewable energy and technologies in the design of ARS buildings
and facilities when life-cycle cost effective. Renewable energy includes photovoltaic,
solar thermal, biomass (wood, wood waste, refuse and agricultural waste), wind, geothermal
and low- impact hydropower technologies.
F. Water Conservation. The A-E shall
incorporate Best Management Practices (BMP) for water conservation in the design of the
project. Details of these BMPs are available at FEMP's Website: http:
//www.eren.doe.gov/femp/ resources/ water/ water groupmain.html
G. Sustainable Design. The A-E shall
incorporate and apply the sustainable design principles developed for the Federal
Government. These principles were developed in compliance with the requirements of
Executive Order 13123 and have been incorporated into the internet-based Whole
Building Design Guide that can be accessed at http: //wbdg.org/
5.1.5 Acoustical
Requirements
A. General. Acoustical and noise level
criteria for all building spaces are described in section 3.4.2 of this Manual.
B. Noise and Vibration Isolation. Refer to
and incorporate the basic design techniques as described in ASHRAE Applications
Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control. Isolate all rotating equipment in the building.
C. Mechanical Room Isolation. Floating
isolation floors should be considered for major mechanical rooms located in penthouses or
at intermediate levels in mid- rise and high-rise construction. See section 3.4.2, Class X
Spaces.
D. Mechanical Chases. Mechanical chases
should be closed at top and bottom, as well as the entrance to the mechanical room. Any
piping and ductwork shouldbe isolated as it enters the shaft to prevent propagation of
vibration to the building structure. All openings for ducts and piping must be sealed,
except that shafts dedicated to gas piping must be ventilated.
5.1.6 Access
to Machines and Equipment
Space shall be provided around all equipment as recommended by the
manufacturer and in compliance with local code requirements for routine maintenance.
Access doors or panels should be provided in ventilation equipment, ductwork and plenums
as required for in-situ inspection and cleaning. Equipment access doors or panels should
be readily operable and sized to allow full access. Large central equipment shall be
situated to facilitate its replacement.
In addition, adequate methods of access shall be included for
items such as: chillers; boilers; heat exchangers; cooling towers; reheat coils; VAV
boxes; pumps; hot water heaters; and all devices which have maintenance service
requirements.
The clearance required for filter and coil/tube removal shall be
indicated on the drawings
Access to elevated major equipment (such as AHU's, cooling towers,
chillers, and boilers) must be by stairs, not by ladders.
5.1.7 Installation
of Equipment for Proper Operation
The design drawings shall show the space/installation requirements
for proper performance of all equipment and appurtenances. The necessary straight upstream
and downstream duct/pipe diameters shall be shown for air flow monitoring stations, sound
attenuators, vav boxes, humidifiers, duct traverse locations, hydronic flow switches,
pressure reducing valves, etc.
5.2 MECHANICAL
SECURITY DESIGN
5.2.1 General
A. Appropriate mechanical and fire
protection engineering security design criteria and standards for a project shall be
determined based on project-specific risk assessment done in accordance with the
methodology outlined in the ISC Security Design Criteria for New Federal Office Buildings
and Major modernization Projects. (See also section 1.4, Security Design)
B. The mechanical system should continue
the operation of key life safety components following an incident. The criteria focus on
locating components in less vulnerable area, limiting access to mechanical systems, and
providing a reasonable amount of redundancy.
5.2.2 Mechanical
Engineering Security Considerations
A. Air System
1) Air Intakes.
Place air intakes at high level. On buildings of more than 4 stories, locate intakes on
the 4th floor or higher. On buildings of three stories or less, locate intakes on the
roofer as high as practical. Locating intakes high on a wall is preferred to a roof
location.
B. Utility Protection
1) Utilities and
Feeders. Locate utilities away from vulnerable areas. Utility systems should be located at
least 50 feet from loading docks, front entrances, and parking areas.
2) Incoming
Utilities. Protect incoming utilities. Within building and property lines, incoming
utility systems should be concealed and given blast protection, including burial or proper
encasement wherever possible (see 6.2.2.B.5)
C. Ventilation Systems
1) Smoke
Evacuation. Protect ventilation equipment and locate away from high risk areas. In the
event of a blast, the ventilation system may be essential to smoke removal, particularly
in large, open spaces. Ventilation equipment should be located away from high risk areas
such as loading docks and garages. The system controls and power wiring to the equipment
should be protected. The ventilation system should be connected to emergency power to
provide smoke evacuation.
The designer
should consider having separate HVAC systems in lobbies, loading docks, and other
locations where the significant risk of an internal event exists.
Ventilation and
smoke evacuation equipment should be provided with stand-alone local control panels that
can continue to individually function in the event the control wiring is severed from the
main control system.
During an interior
bombing event smoke evacuation and control is of paramount importance. The designer should
consider the fact that if window glazing is hardened, a blast may not blow out windows,
and smoke may be trapped in the building.
2) Pressurized
Stairways. Maintain positive pressure in stairways. A stairway pressurization system
should maintain positive pressure in stairways for occupant refuge, safe evacuation, and
access by fire fighters. The entry of smoke and hazardous gases into stairways must be
minimized.
5.2.3 Fire
Protection Engineering Security Considerations
A. General. The fire protection
system inside the building should maintain Life safety protection after an incident and
allow for safe evacuation of the building when appropriate.
While fire protection systems are designed
to perform well during fires, they are not traditionally designed to survive bomb blast.
The three components of the fire protection system are:
1) Active
features, including sprinklers, fire alarms, smoke control, etc.
2) Passive
features, including fire resistant barriers.
3) Operational
features, including system maintenance and employee training.
B. Active System
1) Water Supply.
Protect water main. The fire protection water system should be protected from single point
failure in case of a blast event. The incoming line should be encased buried, or located
50 feet away from high threat areas. The interior mains should be looped and
sectionalized.
2) Standpipe
Connection. Have locked covers for standpipe connections. Locked covers should be provided
on standpipe and Siamese connections to ensure reliability and prevent damage to threads.
3) Fire Alarm
System. Provide microprocessor-based fire alarm system. An intelligent,
microprocessor-based, addressable fire alarm system with voice capability should be
provided. The system should be configured so that any single impairment shall not disable
the system on more than one-half of a floor. The configuration should include individual
data gathering panels arranged on a network with stand-alone capability in case the main
control panel is incapacitated. The system main control panel should be located in the
fire control room near the building's main entrance to facilitate fire department access.
4) Egress Door
Locks. All security locking arrangements on doors used for egress must comply with
requirements of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
5.3 PLUMBING
5.3.1 Fixture
Requirements
A. Fixtures shall be water conserving type.
For alteration projects in the same toilet rooms or areas, fixtures shall match existing
fixtures if possible. Number of fixtures in each toilet room shall conform to the National
Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC) and the local plumbing code.
B. One of each types of plumbing fixtures,
suitable for use by individuals with physical disabilities, shall be provided in each
public toilet room (men - one lavatory, one water closet, and one urinal, women - one
lavatory and one water closet.)
5.3.2 Water
Coolers and Drinking Fountains
A. Drinking water station shall be provided
near toilet rooms and shall not be provided in laboratories or where hazardous materials
are stored. Drinking water station shall be suitable for use by individuals with physical
disabilities. Special requirements shall be as outlined in UFAS.
5.3.3 Floor
Drains
Floor drains shall be installed in boiler rooms, mechanical
equipment rooms, kitchen and dishwashing areas, garages, and similar areas. Except as
provided in section 7.2.13, floor drains shall not be installed in certain areas where
possibilities of spills of harmful chemicals and like materials exist. Floor drains shall
be provided with individual traps. Provision for automatic primers shall be made to ensure
that trapsfor floor drains connected to sanitary sewers are sealed. Special trap depths
are required for containment laboratories and animal rooms.
5.3.4 Sanitary
System
A. Fixture Elevations. Each plumbing
fixture and floor drain shall be installed so that the invert to the trap is not less than
3 feet above the top of the sewer into which it discharges. Where plumbing fixtures cannot
be installed as required above, automatic sewage ejector system shall be provided.
B. Cleanouts. Refer to NSPC. Where a
cleanout will interfere with architectural finish of a room, a finished brass cover shall
be installed over the cleanout.
C. Sewage Ejectors. Sewage ejectors shall
not be used if other methods can be employed to allow gravity flow. Where ejectors are
required, only lower floor facilities shall drain to ejectors. Upper floor facilities
shall drain by gravity to the main sewer. Duplex sewage pumps shall be non clog,
screenless ejector type, with each discharge not less than 4 inches.
D. Special Wastes. Separate drainage and
vent systems for acid wastes shall be of corrosion-resistant material. Corrosive liquids,
spent acids, or other harmful chemicals that might destroy or injure a drain or vent pipe,
or create noxious or toxic fumes, or interfere with sewage treatment processes, shall be
thoroughly diluted, neutralized, or treated. A properly constructed and an acceptable
dilution or neutralizing device shall be provided. Depending on type of treatment
required, this device shall be provided with either, or both, an automatic supply of
diluting water, or a neutralizing medium, so as to make its contents noninjurious before
discharge to the drainage system. Discharge of corrosive and method of treatment shall be
coordinated with and approved by local code authorities. Special isolation and sealing are
required for contained mechanical equipment and devices in laboratories, animal rooms,
greenhouses, etc.
5.3.5 Storm
Water Drains
Roof drains shall be located in areas where deflection of the
roofing system occurs, rather than above or near columns. Locations shall be coordinated
with architectural requirements. Provide cleanouts in storm water lines, as required.
5.3.6 Water
Supply System
A. Water Treatment. A chemical analysis of
the water supply must always be obtained. Treatment of cold water is usually not necessary
where water is obtained from a municipality or from a corporation. Water softeners shall
be installed, if required, for treatment of water supplied to water heaters or boilers.
Water softeners shall be installed in strict accordance with instructions from the
manufacturer and applicable codes.
B. Water Piping Materials. Local engineers
and water company officials should be consulted regarding the performance of different
kinds of pipe in a particular locality. Dielectric couplings shall be provided where pipes
of dissimilar metals are joined.
C. Water Pressures Required. Provide the
minimum water pressure as required by the NSPC for the fixtures to be installed. Refer to
the latest NFPA Codes and Standards for water pressure requirements for fire sprinkler and
standpipe systems. When street pressures are not adequate to maintain pressures indicated
above, provide a booster pump, a pneumatic system, a constant pressure, or a maintained
pressure pumping system.
D. Service Pipe. In large buildings, two
sources of water supply from different mains are desirable. Service lines must enter the
building in an accessible location. They must never enter fuel rooms, storage rooms,
switchgear rooms, or transformer vaults. A swing type joint shall be provided for a
service line at its entrance to the building.
E. Interior Water Piping. Water
distribution systems shall be protected against back flow (the flow of water or other
liquids into distributing pipes from a source or sources other than the intended source).
Refer to latest editions of the NSPC for requirements.
Pressure reducing valves shall be
installed on the domestic water mains or branches where required by the NSPC or local
codes. A valved bypass, one pipe size smaller than the main size, shall be provided around
pressure-reducing valves. The valve in the bypass shall be of the globe pattern.
Specifications shall state the initial pressure, required flow, and final pressure.
F. Valves. Locations and types of valves
must be shown on drawings and must be accessible. Valves shall be installed on cold water,
hot water, and hot water return circulating mains so that sections of mains may be shut
off without disturbing the services to other parts of the building. In addition, a valve
shall be provided on the main supply at its entrance to the building and on the inlets and
outlets of mechanical equipment requiring water connections. A shut off valve located
close to the main shall be installed on each branch connection off the main serving more
than one fixture. Valves shall be provided at the base of risers.
G. Sizing of Piping. Refer to the latest
NSPC edition.
H. Domestic Hot Water. Equipment shall be
automatically controlled and shall have sufficient capacity to deliver a minimum of 105 oF
water. A separate domestic water heating system shall be provided to supply high
temperature water requirements for special cafeteria equipment. Provide centralized
controls or a local time clock to turn equipment off during unoccupied hours. Fuel or
energy selected for water heating shall be determined by availability and cost. Type
selected maybe steam, gas, oil, electricity, or solar.
5.3.7 Gas
Piping
A. Design. Gas piping shall be designed
using the latest edition of NFPA Standard No. 54 and ANSI Z 223.1, National Fuel Gas Code.
Gas piping shall not be run in trenches, tunnels, furred ceilings, or other confined
spaces where leaking gas might collect and cause an explosion. Underground piping in
buildings and above ground in areas subject to fires, such as trash rooms, shall be
avoided.
B. Ventilation. Gas meter rooms and places
containing major gas-supplied equipment, such as gas-fired boilers, gas-engine emergency
generators, or other equipment using large quantities of gas, shall be ventilated to
ensure removal of leaking gas. When major gas-supplied equipment is located on upper
floors or on the roof of a building, gas supply piping shall be located outside the
building or in a separate two-hour fire-resistant shaft vented at the top and bottom to
the outside so as to prevent leaked gas from accumulating in the shaft or penetrate other
portions of the building.
5.3.8 Fire
Safety
A. General. The requirements of the latest
edition of National Fire Codes published by the National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) shall be used as criteria.
B. Automatic Sprinkler System
1) General.
a) Automatic
sprinklers systems shall be installed throughout all new construction projects and in all
major renovation projects in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 and the site
applicable National Model Building Code.
b) All
sprinkler systems shall be wet-pipe sprinkler systems, unless installed in areas subject
to freezing.
c) In
areas subject to freezing, install dry-pipe sprinkler systems, dry pendent sprinklers, or
provide heat in the space, and/or reroute the sprinkler piping. Heat tape shall not be
used on sprinkler piping.
2) Sprinkler
System Design. Sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically calculated in accordance with the
requirements specified in NFPA 13.
5.4 HEATING,
VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
5.4.1 Design Criteria
A. General. Comfort conditions to be
maintained in a building are dry-bulb temperature and relative humidity, three to 5 feet
above the floor. Designed indoor temperature will vary with the activity and intended use
of the building. The A-E shall utilize his professional knowledge and expertise to
identify those instances where ASHRAE design standards may not be appropriate for the
researcher's needs. This sensitivity to researchers' needs is critical to the success of
the design.
B. Outdoor Design Conditions. Outdoor air
design criteria shall be based on weather data tabulated in the latest edition of the
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Winter design conditions shall be based on the 99 percent
column dry bulb temperature in the ASHRAE table. Summer design conditions shall be based
on the 1 percent column dry-bulb temperature, with its corresponding mean coincident
wet-bulb temperature. Cooling towers shall be selected based on the 1 percent wet-bulb
temperature.
C. Indoor Design Conditions. Unless
otherwise specified in the project's POR, the following indoor design conditions shall be
used to calculate loads and size of equipment:
1) General Office
Space and Laboratories
Cooling 76 oF
DB and 50 percent RH
Heating 70 oF
DB
2) Computer Rooms
Year-Round
72 oF
and 40 percent RH.
5.4.2 Design
Calculations
A. Heat Losses. Heat losses
shall be calculated in BTU per hour. Heat transfer coefficients and calculations shall be
based on the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Infiltration shall be calculated by the
ASHRAE crack method. Unless otherwise specified in the project POR, heating load
calculations shall be based on inside design condition of 70 oF DB.
The heating plant shall be sized based on
the calculated block heating load for space and process plus an allowance of 20 percent
extra capacities.
B. Heat Gains. Heat gains shall be
calculated in BTU per hour. Heat transfer coefficients and calculations shall be based on
the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Unless otherwise specified in the project POR,
cooling load calculations shall be based on inside design conditions of 76 oF
DB and 50 percent RH.
The refrigerating plant shall be sized
based on the calculated block cooling load plus an allowance of 20 percent extra
capacities.
C. Calculation Format.
1) Calculations
shall be recorded in a standard format for each room to permit checking and to provide a
reference for system modification. Design calculations shall include, but not be limited
to, indoor and outdoor temperatures, heat loss, heat gain, supply and exhaust ventilation
requirements, humidification or dehumidification requirements, and heat recovered.
2) The room
heating and cooling loads shall include a 10 percent safety factor.
5.4.3 HVAC Design
Coordination
HVAC design shall be coordinated with other facets of
construction. The following factors require special consideration.
A. Mechanical Equipment Rooms. Rooms shall
provide adequate space for equipment installation and maintenance. If expansion is
planned, the size shall be based on future requirements. Equipment removal access shall be
provided where required. Proper location of these spaces is necessary for economical air
and water distribution.
B. Shafts. Size and location of shafts for
ductwork and pipes shall be checked before ductwork and piping system design. Effects of
shaft location on mechanical equipment and distribution systems shall be carefully
determined.
C. Louvers. Location and size of outdoor
air intakes, relief air discharge, and exhaust air discharge louvers shall be coordinated
with the architectural design. Outdoor air intakes shall be located so as to avoid intakes
of dust, smoke, generator and truck diesel fumes and exhaust air.
D. Cooling Tower Location. Tower shall be
located so as to be least obvious and, if possible, at ground level. Discharge at low
levels, or where it may come in contact with buildings or fresh air intakes, shall be
avoided.
E. Access. Location and size of control
panels and the type of service and maintenance a facility requires shall be coordinated
with the architectural design to allow personnel access to an area or to a piece of
equipment.
F. Wind Forces. Design of outdoor
equipment, such as cooling towers, stacks, and their supports, shall be based on the
maximum wind velocities prevalent at the site. Exterior mechanical equipment shall be
anchored, braced or guyed to withstand the prevailing wind velocity.
G. Seismic Considerations. If sites are
subject to earthquakes, design of equipment especially outdoor cooling towers and water
tanks, piping systems, ductwork, and foundations, shall include suitable allowance for
horizontal forces. Equipment and piping shall be seismically braced.
5.4.4 Ventilation
and Exhaust Requirements
A. Ventilation shall be provided as
required to remove hazardous or noxious fumes, for dust and odor control, equipment room
temperature control, and for personnel comfort.
1) Important
ventilation criteria is contained in Chapter 7, Safety and Health Elements. This
chapter must be consulted.
2) Laboratories:
In addition to the Chapter 7 requirements, ventilation systems shall be designed to comply
with NFPA 45 and ANSI Z9.5, American National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation.
3) Non-Laboratory
spaces: Ventilation systems shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 62, Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. Where appropriate, process ventilation shall conform to
the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists publications and
recommendations.
4) Laboratory and
hazardous fume exhaust: For laboratory exhaust and other systems conveying hazardous
fumes, an exhaust plume analysis shall be performed. This analysis will verify that the
exhausted air does not re-enter the building's fresh air intake or the intakes of nearby
buildings or otherwise pose a hazard to personnel.
B. Spaces where exhaust systems are used to
remove contaminated or hot air shall be maintained at a negative pressure to prevent
exfiltration to other areas. Negative pressure shall be created by exhausting five to 15
percent more air than the supply air. If anticipated fumes and vapors have a specific
gravity greater than air, exhaust intakes shall be provided at the floor level.
C. Explosion-proof ventilation equipment
shall be provided for areas where explosive vapors or dust is anticipated.
D. Filters shall be provided where
particulate matter must be removed from the supply or exhaust air.
5.4.5 Air
Cleaning Systems
Air supplied to occupied spaces, equipment rooms, kitchens,
cafeterias, etc., shall be provided with air filters, arranged to provide clean air at an
upstream side of air-handling units, fan coil units, and heating units. Filter efficiency
shall be in accordance with ASHRAE recommendations. Select filters for operating velocity
recommended by the manufacturer to give an economic combination of static pressure loss
and dust holding capacity. Minimum clearance of two feet shall be provided for service and
inspection. An access door with minimum width of 18 inches and an electric light in a
watertight type fixture shall be provided.
5.4.6 Piping
Systems
Size piping for maximum friction loss of 3.3 feet per 100 feet of
straight pipe, or avelocity of 8 feet per second, whichever is larger. Provide valves to
isolate equipment (for operation and repair), including room units and individual risers
to room units. Provide bypass piping on critical systems to allow operation during
maintenance operations that may have extended times. Provide manual vents at high points
and hose type drain valves at low points, and both in sections or risers that can be
isolated by valves. Show locations of expansion joints, loops, and anchors on drawings.
Suitable devices shall be provided so flow can be measured in
major equipment such as chillers, cooling towers, boilers, solar system loops, or other
zones; e.g., primary and secondary loops. Balancing devices shall be provided to allow
adjustment.
Except for condenser water systems, piping systems shall be
insulated. Systems exposed to weather or in tunnels shall be protected from freezing. Each
closed/open piping system shall be provided with chemical treatment to inhibit corrosion,
bacterial scale, deposits, or growth.
5.4.7 Air
Duct Systems
A. Equal friction method or static pressure
regain method in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals may be used to determine duct sizes.
B. Duct leakage rates shall not exceed 3
percent for low pressure systems and 0.5 percent for medium or high pressure systems. The
SMACNA duct seal classifications shall be shown on the drawings. (Note: For facilities
involving work with hazardous materials, all ducts shall be constructed in a leak-tight
manner with seams and joints usually welded airtight.)
C. Where ductwork is connected to equipment
fittings such as heating coils, cooling or filters, transition should be smooth. Slopes of
transition shall be 15 degrees on the upstream side and less than 30 degrees on the
downstream side. Transitions in elbows shall be avoided.
D. Access doors or panels shall be provided
in ductwork for any apparatus requiring maintenance, inspection, and service for: filters;
cooling coils; sound absorbers; volume and splitter dampers; fire dampers; thermostats;
temperature controls; variable air-volume boxes; valves; and humidifiers.
E. Smooth elbows with a center radius one
and one- half times the width of the duct should be used for rectangular ducts.
F. Volume or splitter dampers shall be
provided in ductwork, where necessary, to obtain proper control, balancing, and
distribution. A parallel blade automatic control damper shall be used if position control
is required. An opposed blade automatic control damper shall be used if modulating control
is required. Fire dampers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA standards. (NOTE:
Nodampers shall be used in chemical fume hood exhaust ductwork.)
5.4.8 Air
Distribution Devices
Air outlets shall be selected and located to provide proper throw,
drop, and spread. Air should not blow against obstructions such as beams, columns, lights
or sprinklers, or on occupants. Supply outlets shall be uniformly located within range of
throws to distributed loads with air velocity at the occupant's level not exceeding 50
feet per minute. Where loads are concentrated, supply outlets shall be located near the
load source. Noise level criteria shall be included on the drawing schedule.
Supply air diffusers shall be placed so as not to interfere with
the function of fume hoods. Supply air diffusers and exhaust inlets shall be placed so
that the room is swept by the air with short circuits being avoided. See section 7.2.2.
Air terminals for variable air volume (VAV) systems shall be
selected to be compatible with characteristics of VAV box; i.e., outlets must be capable
of performing at full and partial loads. Flow patterns must be properly evaluated.
Standard air outlets do not perform satisfactorily with variable air-volume flows.
5.4.9 Equipment
Selection
A. Fans. Fans shall be selected to operate
as close to the point of maximum efficiency as possible. Fans should absorb the least
brake horsepower for the given conditions of air flow and static pressure. If fans are
selected for parallel operation, each fan shall have self-closing or automatic discharge
dampers to prevent back flow.
Fan motors shall be sized for individual
operation with increased air flow against reduced static pressure.
B. Central System Air-Handling Unit
Requirements. Psychrometric analysis, with load calculations shall be provided for each
air-handling system in accordance with ASHRAE procedures. Face velocity for coils and
filters shall be between 400 - 500 feet per minute.
C. Refrigerating Machines. Refrigerating
units in a plant should be of the same type. Design plant for minimum of two units that
will carry the load and provide sufficient capacity reduction to permit continuous
operation at minimum loads.
Arrange condensers and chillers for
parallel flow unless series flow of chilled water is proved more economical. Flow diagrams
must be provided coordinating flow and temperature ranges of chillers and cooling coils;
includehydraulic characteristics of the chilled water system and pumps. Machines selected
shall be energy conserving. Energy consumption per ton kW/hr shall be specified; however,
the kW requirements must be met by more than two major manufacturers.
D. Cooling Towers. Provide mechanically
induced draft cooling towers having a separate cell for each refrigerating machine. Each
cell shall have a separate basin. Height of supports should permit easy maintenance and
painting of basin and supporting structure. Outlet connections must be accessible for
repairs.
Size towers for heat rejection of system
served with a 10 oF water temperature rise and an approximately 8 oF
approach to entering wet-bulb temperature. Design architectural enclosures and structural
supports to accommodate both cross-flow and counterflow towers having any standard post
spacing. Enclosures should not restrict air flow to tower or permit recirculating of fan
discharge air.
5.4.10 Automatic
Temperature and Humidity Control
A. General. Automatic controls for
temperature and humidity shall be provided for HVAC systems.
Drawings shall delineate the control type,
with standard symbols, schedules, description of operation, sequences, throttling ranges,
set points, alarms, etc. Show room thermostats on floor plans.
B. Direct Digital Control (DDC) system with
a host computer controlled monitoring and control shall be provided.
1) Controls.
Preprogramed stand-alone single or multiple loop controllers shall be used to control all
HVAC and plumbing subsystems.
2) Temperature
Controls. Heating and cooling energy in each zone shall be controlled by a thermostat or a
temperature sensor located in that zone. Independent perimeter systems must have at least
one thermostat or temperature sensor for each facade of the building with a different
orientation.
The sequences
controlling the heating and cooling to spaces shall minimize the magnitude to which they
are provided simultaneously. A 2.5�C (5�F) deadband shall be used between independent
heating and cooling operations within the same zone.
Night set back
controls must be provided for all comfort conditioned spaces, even if initial building
occupancy plans are for 24-hour operation.Morning warm-up or cool-down must be part of the
control system.
C. Temperature Reset and Economizer
Controls for Air Systems. Where appropriate, systems supplying heated or cooled air to
multiple zones will include controls that automatically reset supply air temperature by
representative building loads or by outside air temperature. Where appropriate, an
economizer cycle will be used when the outside air temperature can provide free cooling.
D. Hydronic Systems. Where appropriate,
systems supplying heated water to comfort conditioning systems will also include controls
that automatically reset supply water temperatures by representative temperature changes
responding to changes in building loads (including return water temperature) or by outside
air temperature. Consideration shall be given to resetting condenser water supply to
chillers.
5.4.11 Start-up,
Testing, and Balancing Equipment and Systems
A. Start-up. The A-E shall specify that
factory representatives are present for startup of all major equipment, such as boilers,
chillers and automatic control systems.
B. Testing and Balancing. It shall be the
responsibility of the A-E to adequately specify testing, adjusting and balancing resulting
in not only proper operation of individual pieces of equipment, but also the proper
operation of the overall HVAC system (air and water sides), in accordance with the design
intent. The Testing and Balancing contractor shall have up to date certification by either
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balance Bureau (NEBB).
C. Commissioning. The A-E shall prepare
contract documents which include provisions for commissioning of the mechanical, plumbing,
and fire protection systems.
The documentation shall include the design
intent document, pre commissioning checklists, and functional performance test checklists.
ASHRAE Guideline 1, The HVAC Commissioning Process, and NEBB Procedural Standards for
Building Systems Commissioning, provides guidance regarding commissioning. These standards
are not mandatory for ARS projects. However, they do contain principles and procedures
which should be considered based on the size and complexity of the project.
5.5 UNDERGROUND
HEAT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
5.5.1 General
Underground heat distribution systems shall be designed in
accordance with the ASHRAE Handbook Series and standard industry practice.
Appendix
5A: Mechanical Design Submission Requirements
5A-1. 15 Percent Design (Concepts) Submittal
A. Drawings.
1) Plans showing
equipment spaces for mechanical equipment, fire protection systems (e.g., fire pump, fire
alarm, etc.), fire protection water supplies, fire hydrant locations, fire apparatus
access roads, and fire lanes.
B. Narrative.
1) Description of
at least three potential HVAC systems.
2) Description of
the building's proposed fire protection systems.
3) Proposed special
features of plumbing system.
4) List of
applicable codes and code compliance statements.
5A-2. HVAC Design Submittal
A. 35 Percent HVAC Design Submittal
1) Design Analysis
a) Listing
of applicable codes.
b) Block
Loads for Heating and Cooling.
c) Life
Cycle Cost Analysis.
d) Description
of three potential HVAC systems with recommendations for special spaces such as
laboratories.
e) Preliminary
controls strategy narrative.
f) Environmental
considerations and permitting requirements
g) Responses
to the 15 percent Review Comments
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a) Locations
of mechanical rooms, fresh air intakes and exhaust locations.
b) Single
line duct drawings showing preliminary sizes of the mains.
c) List
of Specifications sections to be used.
B. 50 Percent HVAC Design Submittal
1) Design Analysis
a) Revisions
from the 35 percent submittal.
b) Narrative
Description of HVAC systems.
c) Block
and Room Loads for heating and cooling.
d) Description
of energy conservation measures.
e) Preliminary
Equipment Selections for major equipment (chillers, cooling towers, AHU's, exhaust fans,
pumps, VAV boxes, etc.).
f) Controls
strategy narrative
g) Preliminary
duct and pipe sizing calculations
h) Preliminary
Laboratory Exhaust Plume Analysis
i) Responses
to the 35 percent Review Comments
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a) Sequences
of control.
b) Air
flow diagrams.
c) Marked-up
specifications.
d) Preliminary
schedules
e) Double
line duct drawings for mechanical rooms and duct mains
f) Single
line duct drawings for branch ducts
g) Locations
of mechanical rooms with equipment drawn to scale
h) Locations
of fresh air intakes and exhaust locations
i) Duct
and piping system schematic
C. 95 Percent HVAC Design Submittal
1) Design Analysis.
a) Any
revisions from the 50 percent submittal.
b) Narrative
Description of HVAC systems
c) Final
Equipment selections showing two manufacturers
d) Final
Laboratory Exhaust Plume Analysis
e) Duct
and pipe sizing analysis
f) AHU
psychrometric analysis
g) Responses
to the 50 percent Review Comments
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a) Essentially
complete drawings and specifications with only minor coordination and technical issues to
be resolved.
D. 100 Percent HVAC Design Submittal
1) Design Analysis.
a) Complete
Design Analysis incorporating the final calculations, narrative, equipment selections,
review comments etc.
b) Responses
to the 95 percent Review Comments
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a) Complete
drawing and specification package suitable to "Issue for Construction."
5A-3. Plumbing Design Submittal
A. 35 Percent Plumbing Design Submittal
1) Design Analysis
a) Listing
of applicable codes.
b) Narrative
Description of the proposed plumbing systems, including the following:
_ Supply
water availability, quality, and pressure
_ Fixture
count analysis
_ Description
of any special treatment systems for both supply and waste
c) Environmental
considerations and permitting requirements.
d) Responses
to the 15 percent Review Comments.
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a) Locations
of mechanical rooms, water and sewer mains.
b) List
of Specification sections to be used.
B. 50 Percent Plumbing Design Submittal
1) Design Analysis
a) Revisions
from the 35 percent submittal.
b) Narrative
Description of Plumbing systems.
c) Preliminary
Equipment Selections for major equipment.
d) Preliminary
calculations for water supply, storm, and sewer piping.
e) Responses
to the 35 percent Review Comments.
2) Drawings and
Specifications.
a) Sequences
of control.
b) Riser
diagrams and schematics.
c) Marked-up
specifications.
d) Preliminary
schedules
e) Locations
of mechanical rooms with equipment drawn to scale
C. 95 Percent Plumbing Design submittal
1) Design Analysis
a) Any
revisions from the 50 percent submittal.
b) Narrative
Description of Plumbing systems
c) Final
Equipment selections showing two manufacturers for each major piece of equipment
d) Pipe
sizing analysis
e) Responses
to the 50 percent Review Comments
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a) Essentially
complete drawings and specifications with only minor coordination and technical issues to
be resolved.
D. 100 Percent Plumbing Design submittal
1) Design Analysis.
a) Complete
Design Analysis incorporating the final calculations, narrative, equipment selections,
review comments etc.
b) Responses
to the 95 percent Review Comments
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a) Complete
drawing and specification package suitable to "Issue for Construction."
5A-4. Fire Protection Design Submittals
A. 35 Percent Fire Protection Design
Submittal
1) Design Analysis
a) Listing
of applicable codes.
b) Narrative
Description of the proposed fire protection systems, including the following:
- Supply
water availability, quality, and pressure, including fire hydrant flow test data
_ Narrative
describing room occupancy classifications
c.) Responses
to the 15 percent Review Comments.
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a.) Locations
of mechanical rooms, water mains and proposed connections.
b.) Room
occupancy classifications.
c.) List
of Specification sections to be used
B. 50 Percent Fire Protection Design
Submittal
1) Design Analysis
a.) Revisions
from the 35 percent submittal.
b.) Narrative
Description of Fire Protection systems.
c.) Preliminary
Equipment Selections for major equipment.
d.) Preliminary
hydraulic calculations.
e.) Smoke
control/stairway pressurization analysis where applicable
f.) Responses
to the 35 percent Review Comments.
2) Drawings and
Specifications.
a.) Riser
diagrams and schematics.
b.) Room
occupancy classifications
c.) Marked-up
specifications.
d.) Preliminary
schedules
e.) Locations
of mechanical rooms
C. 95 Percent Fire Protection Design
Submittal
1) Design Analysis.
a.) Any
revisions from the 50 percent submittal.
b.) Narrative
Description of fire protection systems.
c.) Final
Equipment selections showing two manufacturers for each major piece of equipment
d.) Hydraulic
Calculations
e.) Responses
to the 50 percent Review Comments
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a.) Essentially
complete drawings and specifications with only minor coordination and technical issues to
be resolved.
D. 100 Percent Fire Protection Design.
1) Design Analysis.
a.) Complete
Design Analysis incorporating the final calculations, narrative, equipment selections,
review comments etc.
b.) Responses
to the 95 percent Review Comments
2) Drawings and
Specifications
a.) Complete
drawing and specification package suitable to "Issue for Construction."
Appendix
5B: Mechanical Design Coordination Checklist
5B-1. General
A. Interference with structural framing
members coordinated.
B. Equipment pad locations coordinated with
structural drawings.
C. Adequate clearances to service and
replace mechanical equipment.
D. Hoists (or other means of equipment
replacement) coordinated with structural drawings.
E. Motors and special power needs
coordinated with electrical drawings.
F. Location of roof drains and floor drains
coordinated with architectural and structural drawings.
G. Air diffusers and registers coordinated
with architectural drawings and electrical lighting plans.
H. Location of supply and exhaust systems
coordinated with security barriers, detection devices and other related concerns.
I. Louver sizes and locations coordinated
with architectural drawings.
J. Inverts of piping coordinated with civil
drawings.
K. Supports and bracing for major piping,
ductwork and equipment coordinated with structural drawings.
L. Penetrations through rated
walls/floor/roof assemblies detailed and specified.
M. Building Automation System specified,
including software and point schedules.
N. Start up and testing requirements
specified.
5B-2. Special Checklist for VAV Systems
A. Minimum amounts of outside air to be
admitted during occupied hours shown on drawings; also, minimum ventilation supplied at
lowest setting of VAV boxes.
B. Fan schedules for both supply and return
fans, showing minimum and maximum airflow rates and total pressure at minimum flow,
maximum sound power level and blade frequency increment at peak air flow.
C. VAV terminal units to be specified
indicating maximum and minimum air flow rates minimum static pressure required, maximum
static pressure permitted and noise ratings at maximum air flow.
D. Supply air outlets specified by face and
neck sizes, performance for maximum and minimum airflow.
E. Controller pressure setting and sensor
location shown, including reference pressure location. For multiple sensors all locations
must be shown. Also, show pressure setting for high limits of supply fans.
F. Maximum and minimum air flow rates shown
for air flow measuring stations. Air flow measuring stations located.
G. All required control instruments shown
and located.
5B-3. Fire Protection Review Checklist
A. Building Construction
1) Verify details
for fire walls and smoke partitions.
2) Verify fire
stopping for penetrations in fire rated walls and floors meet Code requirements.
3) Verify
structural components are fire rated (if applicable).
4) Verify
fireproofing meets Code requirements (if applicable).
5) Verify proper
building separation for exposure protection.
6) Verify interior
finish meets Code requirements.
B. Life Safety
1) Verify the
number of exits based on occupant loads.
2) Verify exits
discharge outside.
3) Verify travel
distance to exits.
4) Verify
remoteness of exits.
5) Verify common
paths of travel limits meet Code requirements.
6) Verify door
swings meet Code requirements.
7) Verify stair
details.
8) Verify
horizontal exit details.
9) Verify exit
signs meet Code requirements.
10) Verify
emergency lighting meet Code requirements.
11) Verify each
occupancy classification meets specific exiting requirements.
12) Verify the
type, size, and location of each portable fire extinguisher.
C. Water Supply
1) Verify water
supply is adequate to meet design density.
2) Verify location
of valve box and cover plate on buried gate valves.
3) Verify fire pump
calculations justify the size of the fire pump and jockey pump.
4) Verify riser
diagram for fire pump meets Code requirements.
5) Verify detail of
fire pump configurations.
6) Verify sensing
lines for both the fire pump and jockey pumps are indicated on the details.
7) Verify all
piping for fire pumps is identified on the drawings.
8) Verify the
location of the test header.
9) Verify the
location of both controllers.
10) Verify the
power feeds to the fire pump and jockey pumps are identified on the drawings.
D. Water-based Fire Extinguishing Systems
1) Verify
specifications contain information stating the static and residual pressures are available
at a measured flow rate.
2) Verify the
sprinkler riser is sized properly on the riser diagrams.
3) Verify that
sprinkler piping is not shown on the construction contract drawings. Only the interior
fire main piping shall be shown, in addition to the location of obstructions, structural
components, construction of walls, floors, and ceilings.
4) Verify the
location and size of underground or standpipe water supplies.
5) Verify the
location and arrangement of all waterflow and tamper switches.
6) Verify the
location of the riser and all points where it penetrates a floor.
7) Verify the
location of the fire department connection.
8) Verify the
location of all control valves and alarm valves.
9) Verify all areas
of the building have sprinkler protection.
10) Verify accuracy
of symbol lists.
11) Verify all
floor control valves and sectional valves have drains.
12) Verify
inspector's test valve arrangement.
13) Verify wall and
ceiling construction is indicated, as well as ceiling height.
E. Non-Water-Based Fire Extinguisher
Systems
1) Verify kitchen
equipment is protected by a wet chemical system, monitored by fire alarm system.
2) Verify power and
gas shut down for kitchen equipment meet Code requirements.
3) Verify locations
of all fire fighter telephone stations and telephone jacks on the drawings and riser
diagram meet Code requirements.
4) Verify locations
of all duct smoke detectors on the drawings and riser diagram meet Code requirements.
5) Verify accuracy
of fire alarm system input/output matrixes.
6) Verify accuracy
of symbol lists.
7) Verify accuracy
of final smoke control calculations where applicable (e.g., atriums, etc.)
8) Verify accuracy
of final stairway pressurization calculations where applicable.
9) Verify accuracy
of the interface of fire alarm system and Building Automation System.
10) Verify accuracy
of the interface of fire alarm system and the building security systems.
F. Miscellaneous
1) Verify that the
locations of the fire dampers meet Code requirements.
2) Verify that the
locations of smoke dampers meet Code requirements.
3) Verify that the
elevator systems meet Code requirements.
4) Verify that
sprinklered elevator machine rooms are provided with a means to automatically disconnect
power.
G. Fire Alarm System
1) Verify location
of all audible notification appliances on the drawings and riser diagram meet Code
requirements.
2) Verify audible
notification appliances are identified in stairways and elevator cabs.
3) Verify location
of all visible notification appliances on the drawings and riser diagram meet Code
requirements.
4) Verify accuracy
of fire alarm riser diagrams.
5) Verify that at
least two vertical fire alarm risers are installed remote as possible from each other.
Verify that the second riser is separated from the first riser by at least a one-hour fire
rated enclosure, not common to both risers.
6) Verify location
and construction requirements of fire command centers.
7) Verify location
of graphic annunciator panels.
8) Verify fire
alarm system wiring is solid copper.
9) Verify location
of all manual fire alarm stations meet Code requirements.
10) Verify smoke
detectors are installed in each elevator lobby and elevator machine room to initiate
elevator recall.
11) Verify
locations of all area smoke detectors on the drawings and riser diagram meet Code
requirements.
5B-4. Data and Operations Manual
An operations manual shall be prepared and training provided for
the building Operations and Maintenance personnel describing the design objectives and how
to operate the building. The manual shall include as-built drawings, equipment data, model
numbers for the equipment, parts lists, equipment options, operating manuals for each
piece of equipment, testing and balancing reports and certifications, maintenance
schedules, and warranty schedules. This manual must also diagram the cabling, fire safety
sprinkler system, and exterior grounds sprinkler system. The manual must be reviewed and
certified complete before submission to the Facilities Manager
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
This Chapter presents data and considerations necessary for proper
design selection of electrical power source and distribution systems. The criteria covers
load estimating factors, electrical power sources, distribution systems, illumination,
communication, signaling, special equipment, and repair and alterations for ARS buildings.
6.1.2 Codes
and Standards
A. The design shall comply with the
requirements of the site applicable codes and standards that apply to electrical system
design. The current edition of each applicable code, in effect at the time of design
contract award, shall be used throughout the project's design and construction. See
Chapter 1: Basic Requirements for complete discussion of codes and other special
requirements
B. Electrical Standards. All electrical and
communications systems must meet or exceed the requirements of the National Electric Code
(NEC).
C. Code Review and Analysis and Waiver
Process. The code criteria shall be reviewed by the A-E to the degree of detail necessary
to assure that tasks accomplished during design meet code requirements. All deviations
from code/ARS requirements and any equivalency concepts proposed for use must be
identified by the A-E and submitted to the Government for approval no later than the 35
percent design stage. See section 1.2.5 for requirements.
6.1.3 Design
Submissions and Coordination
A. The A-E shall submit electrical design
concepts, drawings, sketches, calculations, specifications, etc. at various stages
throughout the design process as outlined in the A-E contract. Refer to section 1.8, Design
Documentation and Appendix 5A, Electrical Design Submission Requirements.
B. Coordination Checklist. To insure
inter-discipline and intra discipline coordination, a review checklist is provided in
Appendix 6B, Electrical Design Coordination Checklist. The A-E shall make sure that
all of these items, and others that pertain to good project coordination, are reviewed and
addressed before submission of the documents to ARS.
6.1.4 Economic
Design
A. General. Electrical systems shall be
designed to permit acceptable competitive bids. Equipment and systems shall be efficient
and economical in construction, operation, and maintenance. To avoid excessive initial
cost, keep the number of circuits to a minimum without compromising the final size of the
feeder or voltage drop of a primary feeder. Where a group of large motors is to be served
by a distribution system, establish the most economical voltage for the common size motor,
and adopt a voltage for distribution.
B. Economic Analysis. The A-E shall perform
an economic analysis of power sources to determine the optimum scheme. The following
factors shall be considered:
1) Primary versus
secondary metering.
2) Government-owned
versus electric utility-owned transformers.
3) Use of
medium-voltage motors for large equipment, such as compressors, pumps, etc.
4) Frequency of
service interruptions to the extent that they affect the selection of equipment.
5) Amortization
costs for replacements or additions.
6) Individual
versus combined metering.
7) Cost of power
factor correcting capacitors where rate schedules penalize a low power factor.
6.1.5 Energy
Conservation
The largest factor in the energy consumption of a building is
lighting. The overall efficiency of the lighting system depends both on the individual
components and on the interaction of components in a system. A good control's strategy
that eliminates lighting in unoccupied spaces and reduces it where day lighting is
available can contribute significantly to energy conservation. The best way to institute
such controls is through a Building Automation System (BAS).
The A-E shall check with local power companies and include
technologies that qualify for rebates.
6.2 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
SECURITY DESIGN
6.2.1 General
A. Appropriate electrical engineering and
electronic security design criteria and standards for a project shall be determined based
on project-specific risk assessment done in accordance with the methodology outlined in
the ISC Security Design Criteria for New Federal Office Buildings and Major modernization
Projects. (See also section 1.4, Security Design)
6.2.2 Electrical
Security Design Considerations
A. General. The major security functions of
the electrical system are to maintain power to essential building services, especially
those required for life safety and evacuation; provide lighting and surveillance to deter
criminal activities; and provide emergency communication.
B. Service and Distribution
1) Distributed
Emergency Power. Separate normal and emergency electrical power. Emergency and normal
electric panels, conduits, and switchgear should be installed separately, at different
locations, and as far apart as possible. Electric distribution should also run at separate
locations.
2) Normal Fuel
Storage. Locate normal fuel storage away from high-risk areas. The main fuel storage
should be located away from loading docks, entrances, and parking. Access should be
restricted and protected (e.g., locks on caps and seals).
3) Emergency Fuel
Storage. Provide emergency fuel storage. The day tank should be mounted near the
generator, given the same protection as the generator, and sized to store approximately
eight hours of fuel A battery and/or UPS could serve a smaller building or leased
facility.
4) Emergency
Generator. Locate emergency generators away from high-risk areas. The emergency generator
should be located away from loading docks, entrances, and parking. More secure locations
include the roof, protected grade level, and protected interior areas. The generator
should not be located in any areas that are prone to flooding.
If the emergency
generator is installed outdoors at the grade, it should be protected by perimeter walls
and locked entrances
5) Utilities and
Feeders. Locate utilities and feeders away from high risk areas. Utility systems should be
located away from loading docks, entrances, and parking. Underground service is preferred.
Alternatively, they can be hardened.
C. Power and Lighting
1) Site Lighting.
Site lighting should be coordinated with the closed-circuit television (CCTV) system.
Although CCTV cameras are available for low-light applications, operations are enhanced
with higher uniform lighting levels. Coordinate site lighting with camera requirements.
2) Restrooms.
Consider providing emergency power for restroom lighting. Emergency lighting in restrooms
may facilitate evacuation or permit limited use during power outages not requiring
immediate evacuation. Where daylight is available, emergency lighting may not be required.
Emergency power should be provided for exit lighting in restrooms
3) Stairways and
Exit Signs. Provide battery lighting for stairwells and exit signs. Self-contained battery
lighting should be provided in stairwells and for exit signs as back up in case of
emergency generator lag time or failure. As an alternative to battery powered lighting
handrails, stair treads, signs, and doors can be painted with phosphorescent paint.
Floor-level evacuation lighting systems should also be considered since a bombing event
may fill corridors with dense smoke.
6.2.3 Electronic
Security
A. General.
Electronic security should be considered
early in project planning to help ensure that it is a cost-effective integral part of the
facility design. The purpose of electronic security is to improve the reliability and
effectiveness of life safety systems, security systems, and building functions. When
possible, accommodations should be made for future developments in security systems.
The following are intended to stress those
concepts and practices that warrant special attention to enhance public safety. Please
consult design guides pertinent to your specific project for detailed information about
electronic security.
B. Control Centers and Building Management
Systems
Centralization of control center
information can improve the reliability and effectiveness of life safety systems, security
systems, and building functions. Operational requirements, especially a pre-designed chain
of command for various types of incidents, should be carefully considered.
C. Security for Utility Closets, Mechanical
Rooms, and Telephone Closets
Security system wiring/conduit should not
be accessible in utility/telephone closets. As a minimum, a key system security shall be
provided to control access. For medium and higher protection levels, access to mechanical,
electrical, and telecommunication rooms should be authorized, programmed, and monitored
through pre identification of maintenance personnel. This alternative anticipates a more
sophisticated security system for doors.
D. Devices and Alarms
1) Elevator
Recall. An OEP may prefer that elevators not discharge personnel on the first floor
(lobby) during some events. A button can be provided on the Fire Command Center (FCC) to
recall elevators to an alternate floor in the event that the normal evacuation route would
involve traveling through a high risk area or that elevators could be safely used to
evacuate disabled persons.
2) Elevator
Emergency Message. In conjunction with the recall system, a prerecorded message should be
installed in elevator cab speakers, notifying passengers of an emergency and explaining
how to proceed.
E. Intrusion Protection System
1) Door Locks.
Provide key security system.
2) Intrusion
Detection. Basic intrusion detection should be provided for entrances into the facility,
generally by means of magnetic reed switches. For Medium/Low Level and higher, glass break
sensors for windows up to scalable heights should be considered especially if local crime
conditions justify additional detection measures.
3) Monitoring
Provide CCTV monitoring station
4) Closed Circuit
TV (CCTV). CCTV monitoring may be required depending on the overall result of the risk
assessment. The monitoring should be mainly at entrances, monitored exits, vehicular
entrances into parking garages, and loading docks.
All CCTV cameras
should be on real-time and time-lapsed video recorders. For deterrence as well as to aid
post incident investigations, key exterior areas (for Medium Level) or most exterior areas
(for Higher Level), especially vehicle routes close to the facility, should be video
recorded. The use of digital video systems should be considered by the designer.
5) Duress Alarms
or Assistance Stations. Call buttons should be provided at key public contact areas and as
needed in the offices of managers and directors, in garages, and other areas that are
identified as high risk locations by the project-specific risk assessment.
6.3 PRELIMINARY
DESIGN CONSIDERATION
6.3.1 Preliminary
Data
A. Load Data. Before specific power sources
and distribution systems can be considered, realistic preliminary load data, including
master planning requirements, shall be compiled. Expected power demand on intermediate
substations and on main power supply should be calculated from connected load layouts.
Determine these factors by load analysis and by combining loads progressively. To combine
loads, start at ends of smallest feeders and work back to power sources. Preliminary
estimates of lighting loads may be made by assuming watts per square foot of building
area.
B. Load Analysis. Analyze characteristics
of each load to determine appropriate load estimating factors. Consider items such as
environmental conditions of weather, geographical location, and working hours, as the
situation dictates.
6.3.2 Estimation
of Loads
A. Individual Loads. Individual loads are
those with one incoming service. In general, these loads would comprise single structures.
B. Lighting Load. Divide facility area into
significant components by function. Determine average lighting level and type of light
source for each area.
C. Power Load. Power loads shall include
loads other than lighting loads and thoseserved by general purpose receptacles.
D. System Loss. System loss of
approximately 6 percent, based on calculated maximum demand, shall be added to the
building load.
E. Load Growth. Determine requirements for
load growth for anticipated usage and life expectancy with particular attention to
possibilities of adding heavy loads in the form of air-conditioning, electric heating,
electric data processing, and electronic communication equipment. Before determining the
size of service and method of distribution to a facility, an economic analysis shall be
made to determine the most feasible way of serving this future load.
F. Emergency Loads. Determine emergency
power requirements based on three types of loads: minimum essential loads; emergency loads
for vital operations; and uninterruptible (no-break) load.
When the three categories of emergency
power requirements have been ascertained, determine where local emergency facilities are
required, where loads may be grouped for centralized emergency facilities, and what loads
are satisfied by the reliability of the general system.
G. Area Loads. Area loads consist of groups
of individual facility loads served by a subdivision of the electrical distribution
system. The term area applies to the next larger subdivision of an overall distribution
system. Demand loads for an area must be known for sizing the distribution wiring and
switching.
6.3.3 Standards
for Sizing Equipment and Systems
To ensure maximum flexibility for future systems changes, the
electrical system must be sized as follows: panelboards for branch circuits must be sized
with 50 percent spare ampacity, panelboards serving lighting only with 25 percent space
switchboard ampacity, distribution panels with 35 percent spare ampacity and main
switchgear with 25 percent spare ampacity. Spare overcurrent devices shall be provided as
well as bus extension for installation of future protective devices.
6.3.4 Selection
of Power Source
A. Primary. The primary source shall have
sufficient capacity to provide for peak electric power demand during normal operations.
B. Standby. The standby source shall have
enough capacity so that it alone can supply minimum essential operating electric load of
the building and, when added to capacity of a primary source, will provide a combined
capacity sufficient to furnish the estimated peak demand under mobilization conditions.
C. Emergency. Emergency sources, usually
one or more engine-driven, manual or automatic-starting emergency generators, shall have
sufficient total capacity to provide electric power demand for vital operations. Vital
operations permit power interruption only for relatively short durations. The emergency
source shall have sufficient capacity to provide continuous adequate supply for vital
operations.
6.3.5 Uninterruptible
(No-Break) Power
An uninterruptible power system is necessary for certain research
activities, critical electronic equipment, or computer rooms with functions that require a
continuous power supply. This power system is defined as one that, under all conditions,
will provide suitable power to a critical load without interruption.
The no-break system must be capable of supplying power of suitable
quality during voltage fluctuations or surges, or fault or ground conditions. Successful
operation of critical spares depends on power system reliability. In designing no-break
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) systems, it is important that the system be as simple
as possible, using basic applications of power system design practices which have been
proven sound and economical for the purpose on a life-cycle basis.
6.3.6 Installation
of Distribution System
Overhead lines shall be avoided. The underground method shall be
used if normal conditions exist.
6.3.7 Grounding
of Distribution Systems
Solid grounding shall be used for automatic clearing of ground
faults. Use only on secondary systems or where impedance of transformers is included in a
zero-sequence path. This connection shall be avoided for grounding of generators where
single-phase fault current at terminals will exceed three-phase fault current for which
they have been braced.
6.4 SERVICES
6.4.1 Service
Selection
Selection of service characteristics shall be based on the
economic analysis outlined in section 6.1.4 (B)
A. Service Characteristics. Where primary
service is selected, three-phase service should be provided, and any voltage class of 34.5
kV or less may be used. Secondary service shall be either 208Y/120 volt or 480Y/277 volt,
three-phase, 4-wire service.
B. Service Conductors. Use of more than two
conductors in parallel shall be discouraged. Conductors serving the same load shall be of
the same sizes and lengths.
C. Metering. Regardless of operating
agencies, buildings shall be provided with a revenue primary or secondary metering
installation ahead of the main disconnecting device.
D. Service Equipment. Locate equipment at
service entrance points. Use circuit breakers. Select the most economical devices to
accommodate short-circuit and normal current requirements.
6.4.2 Short-Circuit
Considerations
Devices must be able to clear any fault on secondary systems
without damage when service conductors are connected to low-voltage network systems,
wherein service protective devices and entire utilization system shall be subjected to
large short-circuit currents.
6.4.3 Service
Equipment Rooms
Utilities shall be accessible, and equipment rooms shall be sized
to provide sufficient space for maintenance. If electrical equipment is located in an
electrical-mechanical equipment room, adequate space for electrical equipment shall be
reserved.
6.4.4 Vaults
for Utility Transformers
If space conditions require that the electric utility's
transformers be installed on Government property, they may be pad-mounted outside the
building, or installed in vaults within the building. Vaults shall be constructed as part
of the building and shall meet the utility's requirements.
6.4.5 Service
Feeders
A. Number. The number and arrangement of
incoming feeders shall be based on requirements for maximum uninterrupted service, large
motor inrush characteristics, and the reliability of the distribution system.
B. Capabilities. Electrical rating of each
service feeder shall be based on the sum of distribution feeder requirements, future
loads, and system demand and diversity factors. Neutrals of secondary services shall be
full size, where required, to carry electrical discharge lighting, data processing, or
similar equipment loads where there are harmonic currents present.
6.4.6 Service
Feeder Conduits
Conduits for service feeders shall be extended underground from
the point of connection with the electric utility's system to the exterior wall of the
room or vault in which main service disconnecting equipment is located.
6.4.7 Service
Disconnecting Equipment
A. Primary Disconnecting Equipment. For
projects having only two incoming feeders, each feeder shall be provided with a
metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear assembly. Each feeder shall supply two unit
substations. Interrupter switchgear for a single incoming feeder may be combined with the
unit substation.
B. Secondary Disconnecting Equipment.
Service disconnecting devices shall be low-voltage power circuit breakers or molded case
circuit breakers. Power circuit breakers shall be used for secondary services that have
ratings in excess of 600 amperes.
C. Ratings. Continuous current ratings of
service disconnecting devices shall be calculated on the same basis as the capacities of
the feeders they serve. Interrupting capacities of disconnecting devices shall be not less
than the fault currents available at the point of application.
6.4.8 Electric
Utility Equipment
Service equipment to be furnished and/or installed by the electric
utility shall be shown and identified on drawing and listed in specifications. Each point
at which material furnished by the utility terminates or is connected to material
furnished by the Construction Contractor shall be clearly specified or shown on drawings.
6.4.9 Ground
Fault Protection
A. Application. Ground fault protection
(GFP) shall be applied as required by the NEC. Additional GFP shall be required on feeder
and branch circuits on two levels to achieve selectivity and continuity of service.
B. Selection. Economics shall be balanced
against the cost of outages and potential cost of research loss or equipment damage to
arrive at a practical system. Each system shall be analyzed individually. The following
factors shall be considered in selecting GFP.
1) Type of power
distribution.
2) Reliability
required.
3) Neutral circuit
complexity.
4) Number of
ground return paths.
5) Rating and
application of protective devices.
6) Setting of
protective devices.
C. Special Considerations. Particular care
in the application of GFP systems shall be taken when there are a number of ground return
paths to the service transformer via building steel and earthground. GFP equipment shall
be desensitized by fault current flowing directly to the transformer. Solutions to the
desensitizing problem follow:
1) Use of
zero-sequence ground sensor encircling the phase and neutral conductors.
2) Use of
residually connected individual sensors on each phase and neutral conductor to detect
current imbalances.
3) Isolation of
equipment grounds from building steel and earth ground (except at service).
4) Source ground
current transformers (on neutral).
5) Systems. The
two commonly used systems are residually connected and
zero-sequence. The type of system for a project shall be determined by the
factors above, and circuit breaker coordination calculations.
6.5 ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT ROOMS
6.5.1 Planning
Separate electrical rooms shall be provided for medium-voltage and
low-voltage switchgear assemblies and for power, distribution, and substation
transformers. Rooms shall be located where they will be readily accessible, but free from
the danger of flooding. Each room shall be provided with an appropriate number (regarding
fire safety) of exit doors with panic hardware which shall open into space that is
accessible at all times.
6.5.2 Clearances
Clearances and spacing of electrical equipment shall conform with
the requirements of NEC. Aisle widths shall be increased wherever necessary for the use or
storage of breaker removal equipment.
6.5.3 Concrete
Curbs
Continuous concrete curbs shall be provided around each
liquid-filled transformer or group of transformers. Curb height and area enclosed shall be
adequate to contain the liquid from the largest transformer in the group in the event of
tank rupture.
6.5.4 Equipment
Removal
Rooms and adjoining areas shall include clearances, suitable
doors, removable windows, panels, or other means to allow electrical equipment to be
removed and replaced.
6.5.5 Lighting
Normal room lighting shall be as described in section 6.11.
Provide an exit sign over the exit door and emergency lights with a minimum of one
foot-candle illumination. Lights for electrical and mechanical rooms shall be connected to
the emergency generator, if available, or shall have 90-minute battery backup.
6.5.6 Ventilation
Provide a thermostatically controlled exhaust fan to remove heat
buildups. Where possible, makeup air shall be obtained directly from the outside. Provide
fire dampers as appropriate to maintain fire rating. Coordinate requirements with the
mechanical design.
6.6 PRIMARY
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
6.6.1 General
Description
The primary distribution system shall consist of Government-owned
incoming feeder conduit banks, medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear, distribution feeders
and raceways, substations, and auxiliary switchgear and secondary unit substations shall
be substituted for the corresponding equipment items indicated above.
6.6.2 Distribution
Feeders
The capacities of medium-voltage distribution feeders shall be
determined on the same basis as primary service feeders. A separate feeder shall be
provided for each transformer in a primary substation. Feeders supplying secondary
substations may serve more than one transformer, provided continuity of service is not
impaired.
6.6.3 Feeder
Raceways
A. Electrical Equipment Spaces. In
electrical equipment rooms, electrical closets, and similar spaces, medium-voltage
distribution feeds shall be installed in galvanized steel conduits, and horizontal runs
shall be overhead. However, cable trays may be used to support medium-voltage distribution
feeders in electrical equipment rooms. Exposed power cables shall be fireproofed
throughout. Top connections shall be provided to the transformers and switchgear
assemblies.
B. Risers. Conduits for medium-voltage
feeder risers shall be galvanized steel. When they are not in electrical closets,
electrical equipment rooms, or transformer rooms, each conduit or group of conduits shall
be protected as required by the NEC.
C. Structural Coordination. Design of
interior and exterior medium-voltage distribution systems shall be coordinated with the
structural design features to ensure that structural drawings show all details of
supports, reinforcements, dowels, etc. required for a satisfactory installation.
6.6.4 Primary
Substations
A. High Voltage. Where primary service
voltage exceeds 15 kV, a primary substation shall be provided by the electric utility to
reduce the voltage. The substation shall be of joint use and may include the
Government-owned, medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear required for the site distribution
system. The firm capacity of the substation shall be determined by the electric company.
B. Medium-Voltage. Primary substations
shall be provided where required to supply power for large medium-voltage motors, such as
those driving air-conditioning compressors and pumps. Outgoing distribution voltage shall
be 4.16 kV. The firm capacity of each substation shall be equal to the sum of the kVA
ratings of the medium-voltage motors served at a demand factor of 100 percent. Total
transformer capacity provided shall equal, or exceed, the calculated firm substation
capacity, but shall not include reserve capacity.
6.6.5 Secondary
Substations
Secondary substations shall articulate unit type, consisting of a
transformer and primary metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear and secondary switchboards.
Where a project requires a single unit substation served by a single medium-voltage
feeder, the service disconnecting and metering equipment shall be integrated with the
primary switchgear. Where two primary feeders serve two unit substations in the same
location, they shall be arranged for secondary selective operation, but shall not be
double ended unless specified.
6.6.6 Batteries
Those projects requiring high-voltage or medium-voltage circuit
breakers shall be provided with a 125-volt DC storage battery bank. Each bank shall be
monitored so that an alarm will sound when the voltage falls below that required to
operate the trip coil. Power shall be provided to circuit breakers, as described below,
for operation of breakers.
Battery banks shall be of the nickel-cadmium, lead-acid, or
lead-calcium type. Battery bank shall have capacity to carry continuous loads (relays,
indicating lamps, etc.) for eight hours and perform either the tripping or the closing
operation described below with the charger de-energized and a final voltage of not less
than 105 volts. Simultaneous tripping of breakers in the primary system shall be required.
Closing operation shall require closing the largest single breaker, if the installation
contains fewer than four circuit breakers. Breaker closing current shall include spring
release coil current and starting current of the spring charging motor.
Ratings for batteries shall be obtained by assuming that duration
of the tripping orclosing load is one minute, and adding the equivalent of the continuous
load for eight hours. A safety factor of 1.80 shall be applied for small projects, and a
safety factor of 1.40 for large projects.
Each battery bank shall be provided with static charging equipment
fed from an emergency panelboard. Battery bank and charging equipment shall be installed
in, or near, the medium-voltage switchgear room. Batteries, racks, charging equipment,
auxiliaries, etc. shall be shown on drawings. Adequate space for maintenance shall be
provided.
6.6.7 Unit
Substations
Primary unit substations shall consist of a primary terminal
chamber, a three-pole, three position disconnecting and grounding switch, a power
transformer, and an outgoing feeder section close-coupled as an integrated unit. Primary
terminal and switch chambers shall be welded to transformer enclosures or tank.
Transformers shall be a dry type or a high-fire point, liquid insulated type. Outgoing
feeder section shall be contained in a suitable steel housing welded to the transformer
enclosure or tank. Space shall be provided within the housing for the fused potential
transformer required for metering and control. Primary terminal chambers and the outgoing
feeder section housing shall be arranged for top connection of the feeder conduits.
Secondary unit substations shall consist of a medium-voltage fused
load-interrupter switch, a transformer, a low-voltage section, and necessary transition
sections close-coupled as an integrated unit. Primary service disconnecting and metering
equipment shall be included where required. Transformers shall be either high-fire point,
liquid-insulated, or ventilated, dry type. A ventilated, dry transformer shall be used
only when the rating does not exceed 500 kVA, where dust and moisture conditions are
favorable, and where the sound level will not be objectionable.
6.7 SECONDARY
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
6.7.1 General
Wire and conduit size shall be based on use of copper conductors.
Aluminum conductors are not acceptable. Insulation shall be rated 75 oC or more
in areas subject to abnormal heat, such as a boiler room.
A. Where 480Y/277-volt, three-phase, 4-wire
service is provided for fluorescent lighting and power, dry type transformers shall be
installed to provide 208Y/120-volt current for incandescent lighting, receptacles, small
motors, etc.
B. Motors smaller than � horsepower may be
connected to 120-volt single-phase circuits. One-half horsepower and larger motors shall
be connected tothree-phase circuits, except where single-phase motors are furnished as
standard factory assembled parts of machines, such as kitchen equipment and window-mount
air-conditioners.
C. Feeders supplying all, or part, of the
electrical power or service to laboratories shall contain a separate green insulated
grounding conductor sized in accordance with the NEC.
6.7.2 Low-Voltage
Switchgear Assemblies
Low-voltage switchgear assembly shall be provided for each
building and secondary substation that requires secondary service rated more than 600
amperes. Secondary service disconnecting devices and metering equipment, where required,
shall be included in main switchgear assemblies. Each switchgear assembly shall include a
circuit breaker for each outgoing feeder. Devices shall be the draw out type.
Switchboards shall be enclosed, dead-front. Low-voltage
metal-enclosed switchgear assemblies with low-voltage power circuit breakers may be used
when the total load exceeds 2,000 amperes.
Each low-voltage switchgear assembly equipped with circuit
breakers shall be provided with one spare circuit breaker and two spaces (completely
equipped compartments without breakers) for accommodation of future loads. Ratings of
spare breakers and future breakers shall be indicated on drawings duplicating ratings of
active breakers. Where known loads are anticipated in the near future, spare units shall
be provided. When possible, switchgear assemblies shall be arranged so that additional
units may be installed.
6.7.3 Over
Current Protection
Short-circuit protective devices shall provide continuity of
service, and short-circuit ratings shall be based on values resulting from system
coordination. Selection of over current protective devices for low-voltage switchgear
assemblies shall be made on the basis of load current, available fault current, and
selective operation.
Low-voltage power circuit breakers with draw out mountings in
metal-enclosed switchgear shall be used when trip rating is above 200 amperes. Where
interrupting capacity of the breaker alone is inadequate, or where cost of a breaker of
adequate interrupting capacity is not justified by service requirements, breakers and
high-interrupting-capacity current-limiting fuses may be used in combination.
Molded-case circuit breakers with fixed mountings may be used in
switchboards when trip ratings are not more than 800 amperes and their interrupting
capacities, with or without current-limiting devices, are adequate. Molded-case circuit
breakers shall not be connected to buses of a metal enclosed switchgear assembly
consistingmainly of low-voltage power circuit breakers. When molded-case breakers are used
for a switchgear assembly, they shall be segregated on a separate switchboard section or
panelboard section having its own buses fed through a low-voltage feeder breaker.
Place switches where necessary for isolation purposes. To
determine switch ratings, follow the procedure outlined for circuit breakers. Switches
shall be derated to 80 percent of maximum capacities.
Locate fuses where required to protect low voltage signaling and
control circuits against overloads or short circuits. Determine rating of fuses, based on
voltage, current carrying capacity, and interrupting capacity. Take into consideration all
forms of inrush current.
6.7.4 Motor
Control Centers
Motor control centers (MCC) with NEMA Class I Type B wiring and
combination motor starters and current breaker disconnects shall be provided, in lieu of
separately mounted motor starters, where several motors are located in close proximity.
Unless the MCC is located in sight of, and within 25 feet of a motor it controls, a
disconnect switch shall be provided at that motor.
The mechanical engineer shall be responsible for specifying proper
types and sizes of motors and controllers and for indicating their locations on drawings.
This information must be given to the electrical engineer who shall be responsible for
providing suitable feeder sizes, switchgear and transformer capacities, etc. to service
motors, and for selecting line voltages and other current characteristics in cooperation
with the mechanical engineer.
6.7.5 Panelboards
Distribution panelboards shall be equipped with automatic circuit
breakers of the quick-make quick-break type. Lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboards shall be equipped with automatic time delay circuit breakers.
A main distribution panelboard shall be provided with a system
that requires secondary service rated 200 to 600 amperes. The main panelboard shall have
an over current protective device for each lighting and appliance panelboard. A main
distribution panelboard will not be required in a building having two or three lighting
and appliance panelboards and a service disconnecting device with a rating of 200 amperes
or less.
Branch circuits over current protective devices in a distribution
panelboard shall have a trip rating not lower than the calculated load of the feeder
served but not exceeding 800 amperes. Each distribution panelboard shall be provided with
a number of spare over current protective devices with appropriate ratings and space for
anticipated loadgrowth.
Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall be
arranged so that each panelboard shall contain from 30 to 42 branch circuits, including
spares and spaces. The number of spare over current devices and spaces for future over
current devices shall not be less than 10 percent of the active circuits. Over current
devices shall have 20-ampere ratings, except where higher ratings are required. Over
current devices for No. 14 AWG conductors in existing construction shall have a 15-ampere
rating. Devices for motor circuits shall have the highest ratings permitted by the NEC for
the associated motors and starters. Plug-in breakers are not acceptable.
Emergency panelboards shall be provided to supply, through
independent circuits, exit lights, stairway lights, emergency lights, building controls,
fire pumps, fire alarm and other fire protective systems, and critical research equipment.
Emergency panelboards shall be fed from one of the sources described in section 6.10.
6.7.6 Electrical
Closets
Except where indicated below, electrical closets shall enclose
panelboards, feeder conduits, busways, and dry type transformers.
A. Spacing. Electrical closets shall be
spaced so that 277-volt circuits will not exceed 200 feet in length and so that 120-volt
circuits will not exceed 100 feet in length. The latter spacing shall be provided where
both 277-volt and 120-volt circuits are fed from the same closet. The above spacing shall
be modified to suit underfloor raceway requirements and to suit telephone closet
requirements, as necessary, where electrical and telephone closets adjoin.
B. Location. Electrical closet locations
shall be determined early in the design of a building and shown on design development
submission drawings. Closets shall be arranged vertically, one above the other, and shall
be accessible from corridors or public spaces. In no case shall access be through another
wire closet or from a toilet, toilet vestibule, stairway, or stairway landing. Closets
shall not be located where entry of conduits or underfloor raceways is blocked by
obstructions such as columns, shear walls, toilets, stairways, flues, janitor gear rooms,
service closets, mechanical equipment spaces, vaults, elevator hoistways, and pipe and
duct shafts. Where electrical and telephone closets adjoin, the telephone closet should
have the position more accessible to the underfloor raceway header capacity. Adjacent
electrical and telephone closets shall be provided with a 2-inch sleeve for
interconnections.
C. Size. Closets shall be ample enough to
contain equipment and terminations in initial installation and to allow anticipated future
expansion.
D. Arrangement. Equipment in each
electrical closet shall be arranged formaximum accessibility. To minimize sound
transmission, dry tape transformers shall be mounted preferably on the wall or hung from
the ceiling to afford maximum working floor space. Contract drawings shall include detail
drawings showing the arrangement of equipment, busways, risers, sleeves, transformers,
panelboards, tap boxes, junction boxes, cable anchor boxes, wire troughs, and other
electrical items to be installed in closets. Where busways pass through closet floors,
concrete curbs about three inches high shall be provided around openings. Vertical joints
between curbs and walls shall be caulked.
E. Future Additions. When it is known that
a building is designed for future expansion, sleeves shall be provided in electrical
closets for all feeders, communication system conduits, etc. required to serve the future
load.
F. Ventilation. Ventilation shall be
provided, as required, to prevent temperature from exceeding 100 oF.
G. Lighting. See section 6.11 -
Illumination
H. Receptacles. A duplex receptacle shall
be provided in each electrical closet. Receptacles shall be installed in the wall 12
inches above the floor and connected to a separate 120-volt circuit in a branch circuit
panelboard.
I. Fireproofing. Where sprayed-on
fireproofing is used on the underside of cellular steel floors over electrical closets,
suspended ceilings or other means shall be used to cover fireproofing.
J. Closets Not Required. Electrical closets
may not be required in certain buildings. Panelboards may be mounted on walls and columns.
Wall-mounted panelboards shall be recessed. Access to panel for future circuiting and dry
tape transformers, if required, may be installed above accessible ceiling spaces
6.8 UNDERGROUND
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
6.8.1 Direct
Burial
Install direct burial cables in areas that are rarely disturbed.
Restrict direct burial to light loads and to street lighting systems. For protection
against mechanical injury, high-voltage direct burial cables shall be provided with a
protective covering of steel armor. When corrosion considerations are of importance,
armored cables shall be provided with a plastic or synthetic rubber jacket.
6.8.2 Duct
Lines
Select duct routes to balance maximum flexibility with minimum
cost and avoidance of foundations for future buildings and other structures. When it is
necessary to combine communication lines with power distribution lines, provide two
isolated systems in separate manhole compartments. Where possible, run ducts in same
concrete envelopes.
Electrical ducts shall be kept clear of other underground
utilities, especially high-temperature water or steam pipes. Acceptable standard materials
include fiber, clay, plastic, and soapstone.
When sizing conduits, consider the following: For general
distribution, standard design requires ducts of four or 5 inches. For communication duct
banks, a minimum size of 3 inches may be acceptable.
Arrangement of Duct Banks. For the best configuration, use an
arrangement in two conduits wide. This arrangement requires only a narrow trench, provides
good heat dissipation, and enables cables to be more easily stacked on the manhole walls.
Top of duct banks shall be kept to a minimum of 18 inches below
grade. Under roadways and runways, a minimum coverage of 24 inches is required, and under
railway tracks, 36 inches.
Drain ducts to manholes with a constant slope of 3 inches or more
per 100 feet. Where two manholes are at different elevations, a single slope following the
general slope of the terrain may be the most economical. When grades are flat or crest
between manholes, a single slope requires too much depth in one of the manholes.
New underground systems shall include sufficient ducts for planned
future expansion.
6.8.3 Manholes
and Handholes
Two-section manholes shall be used where power and communication
lines follow the same route.
Factors bearing on the choice of manholes and handholes include:
number, direction, and location of duct runs; cable racking arrangement; method of
drainage; adequacy of work space (especially if equipment is to be installed in the
manhole); and size of the opening required to install and remove equipment.
Place manholes or handholes as required for connection or splices;
at street intersections, and where necessary to avoid conflict with other utilities.
Manhole separation shall not exceed 600 feet on straight pulls and 300 feet on curved duct
runs. Decrease spacing where necessary to prevent installation damage.
Where an extension is anticipated, provide a set of stubs so that
the manhole wall will not be disturbed when an extension is made.
6.8.4 Underground
Cables
Cable costs make up a large portion of initial investment and
future maintenance operating costs, and system reliability. These costs are important in
selecting underground cables and accompanying protective and operation devices.
6.8.5 Underground
Transformers
Use vaults to house transformers and associated equipment for
underground distribution systems.
Vault design shall include the following provisions:
A. Adequate ventilation shall be
provided to prevent a transformer temperature in excess of the values prescribed in ANSI
C57.12.00. This limitation requires that most electric heat losses must be removed by
ventilation; only a minor part can be dissipated by vault walls. The NEC NFPA No. 70
recommends three square inches of clear grating area per kilovolt-ampere of transformer
capacity. In localities with above average temperatures, tropical or subtropical, this
area should be increased or supplemented by forced ventilation, dependent upon temperature
extremes.
B. Adequate access shall be provided for
repairs, maintenance, installation, and removal of equipment.
C. Isolation shall be provided to prevent
communication of fires or explosions toadjacent vaults.
D. Vaults shall be provided with drainage.
When normal drainage is not possible, provide a sump pit to permit the use of a portable
pump.
6.8.6 Safety
Considerations
Electrical equipment and hardware installed in vaults and manholes
shall be effectively grounded to rods provided for this purpose. Metallic sheaths and
exterior shields of cables shall be grounded at each manhole.
6.9 BRANCH
CIRCUIT WORK
6.9.1 Wiring
and Capacities
Branch circuits shall be provided with insulated copper conductors
(minimum No. 12 AWG) in metallic raceways or in cables protected by a metal enclosure. All
branch circuits shall have a separate green insulated grounding conductors installed in a
raceway along with supply and/or neutral conductors.
A. Nonmetallic cable (type NMC, trade name
"Romex") or armored cable (type AC, trade name "BX") shall also have a
separate insulated or bare copper grounding conductor installed in the cable with the
supply and/or neutral conductors.
B. Wiring shall be run concealed.
C. No more than eight duplex receptacles
shall be connected to an individual 20-ampere circuit.
D. Individual lighting and appliance branch
circuit loads shall not exceed 1600 watts for 120-volt circuits and 3200 watts for
277-volt circuits.
E. Motor branch circuits and special
receptacle circuits shall be sized in accordance with the NEC requirements.
F. The branch circuit distribution system
type shall be selected based upon a life-cycle cost analysis of at least two competitive
systems such as flexible wiring (plug-in) flat conductor cable versus a conventional
system (wire and conduit).
G. Flat conductor cable is unacceptable in
the research laboratory and associated buildings and facilities. This cable is allowable
and more suitable in the administrative and office areas.
H. Harmonic currents on the neutral
conductors shall be minimized for circuits serving computers and other electronic
analytical equipment. Use of a reduced gauge as allowed by the NEC can be problematic.
6.9.2 Switching
For control of lights, refer to section 6.11
6.9.3 Receptacles
In addition to receptacles required for spaces and equipment
described above, receptacles shall be provided in the locations for purposes indicated
below. A duplex receptacle, referred to below, is a 15-ampere, 125-volt grounding type
unless otherwise noted. Furnish grounding conductors for metallic boxes. Connect grounding
conductors to receptacle ground terminal, branch circuit grounding conductors, and box
grounding conductors with a metallic crimp. Wire nuts are not acceptable. Receptacle
circuits shall be entirely separate from lighting circuits. Concerning receptacle
requirements for the physically disabled, see OSHA requirements.
Provide 15-ampere, 125-volt grounded type weatherproof duplex
receptacles near air-conditioning or heating equipment.
Provide ground fault interrupters (GFI) protection for each of the
following receptacles in addition to those receptacles required to have GFI protection for
residential occupancies listed in the NEC: receptacles, 125VAC, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere,
within a 3-foot radius of water supply, such as a sink. Ground fault reset shall be
located at the receptacle and not at the panelboard.
6.9.4 Emergency
Lighting
Exit lights shall be provided as required by the NFPA, including
requirements detailed in the NEC, Life Safety Code, and local codes, and shall be supplied
from emergency panelboards.
Emergency lights shall be provided for egress, including exit
routes, exit stairways, exit passageways, large open areas such as assembly areas,
cafeterias, and open-plan office spaces where the exit is normally through the major
portion of these areas.
Mechanical/electrical equipment rooms and vaults, emergency
generator rooms, elevator machine rooms and pits, guard rooms, etc. shall also be provided
with emergency lights with a minimum if one foot candle illumination.
Emergency lights shall be supplied from emergency panelboards
without switch control. Emergency lighting shall be rapid starting; fluorescent lamps or
tubes shall light from cold start within five seconds.
6.10 EMERGENCY
POWER
6.10.1 General
Keep requirements for emergency power to an absolute minimum.
Facility location will provide detailed data describing their minimum emergency power
needs, equipment heat generation, and equipment requiring uninterruptible precise power.
6.10.2 Applications
Emergency power shall be provided for the following:
A. Elevators which require the use of
generators.
B. Critical load requirements, e.g.,
research and storage of research activities.
C. Equipment that must operate without
interruption, e.g., laboratory equipment.
D. Fire protection or other safety
equipment requiring power in case of interruption of normal power.
6.10.3 Emergency
Power Sources
Building size and emergency loads and life-cycle costs shall be
used to determine if a battery or generator system, or a combination of them, is the most
economical emergency power source. Batteries and static inverter shall be considered when
load does not exceed 20 kVA, provided elevators are not served by them. A single generator
shall be provided in each building; where feasible, use a single generating plant for
multiple buildings in a complex.
Connection to two separate primary sources via appropriate
transformers or utility network system may be used in lieu of a generator.
6.10.4 Loads
A. If elevators require emergency power,
loads shall depend on the number of elevators as follows:
1) Six elevators
or less, the load of one elevator. (Note: Provide feeder connections and other facilities
to operate one elevator continuously, while remaining elevators are operated one at a
time.)
2) More than six
elevators, the load of two elevators. (Note: Provide connections to operate one elevator
at a time.)
B. Equipment loads shall consist of power
required for equipment that must operate continuously and that of the emergency light not
included in emergency system loads.
C. Emergency system loads shall consist of
lights and equipment served by emergency panelboards.
1) Fire alarm
system, fire pumps, security alarm systems, etc.
2) Stairway and
escalator lighting.
3) Corridor
lighting.
4) Exit and
emergency lights in essential machine rooms and guard offices, etc.
5) Emergency
receptacles in telephone equipment closets.
6) Equipment, such
as communication systems and automatic data processing systems, where an interruption
might cause a hazard or other serious problems.
7) Pumps to
prevent flooding that might damage buildings or contents, and other essential pumps.
8) Essential
heating equipment in cold climates.
9) Mechanical HVAC
control systems.
10) Emergency
loads for generator auxiliary equipment, including:
11) Damper motors,
supply and exhaust fans, radiator fans (remotely mounted radiator only), and generator
room ventilation and controls.
12) Fuel oil
transfer pumps.
13) Battery
chargers.
14) Generator
alarms.
15) Additional
motors not driven by the generator engine.
6.10.5 Uninterruptible
Power Requirements
When certain equipment cannot tolerate a short break or minor
variation (voltage, frequency, or wave form) in the power supply, special equipment
necessary for uninterruptible power shall be provided. Where a generator is provided, it
shall supply emergency power to the uninterruptible power system.
6.10.6 Generators
Emergency generator capacity shall be adequate to serve the
connected emergency loads. Inrush current of the largest group of motors, automatically
started simultaneously, shall be considered. The initial voltage dip shall not exceed 20
percent.
Where an emergency generator must be automatically started and
loaded, the oil supply for the prime mover shall be kept to at least 75 percent of its
optimum operating temperature, and a separate electric pump shall maintain a positive
continuous flow of lubricant to all bearings.
Diesel engines shall be used to drive emergency generators. Where
gas is available, gas turbines may be used.
Emergency generators shall be installed in a separate room with at
least one exterior wall. The room shall be provided with a fire-resistive enclosure. Noise
and vibration and their effect on surrounding rooms shall be considered in selecting the
location. Walls of generator rooms shall be constructed of materials to prevent
transmission of objectionable levels of sound and vibration. Room shall be provided with
adequate ventilation and a combustion air supply. A motor-operated louver damper shall be
provided on engine radiator air discharge. Air shall be so discharged that it will not
re-enter the room. The room shall be provided with adequate access for servicing or
replacing equipment. Means shall be provided to heat equipment room to 60 oF
during idle periods, unless the generator is equipped with crankcase heaters for cold
starting. Lifting eyes or chain hoist monorails shall be provided over separate components
exceeding 50 pounds in weight. Headroom shall be provided to operate lifting devices.
Engine water cooling system shall be either remote or
engine-mounted, so arrangedthat pressure on the head of the engine block will not exceed
six psig. Where remote-mounted radiators create static pressure in excess of six psig,
provide a separate pump, receiver tank and piping to the radiator to prevent rupturing
each gasket by excessive pressure.
The generator fuel storage tank shall have fuel capacity for a
minimum of five days continuous generator operations at a full load. However, larger
capacity shall be justified, depending on the record of electric outages and fuel
availability.
Engine exhaust pipe shall be extended to the exterior of the
building as directly as possible, to prevent exhaust discharge from polluting the
building. The exhaust system shall be designed in such a manner that the back pressure to
the engine will, in no case, exceed 20 inches water gauge. Engine exhaust mufflers
(silencers) shall be provided for each engine-generator set to ensure acceptable noise
levels.
6.10.7 Total
Energy Systems
The possibility of having a total energy system, where an engine
generator or group of engine generators either supplies all or part of the electric power,
heating, hot water, and air-conditioning needs for a building, shall be considered. In
conjunction with the mechanical engineer, evaluate the feasibility of such a system to
meet prescribed energy consumption goals for new buildings.
6.11 ILLUMINATION
6.11.1 Scope
This section outlines the requirements for illumination of ARS
buildings, but is not intended to cover all conditions. Where there are unusual problems
or conditions, special studies shall be necessary to establish what will be appropriate
and economical to install, maintain, and operate.
6.11.2 Lighting
Systems
Lighting systems shall be designed with fluorescent lighting
fixtures and lighting equipment utilizing energy saving rapid-start, cool-white or
warm-white lamps. Ballasts shall be energy efficient, and shall meet UL Class P
requirements, equipped with built-in automatic reset thermal protectors. Ballasts shall
have a sound rating.
Lighting systems shall be coordinated with building design of
aesthetic and decorative effects within the limits of visibility, visual comfort,
economics and energy conservation.
Lighting calculations shall adhere to the established procedures
of the IES LightingHandbook and IES recommended practices.
For large buildings, a comprehensive lighting study shall be
required from an economic viewpoint to aid the selection. When studying alternatives,
consider initial investment, life span of the installation, energy expense, cost of
replacing lamps, and cleaning cost.
The following methods of energy conservation shall be considered:
switching flexibility; time or photoelectric control; use of high efficiency lighting
fixtures and systems; provision of ceiling construction and wiring methods which easily
accommodate luminaire relocation; use of building automation systems for switching lights.
6.11.3 Luminaires
Particular effort shall be made to reduce the number of luminaire
types in a facility, building, or project, so that the number of spare part replacements
required for maintenance shall be kept to an absolute minimum.
6.11.4 Maintenance
Ease of servicing luminaires must be considered in the design
process. For lighting fixtures installed in areas where it is difficult and hazardous to
relamp fixtures when using ladders, e.g., ceiling fixtures in stairwells, consider using
open bottom fixture enclosures that provide access for relamping with a lamp changer.
6.11.5 Grounding
Electrical distribution systems shall be provided with grounded
neutral connection. Each voltage level shall be grounded independently. Each voltage
grounding point shall be located at the power source. Low voltage systems shall be solidly
grounded.
6.11.6 Switches
Local light switch control shall be provided for individual rooms
with fixed partitions. Four-lamp fixtures may be double switched to provide two levels of
illumination. Office lighting shall be controlled by switches mounted on permanent
partitions and columns (off center line). Switches in relocatable partitions shall be
avoided wherever possible. Local switching shall be provided to insure maximum
flexibility. Corridor lighting shall be controlled by switch located near the elevator
core or by a remote control system. If a building automation system (BAS) is available, it
shall be used for switching of lights.
6.11.7 Exterior
Lighting
Parking areas, exterior traffic lanes, and pathways to buildings
shall be illuminated with luminaires designed for use with high-pressure sodium lamps
providing illumination levels shown in IES standards.
6.12 SPECIAL
EQUIPMENT
6.12.1 Computer
Room Installations
A. Location. Computer rooms shall be
located in expandable interior areas to avoid condensation and sun load problems.
B. Electrical Loads:
1) Lighting.
Fluorescent 50 foot-candles not exceeding 1.4 watts per square foot.
2) Computer
Equipment. Approximately 30 to 40 watts per square foot.
3) Air-Conditioning.
Approximately 15 to 20 watts per square foot based on floor-mounted packaged units.
4) Future
Expansion. Allow 25 percent spare capacity for feeders and panelboards.
C. Feeders. Each computer area shall be
provided with an independent feeder to serve anticipated equipment loads. An independent
feeder shall also be provided to serve the air-conditioning system. Each feeder shall have
a minimum of two sources and an automatic transfer means or a single source initially with
provision for adding a second source. The sources may be two different spot network
substations in large buildings or normal power andemergency engine-generator units,
depending on the criticality of the computer operation, type of computer equipment,
reliability of the normal power source, and availability of funds.
D. Panelboards. Computer and
air-conditioning feeders shall terminate in special panelboards within the area.
Panelboards shall be provided with remote control switches, etc. to permit disconnecting
computer and air-conditioning equipment by master switches described in e, below.
E. Local Power Manual Shutdown. A manual
master switch shall be provided at each entrance to the computer area to disconnect power
to computer and air-conditioning equipment, but not lighting. Each switch shall be
enclosed behind a break glass panel which shall be clearly labeled and provided with key
opening for test purposes.
F. Wire Under Raised Floors. Consider the
following factors and requirements:
1) Temperature:
With air-conditioning down to 55 oF.
2) Humidity: Up to
95 percent.
3) Current rating
of branch circuit conductors: Minimum 125 percent of connected load.
4) Raceways:
Extend conduit (magnetic shielding) to weatherproof junction boxes or receptacles. Route
conduits clear of, or under, air-conditioning ducts.
5) Avoid use of
PVC because dense smoke is produced when it is burned. Also, PVC forms hydrochloric acid
(HC1) when combined with water, which may seep into structural concrete and attack
reinforcing rods and other structural steel.
G. Wiring Without Raised Floor. Consider
floor boxes or underfloor duct for power and controls.
H. Fire Protection. Smoke detection,
sprinkler system, or Halon fire extinguishing system shall be installed in accordance with
National Fire Codes.
I. Grounding. Include full-size ground
conductors with feeders from switchboards and with each branch circuit from computer room
panelboard. Ground at least one raised floor support pedestal. Check ground continuity of
metallic raised floor elements. Check HVAC air outlets in floors. If metallic, provide
ground jumpers to continuous metallic grounded flooring or panel-ground buses.
6.12.2 Elevators
A. Feeders. Each isolated elevator and each
group of two elevators shall be provided with an individual feeder. Each group of three or
more elevators shall be provided with not less than two feeders. Where feasible, feeders
serving a group of four or more elevators should originate in different substations.
B. Switchboards. Switchgear assembly,
generally an NEMA Type I, shall be provided where there are two feeders as described
above. The bus shall be divided so that each feeder connects to a separate section serving
half of the load. For each elevator served, the switchgear assembly shall be provided with
a circuit breaker. In addition, provide an automatic transfer switch and feed to
panelboard for signal power, etc., as described below. A transformer shall also be
provided, where necessary, to furnish the required voltage.
C. Circuit Breakers. Each elevator feeder
shall terminate in a separately enclosed wall-mounted circuit breaker.
D. Signal Power. A panelboard fed by the
transfer switch (described above under switchboards) shall be provided for elevators. The
panelboard shall contain circuit breakers to supply power for either signals or group
supervisory control car light. Where freight elevators are equipped with freight type
power-operated hoist way doors, a 3-pole circuit breaker of suitable size shall be
provided to supply power for the doors.
E. Wiring. Wiring shall be provided to the
terminals of controls furnished by the elevator contractor. Where controls are not in the
same rooms as switchgear assemblies with circuit breakers required above, additional
disconnect switches shall be provided per NEC requirements.
F. Receptacles. Not less than one duplex
receptacle shall be provided on each elevator machine room wall. A duplex weatherproof
receptacle and light fixture shall also be provided in each individual elevator pit and in
each section of a multiple-hoist way pit.
G. Emergency Power for Elevators. When
emergency power is provided from a standby engine-generator set, automatic transfer
switches should be provided, and normal feeders shall be utilized to distribute emergency
power. Where use of normal feeders is determined to be impractical for this purpose,
emergency feeders and necessary automatic transfer switches shall be provided. Auxiliary
control contacts shall be provided on each automatic transfer switch, and conductors in
conduit extending to controls in the elevator machine room. Auxiliary contact circuits, in
conjunction with elevator controls, shall function to prevent any elevator from starting
automatically as long as emergency power is being applied to elevators. A selector switch
shall be provided as part of theelevator installation which will permit authorized
personnel to select one or a limited number of elevators at a time for operation on
emergency power to:
1) Release
passengers who may be trapped in a stalled elevator.
2) Provide limited
emergency power to authorized personnel during the power interruption.
3) Elevator Fire
Capture System. This system shall meet ANSI A17.1 code.
6.12.3 Hazardous
Locations
Equipment, material, and devices installed in hazardous locations
and details of their installation shall conform to NEC requirements and other applicable
recommendations of NFPA. Hazardous locations include paint shops, and locations exposed to
flammable liquids and gases and combustible dust and fibers, as defined by the NEC Article
500. Requirements of local agencies having jurisdiction over the completed project shall
also be met.
6.12.4 Lightning
Protection
All metal flagpoles and metal stacks either attached to buildings
or free standing shall be grounded.
All facilities having a lightning risk assessment index (R)
greater than or equal to three determined in accordance with NFPA-78 shall have complete
lightning protection systems included in their design. A complete lightning protection
system is a system of air terminals, conductors, ground terminals, interconnecting
conductors, arresters, and other connectors or fittings required to complete the system.
Facilities having R values less than three shall be evaluated by
the design A-E in conjunction with the project EPM with respect to safety, research
program, and economic factors to determine the extent of lightning protection required.
6.13 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
AND SIGNALING SYSTEMS
6.13.1 Telephone
Systems
A. General.
1) Telecommunications
distribution facilities shall be integrated early on into the physical construction design
plans. The Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) will install, own, and maintain all cable, wiring,
and associated terminating hardware (known as the DeMarc) required to provide access to
the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). The DeMarc is the point of entry into the
facility, which is provided by the LEC by means of underground or overhead cabling (known
as outside plant). The inside cables which begin at the DeMarc is a construction design
element identified in this and is not provided by the LEC, and include:
a) Conduit
b) Raceways
c) Equipment
space
d) Other
facilities that are part of the building structure itself.
2) Telecommunications
cabling throughout the building should be at a minimum of Category 5E cabling for both
voice/data and video. When the building is at a point for telecommunications cabling the
current certified technology should be used. In all cases patch panels should be used
throughout the telecommunications room and closets to allow for easy cross connections.
B. Service Entrance and Local Telephone
Terminations. Telecommunication distribution designs shall fully support LEC facility
entrance and termination points within the structure. Additionally, LEC service entrance
facilities shall include the provisions as to: the path these facilities follow along
governmental property; their entrance point to the building; and their termination point.
Discussions with the LEC shall determine, early on, the use of: underground entrances;
buried entrances; or aerial entrances. As is the custom of the building owner to provide
for the LEC the conduit from the main terminal location or building entrance location to
the property line, pole, or manhole, provisions shall be incorporated.
1) Terminating
Conduit Inside a Building. Design conduits entering from "below grade" point
shall extend 4 inches above the finished floor. Designconduits entering from a ceiling
height shall terminate 4 inches below the finished ceiling.
2) Bonding and
Grounding. Bonding and grounding of the telecommunications distribution design shall
follow Articles 250 and 800 of the NEC covering general requirements for grounding,
bonding, and protecting electrical and communications circuits.
C. Terminating Space for Entrance
Facilities. Building space shall be set aside for the termination of entrance facilities
and shall provide for: electrically protected; secure; and adequate spacing requirements
to meet the building's cable distribution system. Space provided for this purpose
therefore shall be: near or at the point where facilities enter the building; be well
lighted, providing for a minimum lighting of 30 foot candles, at floor level;
environmentally clean; a provided multiple 15 amp duplex-grounded outlets for testing and
maintenance; equipped with 3/4-inch fire retardant plywood, securely fastened to
supporting walls; and provided access to an approved grounding connection.
D. Equipment Room. Equipment rooms shall be
considered distinct from the building entrance facilities insofar as the equipment rooms
shall provide for more stringent environmental requirements, and shall house the major
components of the building telecommunications system. Three basic system types shall be
considered with regard to the building design considerations: central office-based service
provided by the LEC, Key Telephone service; and PBX service. In the case of central
office-based service, dedicated space will be required to house some equipment, but not as
much space required to house Key telephone systems and PBX equipment. Additionally, the
larger and more complex the system, the more space shall be made available. (Note:
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A recommends a minimum Telecommunications Room (TR) size of 3.0 m x 2.1 m
(10ft x 7ft). The size of 3 m x 2.4 m (10 ft x 8 ft) will allow a center rack
configuration)
1) Environmental
Considerations. Environmental requirements shall consider telephone switching system
requirements to include: operating temperatures ranging from 32 oF to 100 oF;
relative humidity ranging from zero to 55 percent; and heat dissipation ranges from 750
BTUs per hour to 5000 BTUs per hour per cabinet.
2) Battery
Requirements. Consideration shall be given for UPS requirements, as necessary. Battery
floor loading requirements shall vary, depending upon the occupant's requirements, and can
be as low as 100 pounds per square foot to as high as 600 pounds per square foot. PBX UPS
shall be governed by NEC, Articles 480 and 503-14, dealing with code requirements for
storage batteries and their associated charging equipment. (Local codes may place more
rigorous requirements onstorage battery installations.)
3) Lighting
Requirements. Lighting fixtures shall not be placed where they will be above the equipment
cabinets, the termination frames, or other free standing equipment. Equipment space shall
have lighting that provides a uniform light intensity of 30 LM/square foot when taken at
floor level.
4) Electrical
Requirements. Manufacturer specifications shall guide the basic telephone system(s)
electrical requirement. Additionally, PBX installations shall require specialized bonding
and grounding of equipment cabinets.
5) Distribution
Cable Termination Requirements. Space requirements for distribution cable shall allow for
wall mounted terminal fields, free standing frames, or both. For wall mounted terminal
field applications, a 3-foot clear work space shall be provided across the entire field.
6) Structural
Requirements. Walls of the equipment rooms shall extend from the finished floor to ceiling
height and be finished by painting with a minimum two coats of fire retardant paint.
Equipment room flooring shall be finished to keep dust to a minimum. Equipment room floor
loading requirements shall support equipment cabinets between 50 pounds per square foot to
200 pounds per square foot. Additionally, a minimum ceiling height of 8 feet, 6 inches
shall be provided to allow for the adequate clearance of equipment frames for cables and
suspended racks.
E. Telephone Closets. Three types of floor
closets shall be considered in design specifications. Types shall vary as to the size of
the building; number of floors; occupancy characteristics; and telecommunications services
to be used. Telephone Closets should be stacked above each other for design and cable
flexibility.
1) Doorways shall
be designed with a minimum measurement of 3 feet wide by 6 feet, 8 inches high.
Measurements shall be exclusive of a door sill or center post. Doors shall be hinged to
either open outward, slide side-to-side, or be removable.
2) Floor closets
shall be located in areas above the threat of flooding; provided a No. 6 AWG wire from an
approved floor ground; and be provided lighting equivalent to a minimum of 30 foot candles
measured at floor level. Closets may vary in size depending on their function; however, no
closet shall be less than to read 0.6 m deep x 2.6 m wide (2 ft deep x 8.5 ft wide).
3) All closets
shall be lined with a minimum of 3/8 inch thick 8 feet (height)plywood, fastened to the
wall framing members; have the plywood painted with fire-resistant paint; and whenever
possible, be located on wall space for termination on one continuous wall.
a) Riser
Closets. Riser closets shall be used in low, wide buildings where the riser cable is run
horizontally, or to provide distribution points on each floor of a multistory building.
Riser sleeves/slots shall be provided with a minimum 4-inch diameter; be located on the
immediate left side of the closet; be provided 110 VAC duplex power outlets; be fitted
with a sufficient number of risers sleeves to accommodate the anticipated needs of the
occupant; and be provided lighting equivalent to a minimum of 30 foot candles measured at
floor level.
b) Apparatus
Closets. Apparatus closets shall provide cross-connect fields for station cables and tie
cables to satellite closets, or to house key system controllers and other common equipment
that requires commercial AC power. Apparatus closets shall be constructed with a minimum
depth of 24 inches, and provide for a minimum of one 110 VAC duplex power outlet which is
both separately fused and provides a 20 amp, 3-wire, grounded outlet. (Riser and apparatus
closets may be combined.)
c) Satellite
Closets. Satellite closets shall provide solely supplemental distribution points for
station cables, and shall not provide for key equipment or riser cable distribution.
Satellite closets shall be provided with a minimum depth of 24 inches.
F. Conduits. A complete conduit system
shall be indicated on the drawings, with routing of main conduits, sizes and locations of
pull boxes, and method of termination shown. Minimum conduit size for telephone outlets
shall be 1 inch, except that 3/4-inch conduit may be used in buildings having less than
10,000 net square feet of general office space, and for public telephones, telephones in
kitchens, snack bars, shops, elevator machine rooms, and electrical or mechanical
equipment spaces of similar character. Special isolation and sealing of main panels,
conduits, and main distribution lines are required in contained laboratory and animal
space. See Chapters 9 and 10.
G. Telephone Rooms. Telephone rooms shall
be considered in design specifications. Room size shall vary as to size of building;
number of floors; occupancy characteristics; and telecommunication services to be used.
Telephone equipment rooms are considered to be distinct from telecommunications closets
because of the nature or complexity of the equipment they contain. Any or all of the
functions of a telecommunication closet may be alternatively provided by a telephone
equipment room.
Design of a telephone equipment room shall
be in accordance with the requirements of the Electronics Industry Association (EIA);
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and BICSI specification EIA/TIA-569.
Telephone rooms may be immediately
adjacent to or combined with space identified for LEC service entrance and/or terminating
facilities. Referenced standards (EIA/TIA-569) identify minimum requirements for
square-footage, lighting, atmospheric controls and AC power based upon type and quantity
of equipment to be installed.
6.13.2 Fire
Alarm Systems
A. Location of Control Console. The control
console shall be installed in the engineer's office, and a remote graphic annunciator
shall be installed in the lobby within view of, and easily accessible to, outside fire
fighting personnel. In buildings where 24-hour guard service is provided, the control
console may be located in the guard's office with remote indicator in the engineer's
office.
B. General Alarm Bells. Where bells are
used, they shall be located so that they can be heard in every room. Where partitions
prevent distribution of sound, additional bells shall be provided. An alarm bell shall be
located above each fire alarm station and at such locations as may be required to assure
full coverage.
C. Power Supply. Power to supply fire alarm
systems shall be taken from the building service on the supply side of the main service
switch. Where the building is supplied by primary service, the fire alarm power supply
shall be taken from the emergency lighting panelboard.
6.13.3 Public
Address Systems
Conduit systems to accommodate the public address system equipment
shall be provided in each auditorium.
Appendix
6A: Electrical Design Submission Requirements
6A-1. 15 Percent Electrical Design (Concepts)
Submittal
A. Drawings
1) Plans showing
equipment spaces for all electrical, telecommunication, andsecurity equipment to include:
panels; switchboards; transformers; UPS; and generators, etc.
B. Narrative
1) Description of
at least three potential electrical systems.
2) Description of
the proposed telecommunication/signaling and security systems.
3) Code compliance
statement.
6A-2. 35 Percent Electrical Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis
1) Listing of
applicable codes and code compliance statement.
2) Lighting
calculations
3) Load
calculations
4) Life cycle cost
analysis of luminaire/lamp system and associated controls
5) Description of
electrical, telecommunication, fire alarm, and security systems to include:
a) Description
of alternative power distribution schemes with recommendations. Include the source of
power, potential for on-site generation, most economical voltage and primary versus
secondary metering. Address special power and reliability requirements, including
emergency power and UPS systems.
b) Proposed
lighting systems. Discuss typical lighting system features, including fixture type,
layout, and type of controls. Discuss exterior lighting scheme.
c) Interface
with Building Automation System. Also, methods proposed for energy conservation and
integration with Building Automation System.
d) Description
of each proposed signal system.
e) Description
of proposed security systems' features and intended mode of operation. Proposed zone
schedule. Proposed card access controls, CCTV assessment and intrusion protection system,
if applicable.
f) Proposed
Telecommunications Infrastructure. Systems proposed for infrastructure and cabling to
accommodate the communications systems. These must be designed and provided in compliance
with EIA/ TIA Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards.
6) Responses to the
15 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Site plan
showing site distribution for power and communications, proposed service entrance and
location of transformers, generators, and vaults, etc.
2) Floor plans
showing: major electrical distribution scheme and locations of electrical closets; major
routing of communications system, communications equipment rooms and closets; and plan
layouts of electrical rooms showing locations of major equipment.
3) Single line
diagrams of the building power distribution system and other signal system including
telephones, security, public address, and others.
4) Security system
site plan showing proposed locations for CCTV, duress alarm sensors, and access controls
for parking lots. If the system is not extensive, these locations may be shown on the
electrical site plan.
5) Security system
floor plans. Proposed locations for access controls, intrusion detection devices, CCTV and
local panels.
7) List of
specifications sections to be used.
6A-3. 50 Percent Electrical Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis
1) Revisions from
the 35 percent submittal.
2) Narrative
description of electrical, telecommunication, and security systems.
3) Illumination
level calculations.
4) Short circuit
calculations.
5) Voltage drop
calculations.
6) Over current
coordination study.
7) Generator
calculations. Include starter loads.
8) Preliminary
equipment selections for major equipment (switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers,
panelboards and unit substations, etc.)
9) Responses to the
35 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications.
1) Floor plans.
Show lighting, power distribution and communications raceway distribution and locations of
fire alarm and annunciator panels.
2) Marked-up
specifications.
3) Preliminary
schedules
4) Single-line
diagrams of primary and secondary power distribution. Include normal power, emergency
power and UPS.
5) Single-line
diagrams of fire alarm system.
6) Single-line
diagrams of telecommunications system.
7) Circuit layouts
of lighting control system.
8) Site plans.
Indicate service locations, manholes, ductbanks and site lighting.
9) Layouts of
electrical equipment spaces. Show all electrical equipment. Include elevations of
substation transformers and disconnect switches.
10) Grounding
diagrams.
11) Complete
phasing plans (if required) for additions and alterations.
12) A security
systems site plan. Final locations of all security devices and conduit runs.
13) Security system
floor plans. Layouts of all security systems.
6A-4. 95 Percent Electrical Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis.
1) Any revisions
from the 50 percent submittal.
2) Narrative
description of electrical, telecommunication, and security systems.
3) Final equipment
selections showing two manufacturers
4) Responses to the
50 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Essentially
complete drawings and specifications with only minor coordination and technical issues to
be resolved.
6A-5. 100 Percent Electrical Design Submittal
A. Design Analysis.
1) Complete design
analysis incorporating the final calculations, narrative, equipment selections, review
comments etc.
2) Responses to the
95 percent Review Comments
B. Drawings and Specifications
1) Complete drawing
and specification package suitable to "Issue for Construction."
Appendix
6B: Electrical Design Coordination Checklist
6B-1. General
A. Interference between major
conduit and structural framing members coordinated.
B. Adequate clearances to install and
service electrical equipment.
C. Light fixture locations and types
coordinated with architectural drawings and interior design.
D. Screens for exterior generators and
transformers coordinated with architectural drawings.
E. Penetrations through rated
walls/floor/roof assemblies detailed and specified.
F. Normal or emergency power supplied for
all mechanical and fire safety equipment.
G. Supports and bracing for major conduits
and equipment coordinated with structural drawings.
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Purpose
and Objective
A safe and healthy work environment is the crucial objective in
the design of agency facilities. The requirements listed in this Chapter are the minimum
agency requirements to meet this objective. Unless specific reference is made otherwise,
all codes and standards cited in this chapter shall be the latest editions. Both NFPA Life
Safety Codes and model building codes permit equivalency concepts.
All deviations from this document and any equivalency concepts
proposed for use, must be identified by the A-E and submitted to the Government for
approval no later than the 35 percent design stage. Submission shall be made through the
Engineering Project Manager (EPM) for Facilities Division (FD) projects, or Area Office
Engineer (AOE) for Area projects. The request must state the deviation/equivalency concept
proposed, reasons for the request, and supporting rationale. The EPM or AOE will
coordinate the request with the appropriate office and provide a response to the A-E.
7.1.2 Definition
of Laboratory
A laboratory is defined as a building space, room or operation
used for testing, analysis, research, instruction, or similar activities. An area,
exclusive of maintenance shops, is considered a laboratory if any of the following exist.
A. Fume hood/biosafety cabinets or other
primary barriers.
B. Incidental use or storage of chemicals
with any of the following properties: flammable, combustible, explosive, water sensitive,
caustic, corrosive, high or unknown toxicity, carcinogen.
C. Biohazardous material.
D. Grinding operations (excluding metal).
E. Radioactive material/ionizing radiation
emanating equipment.
7.1.3 Codes
and Special Requirements
A. Requirements relating to safety and
health in the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) regulations, American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists (ACGIH) Industrial Ventilation Manual, Standards of the American Society of
Heating, Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE), ARS safety and health policy, and
local building and fire codes must be met as a minimum to achieve a safe and healthy work
environment. Where a conflict arises, the most stringent requirement shall govern.
B. Department of Labor Standards. The
project shall be designed to comply with the latest versions of the applicable OSHA
Standards (29 CFR Part 1910) and Safety and Health Regulations for Construction (29 CFR
Part 1926) as promulgated by the Department of Labor.
C. National Fire Protection Association
Codes. The project shall be designed to comply with the most current edition of the
National Fire Code, as promulgated by the NFPA.
D. U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services Biosafety Guidelines. The project design shall be in compliance with the latest
revision of the applicable Biosafety Guidelines (promulgated by the Centers for Disease
Control, and National Institutes of Health, NIH) applicable to the level and nature of the
project research activities. (Specific guidance for biohazard containment design can be
found in CHAPTER 9.)
E. USDA. Radiation Safetv Staff. The
project shall be designed to comply with the latest Nuclear Regulatory Commission
regulations (contained in 10 CFR 20), ACGIH, and license conditions where appropriate.
F. Laboratory Chemical Fume Hoods
Standards. The project shall be designed to comply with the latest revision of the ACGIH,
as well as specific requirements of this CHAPTER.
G. American National Standards Institute.
The drawings and specifications for each project shall show and require safety and health
construction features and practices which conform to the most current ANSI Standards noted
in the ANSI Safety and Health Index, Publication 5P8L-PC20M1085.
H. Model Building Codes. The project shall
be designed in accordance with the prevailing Model Building Codes (UBC, BOCA, SBC, IBC)
enacted in the project area.
7.2 ELEMENTS
OF DESIGN
7.2.1 HVAC
System
The HVAC system shall be designed with at least the following
minimum requirements: (Where a conflict arises, the most stringent requirement shall
govern.)
A. Separate HVAC systems shall be provided
for laboratory areas, animal holding areas, and non laboratory administrative areas.
B. Ventilation requirements for electrical
shops, photography laboratories, and other special use areas shall be as prescribed in the
applicable ASHRAE Standards.
C. A minimum of 15 air changes/hour is
required for animal facilities including independent temperature and humidity controls.
Recirculation of exhaust air from animal facilities is prohibited. (Refer to Chapter 10
for guidance in the design of animal research and care facilities.)
D. A minimum of 8 air changes/hour is
required in laboratories and recirculation of exhaust air from laboratories is prohibited.
E. All other areas shall be provided with
an adequate level of fresh air in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62, Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
F. HVAC systems must not employ ozone
depleting substances. This includes new construction as well as renovation of existing
systems
7.2.2 Laboratory
Ventilation
The provisions of NFPA 45, ASHRAE, and ACGIH for ventilation and
fume hoods shall be strictly adhered to. Where a conflict arises, the most stringent
requirement shall govern. (For design of biohazard containment facility, refer to Chapter
9.)
A. Except for certain biocontainment
applications, the air pressure must be negative relative to the corridors or other common
use spaces. Hallways and corridors shall not be used as return air plenums, and louvers
will not be permitted in fire rated doors. (Refer to Chapter 9 for Biohazard Containment
Design.)
B. All exhaust air shall be ducted.
Interstitial space shall not be used as a plenum to exhaust laboratory areas.
C. Recirculation of laboratory air is
prohibited.
D. Supply air diffusers shall be placed so
as not to interfere with the function of fume hoods. Supply air diffusers and exhaust
inlets shall be placed so that the room is swept by the air with short circuits being
avoided. (Refer to ASHRAE for additional information.)
7.2.3 Fume
Hood Requirements
All laboratory chemical fume hoods and exhaust systems shall
comply with ACGIH guidelines as well as the guidelines presented in this Chapter. Surfaces
must be durable and easily cleanable. Service outlets shall be located so that the
operator will not have to reach into the hazard zone to make connections. Variable Air
Volume (VAV) and Bypass hoods shall be used in new construction and renovation. (Refer to
Chapter 9 for biohazard containment design.)
A. Face velocities shall be 400-600 mm/s
(80-120 fpm).
B. Stack heights shall be determined by the
height of the building (building envelopes), proximity to other buildings, local
topography, prevailing winds, and weather conditions. The minimum stack height shall be 3
m (10 ft.) from the plane of the roof. The minimum exhaust velocity shall be 15 m/s (3000
fpm) at the discharge point of the exhaust stack. The A-E shall verify via modeling that
the 10-foot minimum height requirement is adequate.
C. Aesthetic objections to high stack
heights shall be overcome with architectural treatment. An exhaust tower or a cluster
(bundle) of exhaust stacks can be made an element of the building and is an acceptable
method of achieving this. The bundling of exhaust stacks has the added advantage of
creating a plume of exhausted gases which is less readily deflected from upward vertical
flow by wind gusts. The use of cone-style weather caps is prohibited.
D. Exhaust stacks and air intake inlets
shall be located at appropriate distances from each other in order to provide proper
dilution and no recirculation of exhausted air. (See ASHRAE Standard for additional
guidance.)
E. Hood locations must be away from doors,
windows, and occupant traffic. Where fume hoods or biosafety cabinets are placed opposite
one another, the design shall take into consideration egress and aerodynamic
considerations.
F. Manufacturer Certification. The
laboratory hood manufacturer shall provide certification that the unit performs
satisfactorily under the condition required by the design documents. ACGIH specifications
and procedures for certifying aerodynamic performance of installed fume hoods must be
clearly defined in the project specifications.
7.2.4 Fume
Hood Exhaust Requirements
Fume hoods will have individual exhausts or up to 8 fume hoods can
be manifolded provided a redundant fan for manifolded systems is provided. Fume hoods
manifolded shall be analyzed for compatibility. Manifolding of more than 8 fumehoods will
require a waiver . See section 7.1.1 for procedures to document a deviation request.
Fume hoods shall be designed to operate on a 24-hour basis. Night
set back of fume hood exhaust systems (reduction in output) may be considered to a minimum
of 50 percent of occupied mode volume. Where chemical storage cabinets are power
ventilated, the laboratory HVAC system volume of air flow can be reduced, or "set
back," during those hours when the laboratory is not occupied.
Fans must be installed so that all ducts within the building are
maintained under negative pressure. Where fans are located in fan rooms, the fan rooms
shall be kept under negative pressure to the rest of the building. Refer also to the
latest NFPA 45.
7.2.5 Radioisotope
Fume Hood
All laboratory fume hoods for radioisotope work shall be designed
in compliance with ACGIH; all bench top, sink, and floor material must be durable and
easily cleanable (coved corners and joints); all service outlets shall be located so that
the operator will not have to reach into the hazardous zone to make connections; and the
appropriate filters shall be included.
7.2.6 Perchloric
Acid Hoods
Perchloric acid hoods shall meet the criteria identified in NFPA
45 and ACGIH. If perchloric acid hoods are not required in accordance with the POR for
current research needs, but could be required in the future, as determined by the
project's Research Program Representative, the A-E shall incorporate into the design
package, as a minimum, one rough-in (i.e., ductwork and plumbing hookup).
7.2.7 Laminar
Flow Hoods
Only vertical laminar flow biological cabinets shall be used in
agency facilities. Horizontal laminar flow cabinets shall not be installed.
7.2.8 General
Purpose Hoods
Hoods for all other purposes shall be designed in accordance with
ACGIH
7.2.9 Incinerators
Incinerators shall meet or exceed all State, local, Environmental
Protection Agency and National Fire Code requirements. It is crucial that incinerators for
radioactive materials shall meet or exceed Nuclear Regulatory Commission and all
applicable codes and/or requirements such as 40 CFR 60. Permitting process/requirements
will be identified during the design process by the design A-E.
7.2.10 Chemical
Storage
Laboratories which use flammable/combustible materials and
chemicals shall provide adequate storage in a segregated, vented storage cabinet in
accordance with NFPA 30 and NFPA 45.
A. In each laboratory where corrosive
materials will be used, there shall be a segregated corrosive material storage cabinet.
Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for their intended use.
B. Provisions for storage of carcinogenic
chemicals in each laboratory shall be in accordance with the applicable OSHA standards in
29 CFR Part 1910.
C. Compressed gases shall be manifolded at
a central location closest to those laboratories they serve. Efforts shall be taken to
avoid extraneous use of gas cylinders in laboratories.
D. The design of any area for the express
purpose of storage of compressed gases and flammable combustible materials shall comply
with OSHA Standards in 29 CFR 1910, Subparagraph H, Hazardous Materials; NFPA 30; NFPA 45,
and Compressed Gas Association, Pamphlet P-1.
Note: The design of separate chemical storage is an issue that
should be considered during the POR/concept design. The intention is to not mandate the
use of separate chemical storage rooms.
7.2.11 Additional
Exits
Each laboratory shall have an additional means of exit remote from
the primary exit. Adjacent laboratories may share this remote exit via a common separation
wall. Mechanical equipment rooms, boiler room, and furnace room shall have an additional
means of exit, remote from the primary exit. The A-E shall provide, as part of the first
submittal, a conceptual layout identifying the means of exits.
7.2.12 Occupancy
Classification
A. Agency structures must be classified in
accordance with the established local building codes of the jurisdiction in which the
structure is to be located. In addition to local building codes, the agency has set the
following additional requirements for all laboratories as previously defined. The POR
developed by the A-E will include a list of all applicable codes and the name and address
of the local code authority. (Refer to NFPA 101, NFPA 41, and 45, for additional
information.)
B. Dead-end pockets in hallways, corridors,
passageways, or courts are discouraged. However, in no case, will any such pocket exceed
code allowances.
C. Travel distances for high hazard areas
(NFPA 101, 5-11.1) and high hazard laboratories (NFPA 45, 2.2, Table 2.2) will not exceed
23 m (75 ft.). Travel distances from all other laboratories shall not exceed 45 m (150
ft.).
D. All laboratories (refer to section 7.1.2
above), shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 45. Laboratory exit corridors will not
be used as "exits" in order to increase travel distances along exit access
routes to exit stairs or ramps. Where stair enclosures are part of a design, it is the
agency's policy to make these stair enclosures the primary protected means of egress from
a building.
E. As part or the first submittal, the
design firm must document coordination with code officials and provide for the agency's
review, a code analysis addressing building classification and requirements.
7.2.13 Emergency
Eye/Face Wash and Shower Station
Each laboratory, chemical storage room, chemical handling room,
pesticide storage, mix and load areas, shall have an emergency eye/face wash and shower in
accordance with ANSI Z358.1 (latest edition), Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.
A. Wall-mounted portable units and
hand-held single-head devices are not acceptable in lieu of stationary dual-head eye
washes.
B. Emergency showers shall be located
within 30 m (100 ft.) or 10 seconds travel time from a potential injury source. Showers
should be installed closer to thepotential injury sources if such sources are highly
corrosive chemicals. Emergency shower stations should provide natural screening where
possible.
C. Eye wash stations may be installed as
integral components with laboratory sinks or the emergency showers, so long as
accessability standards are maintained.
D. Emergency showers and eye/face washes
shall have stay-open actuation valves, to allow operators free use of both hands once the
flow of water has begun. Emergency shower/eye wash station shall be provided with tempered
water. The number of water mixing valves to utilize shall be at the option of the A-E.
E. Each laboratory shall have a floor
drain, co-located with the emergency shower.
7.2.14 Laboratory
Furniture
Laboratory furniture shall be designed such that:
A. It is corrosion resistant;
B. Contamination removal from surfaces is
not difficult;
C. It is arranged so as not to impede
egress in an emergency; and
D. The working surface is free from cracks
and sensible joints.
7.2.15 Asbestos
All work involving asbestos-containing materials shall be
performed in accordance with OSHA standards contained in 29 CFR Part 1910.1001, as
applicable, as well as those Federal and State EPA regulations that pertain to
asbestos-containing material maintenance and abatement.
7.2.16 Fire,
Smoke and Heat Safety
A. Portable Fire Extinguishers. The
appropriate number, types, and locations of fire extinguishers must be provided in
accordance with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire extinguishers." Whenever possible, the
10- pound ABC Multipurpose fire extinguisher shall be provided in a recessed cabinet and
located in the corridors. Halogenated (1211 or 1301) fire extinguishers will not be used.
B. Fire, Heat and Smoke Detection Systems.
All corridors, meeting rooms, and storage rooms will be protected by fire detectors. When
required in other areas by code, automatic fire detectors will be installed. If the
structure cannot be protected by a fire suppression system, a complete automatic fire
detector system is required. Automatic fire detectors shall be located, mounted, tested,
and maintained in accordance with NFPA 72.
C. Fire Suppression Systems. Fire
suppression system shall be designed and installed in accordance with Federal, State, or
local codes. It is ARS' policy to install sprinkler systems in all laboratory facilities.
Fire suppression systems must not employ ozone depleting substances. This includes new
construction as well as renovation of existing systems.
D. Fire Alarm Systems. Fire alarm systems
shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72. A manual fire alarm system (at a minimum)
will be installed in a structure if a fire may not, of itself, provide adequate warning to
building occupants.
E. Miscellaneous
1) Standpipes, in
accordance with NFPA 14, will be installed in laboratory buildings of two or more stories
above or below street level.
2) HVAC smoke
control must be used if mandated by NFPA 90A.
3) The locating of
storage and handling of flammable liquids and gases where it would jeopardize egress from
the structure will not be permitted.
7.2.17 Animal
Facilities
Special consideration shall be given to the design of individual
animal rooms. Design must ensure that all research animals are protected to prevent
transmission of diseases between animals and from humans. (Refer to Chapter 10 for
requirements)
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope
This Chapter deals with design requirements for elevators or
vertical transportation systems for Federal buildings.
8.1.2 Codes
and Standards
A. New elevators or vertical transportation
equipment installations shall conform to the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME) Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, A17.1 (herein referred to as the A17.1
Code). Existing elevators or vertical transportation equipment shall be improved as
appropriate to conform to the A17.1 Code. See Chapter 1: Basic Requirements for
complete discussion of codes and other special requirements. The current edition of each
applicable code, in effect at the time of design contract award, shall be used throughout
the project's design and construction.
B. Conflict Between Codes and ARS
Requirements. The code criteria shall be reviewed by the A-E to the degree of
detail necessary to assure that tasks accomplished during the architectural design of a
project meet the code requirements. All deviations from code/ARS requirements and any
equivalency concepts proposed for use must be identified by the A-E and submitted to the
Government through the EPM for approval no later than the 35 percent design stage. The
request must state the deviation/equivalency concept proposed, reasons for the request,
and supporting rationale. The EPM will coordinate the request with the appropriate office
and provide a response to the A-E.
8.1.3 Coordination
The elevator system design shall be coordinated with the
architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical design. On alterations projects, the
A-E shall make such visits to the site as are necessary to ensure coordination with
existing work.
8.2 EQUIPMENT
8.2.1 Passenger
Elevators
A. Classification. Passenger elevators;
combination passenger and freight elevators; special purpose elevators; and shuttle
elevators.
B. Planning. Passenger elevators shall be
located so that the building entrances with heaviest traffic will have adequate elevator
service.
C. Size and Number. The following factors
shall be considered in determining the size and number of passenger elevators required.
D. Cost. The overall annual cost of the
elevator facilities, including amortized cost of the original investment, maintenance,
material, and consumed power.
E. Net Area. This is the floor area of the
building served by the elevators exclusive of the main (street) floor mechanical and
electrical rooms, parking areas, cafeterias, stairways, toilets, corridors, and similar
areas.
F. Population Density. This is the net area
per person. Building populations above the main floor shall be estimated on the basis of
135 sq. ft. net area per person.
G. Maximum Traffic Peak. This is the
maximum percentage of the total population that shall be handled during any five-minute
period. In general, the maximum traffic peak shall be considered as that produced by the
morning filling of the building.
H. Traffic Distribution. Groups of
elevators serving identical floors are required to be furnished at two or more locations
to provide reasonable convenience of use. The elevators shall provide a minimum carrying
capacity of not less than 120 percent of the maximum traffic peak. This factor provides
for the unequal distribution of traffic when elevator groups occur at more than one
location. Calculations based on the above factors shall be submitted as part of the design
concept submission where two or more passenger elevators are required.
I. Capacity, Speed, and Interval. A
capacity and speed shall be selected that will require the least number of passenger
elevators to handle the peak load with an acceptable time interval of dispatch. The
average peak period loading shall be assumed as 80 percent of rated car passenger carrying
capacity based on an average passenger weight of 150 pounds. For office buildings, the
most suitable car capacities are from 3,000 to 4,000 pounds. In some instances, larger
capacities shall be required. Passenger elevators with capacities less than 2,500 pounds
shall not be installed, as they are not suitable for maneuvering awheelchair. For local
service, there is no appreciable saving in time by the use of car speeds exceeding 500
fpm.
For tower office buildings, elevators
shall be arranged in a low-rise group, a high-rise group, and possibly intermediate-rise
group(s), depending on the height of the building. Each group must include enough
elevators to satisfy the requirement for dispatching intervals. Speed shall range from 500
fpm to 2,000 fpm.
Where there is only one elevator in the
public building, it shall have a minimum capacity of 4,000 pounds and shall be classified
as a combination passenger and freight elevator.
Dispatching intervals are classified as
follows: 18 to 23 seconds - excellent; 24 to 29 seconds - good; 30 to 35 seconds - fair;
36 seconds and over - poor. Where there are four or more elevators in a group, the
dispatch interval shall be in the excellent or good range. Where there are fewer than four
elevators in the group, the interval shall be kept to a practical minimum; however, it is
recognized that economics may sometimes require acceptance of an interval classed in the
fair or poor range. For single elevators and two-car group elevators, the interval shall
be much higher, ranging to more than 60 seconds for a single elevator depending on the
speed and number of floors served.
J. Disabled Considerations. Passenger
elevators shall be designed to accommodate individuals with physical disabilities.
Individual markers shall not be accepted. Characters on car operating panels and call
button stations shall be cut into the faceplate as an integral part of faceplate.
K. Combination Passenger and Freight
Elevators. If a separate freight elevator is not provided, requirements for freight
service shall be considered in determining the number and duty of elevators. A combination
passenger and freight elevator must have the size and capacity to accommodate the
anticipated demand, and generally shall be not less than 4,000 pounds in capacity,
preferably larger when hoistway space is available. Door openings shall be not less than 3
feet, 10 inches wide. Combination passenger and freight elevators are not recommended when
freight movement would interfere unduly with passenger service. Consideration shall be
given to increasing cabinet height when elevators are used for combination passenger and
freight.
L. Continuity of Service. When one elevator
normally would meet the requirements in a building where elevator service is essential
(such as office buildings more than four stories high), two shall be installed to ensure
continuity of service.
M. Future Elevators. The possibility of
change in the type of building occupancy and reassignment of building area that would
result in a greater volume of passenger traffic shall be investigated. When possibilities
exist, the building framing shall be arranged to permit future installation of an
additional elevator or escalator equipment to handle future increases in traffic volume.
8.2.2 Freight
Elevators
A. Classification
1) General
Freight. These are provided to handle the common freight requirements of activities in the
building. The material transported by these elevators is distributed throughout the
building.
2) Special Purpose
Freight. These serve the particular requirements of one activity in the building. These
elevators form a part of a planned route for handling a specific type of material.
B. Planning. When planning the location of
freight elevators, the following principles shall be observed:
1) General freight
shall be arranged to discharge into a separate vestibule or service lobby at each floor,
but shall not discharge into primary routes of horizontal circulation such as main
corridors, lobbies, etc.
2) Freight
elevators shall be located convenient to the building loading platform or to other
facilities provided for bringing freight into the building.
3) A freight
elevator shall have a stop at the major mechanical and electrical equipment level(s),
including equipment levels of other elevators.
C. Size and Number
1) Special-Purpose
Freight Elevator. The size and number of special-purpose freight elevators will depend
upon information received from the agency regarding the kind, total load, method of
loading, and movement of freight that must be handled.
2) General Freight
Elevators.
a) The
size of general freight elevators shall be adequate for the movement of essential freight,
including relocatable partitions. The platform size shall be not less than 8 feet wide by
12 feet deep. A larger size, adequate far the intended use, shall be provided wherever
investigation shows that the elevator shall be used to move mechanical equipment, fork
lift trucks, or other materials. Horizontal sliding type doors shall be provided.
b) At
least one general freight elevator shall be provided in office buildings that have a gross
area of 250,000 square feet or more, and have three stories or more above ground. The
installation of a freight elevator shall be made when the conditions of occupancy indicate
that service is needed regardless of the size of the building.
c) The
provision of more than one freight elevator shall be considered in buildings of more than
800,000 gross square feet, when dictated by special known requirements, or by the building
design.
D. Capacity and Speed. Freight elevators
shall have a minimum capacity of 8,000 pounds, and shall be designed for one of the Class
C loadings described in the A17.1 Code. Elevators required to carry loads in excess of
6,000 pounds, or in which heavy trucks shall be used, should have capacities to handle the
maximum required loads. Class Cl loading, where trucks are carried, shall be adequate for
Federal buildings. Freight elevators shall have a car speed in proportion to the number of
floors served.
E. Continuity of Service. If continuity of
service is necessary, two freight elevators shall be installed, even if normal service
demands are handled satisfactorily with one.
8.2.3 Elevator
Hoistways
A. Framing. The hoistway shall be free of
projections. Framing projections which occur shall have guard plates as required by the
A17.1 Code. Structural supports shall be provided at each floor and, where conditions
require, between floors for securing guide rail brackets. Depending on the size and
capacity of elevators, provide either intermediate supports between floors or guide rail
backing, for larger guide rails where the distance between floors or the structural
supports exceeds 14 feet. Provide intermediate supports for elevators with moderately
large platforms, large capacity, or those designed for Class C loading when the floor
heights are less than 14 feet.
Concrete hoistways or specially designed
steel H-column supports for each elevator car guide rail, extending the full height of the
hoist way, are required for heavy duty freight elevators designed for Class C loading or
one-piece loading. Each project shall be checked to ensure that it includes necessary
guide rail supports to conform to the above requirements and to Section 200 of the A17.1
Code. Additional supports for guide rails shall be included as a part of the structural
framing of the building.
B. Enclosures
1) Elevator hoist
way enclosures shall be of fire-resistant construction. The interior face of hoist way
enclosure walls shall have a smooth, flush, light-colored surface, equivalent to
well-pointed smooth face tile or brick, or smooth concrete. Sprayed-on fireproofing shall
not be used in the elevator hoist way and machine rooms.
2) New buildings
and nonbearing hoist way enclosure walls of normal height (14 feet maximum unless
otherwise noted) enclosing floor openings more than 10 square feet in area shall be stable
and have a 2-hour fire rating.
3) For hoist way
enclosure walls of abnormal height, check with the structural engineer for stability and
possible increases in thickness of material.
4) Hoistway
Ventilation. Hoist way ventilation shall be provided for venting smoke and hot gases to
the outside air in accordance with the Basic Building Code, National Building Code,
Standard Building Code, or the Uniform Building Code. (Note: This is rule 100.4 in ASME
A17.1 Code).
8.2.4 Elevator
Pits
A. Depth Requirements. Pit depths should
comply with the A17.1 Code requirements. Freight elevators, which have counterbalancing
vertical sliding doors at the lowest landing, shall have a pit depth of not less than half
the height of the door plus 6 inches to accommodate the lower floor panel.
B. Access (Rule 106.1d, A17.1)
1) Each pit with a
depth between 3 feet and 8 feet shall be provided with a fixed vertical steel access
ladder. The ladder shall be located within reach of the elevator hoist way entrance at the
bottom landing and to clear elevator equipment.
2) Pits 8 feet
deep and over shall be provided with a permanent means of external access, preferably a
stairway and door to each pit. Where a permanent means of access is impractical, a
permanent ladder, accessible from the hoist way entrance at the bottom, shall be provided
in each pit; however, the external access must be very carefully studied before it is
declared impractical.
3) Adjacent pit
spaces shall be separated by a 7-foot high wire mesh partition.
4) Doors to pit
spaces shall be of fire-resistant construction, and shall be provided with self-closing,
self-locking hardware, arranged so that a key is required for entry. The doors shall swing
out, and offer no impedance to exiting.
C. Fire-Resistance Requirements. Where the
elevators in one bank or one group of elevators are located in two separate fire-resistant
hoistways, the pit space for the group of elevators shall be similarly divided into two
fire-resistant units.
8.2.5 Elevator
Machine Rooms
A. Location. The placing of electric
traction elevator machines in basement machine rooms, or in machine rooms adjacent to the
shaft, shall be avoided. This type of installation is not economical, as both first cost
and recurring cost for maintenance and power are higher than overhead machines.
B. Features
1) Machine rooms
in new buildings shall be large enough to install the elevator equipment, including space
for disconnecting means, etc. Allow clearances for control equipment not less than
required by the NEC, and with enough working space between the various items of equipment
for maintenance purposes. In general, provide not less than 3 feet as the absolute minimum
clearance between items of equipment. In new buildings, it shall be possible to remove
major equipment components of one elevator for repair without dismantling components of an
adjacent elevator. In existing buildings, it may not always be feasible to expand
theelevator machine room so as to house the new equipment in accordance with the A17.1
Code.
2) Space shall be
provided in machine rooms for tool cabinets, spare-parts cabinets, and lubricant racks or
cabinets.
3) Elevator
machine rooms shall be of fire-resistant construction. The machine room floor, ceiling,
and walls shall have a smooth surface. Exposed sprayed-on fireproofing shall not be used
in elevator machine rooms and hoist way. Walls, ceilings, and floors shall be painted a
light color.
4) Openings in the
floor for passage of moving ropes, etc. shall have 2-inch-high concrete curbs or extended
metal sleeves.
5) In buildings
where elevator mechanics will be employed, shop space shall be provided. If there is more
than one machine room in the building, this shop space shall be provided in one location
only.
C. Provisions for Removal of Equipment
1) If there is
more than one elevator in a machine room, the freight elevator shall serve the machine
room level. If not, a trap door shall be provided in the machine room floor to allow
lowering of elevator equipment to the top floor served by the elevator. A trolley or hoist
beam able to support the largest item of the elevator equipment shall be provided over the
trap door and over each hoisting machine for removal of equipment.
2) In existing
buildings, where there is only one elevator in the building, provisions shall be made so
that major equipment components can be moved for repairs. Removal to the roof of the
building, and then to the ground, by crane may be necessary.
D. Access: (Rule 101.3, A17.1 Code)
1) Entrance Door.
The elevator machine room door shall be the self-closing, self-locking type provided with
a cylinder lock that requires a key for entry. The door shall swing out and offer no
impedance to exiting.
2) Stairs. Stairs
shall be provided for convenient access to machine rooms in accordance with the A17.1
Code.
E. Noise Control
1) Acoustical
Classification. Machine rooms are classified as Class X space. Machine rooms that are on
the same level with offices or similar spaces shall be provided with partitions of
sufficient sound attenuation to prevent objectionable noises from reaching the occupied
spaces, and shall be located as far as possible from them.
2) Vibration and
Sound Isolation. Geared machines and motor generator sets shall be mounted on vibration
and sound isolating devices.
3) Skylights.
Skylights shall not be installed in elevator rooms.
4) Heating.
Heating shall be provided in elevator machine rooms as required.
5) Ventilation.
Machine rooms shall be provided with ventilation as to limit space temperature rise to 10 oF.
8.2.6 Escalators
A. Planning. When vertical transportation
is required for a large volume of traffic, escalators shall be installed to supplement
elevators. Their use shall be justifiable for buildings with large floor areas, buildings
with entering traffic at two or more levels, and service to special areas such as
cafeterias and auditoriums. Escalators shall not be installed as a substitute for fixed
stairs or as a substitute for elevators. If installed, they shall be in addition to, not
in place of, required means of vertical movement.
B. Location. Escalators shall be located
convenient to building entrances or cafeterias, auditoriums, etc., and shall be located
where they are prominently in view between elevators and building entrances so that a
maximum portion of the total traffic will be diverted to them. It is recommended that
escalators be located in a crisscross arrangement. Where escalators serve three or more
floors, they shall not be installed where the structure depth encroaches on the clearance
of the ceiling height below.
C. Comparison with Elevators. One escalator
provides circulation at any one time in only one direction and only to one additional
floor, while an elevator provides service in both directions to all floors. Most
individuals with physical disabilities cannot safely use an escalator. Two escalators are
needed for two-way traffic, i.e., four escalators are required to serve three floors
fortwo-way traffic. When considering whether to use escalators in a building, the overall
annual cost of providing the required service with elevators shall be compared, and use
most economical arrangement selected.
D. Size and Number
1) Escalators
shall have a width of 32 inches or 48 inches with an angle of inclination of 30 degrees
and tread speed of 90 fpm. The capacity rating shall be 5,000 persons per hour based on a
theoretical maximum loading of 1-1/4 persons per 32-inch tread or 8,000 persons per hour
with two persons per 48-inch tread.
2) The actual
design capacities in persons per hour and in persons per 5 minutes traffic peak to be used
in estimating escalator requirements is as follows
Escalator Width |
Capacity in Persons/Hour | Capacity in Persons/5 Min |
32 inches | 3,000 | 250 |
48 inches | 4,800 | 400 |
3) In determining
the size and number of escalators, passenger elevators shall be considered to ensure
proper quantity of service required to handle maximum peak.
4) When escalators
are provided for special purposes, to serve auditoriums and cafeterias, the number and
size shall be based on estimated peak movement of traffic determined from similar existing
installations.
8.2.7 Dumbwaiters
A. Classification. Floor loading types or
counter loading type.
B. Planning. Dumbwaiters shall be located
convenient to the areas served, preferably in a position where the hoist way construction
will not interfere with space use.
C. Size and Number. Dumbwaiter platform
area and height must be adequate to permit convenient loading and unloading of materials.
The number of dumbwaiters to be installed shall be based on the estimated volume of
material to be handled.
D. Capacity and Speed. The dumbwaiter load
capacity shall be adequate to handle the maximum anticipated car loading. Kitchen and
library dumbwaiters have capacities of 500 pounds. Floor loading type dumbwaiters shall be
designed to carry food carts, book carts, etc. Food-carrying dumbwaiters shall be made of
stainless steel.
E. Types. Dumbwaiters shall be of the
power-operated type.
F. Hoistways
1) Enclosures.
Dumbwaiter hoistway enclosures shall be of fire-resistant construction with a smooth
interior finish.
2) Entrance Doors.
The dumbwaiter hoist way entrance doors shall be of fire-resistant construction and
preferably of divided counterbalanced type. The entrance frames shall be, rolled or
pressed sheet metal with an extended sill on the room side. Stainless steel frames and
door panels shall be used for kitchen dumbwaiters. Doors and frames of sheet steel shall
be factory dumbwaiters. Doors and frames of sheet steel shall be factory primed with
painted finishing coats applied at the site. Dumbwaiter hoist way entrances located with
sills at floor level shall have 1/4-inch thick, nonskid steel plate sills with a
reinforced truckable sill on the top of the lower door section. In some installations,
doors may be power-operated.
3) Size and
Clearance. Hoist way sizes and entrance dimensions shall comply with the A17.1 Code. A
swing type pit access door is desirable for cleaning out the pit for counter loading type
dumbwaiters.
4) Machine Spaces.
Dumbwaiter machine spaces shall be large enough to permit easy access to the equipment for
maintenance purposes. The walls, floor, and ceiling enclosing the machine space shall be
of fire-resistant construction.
5) If a hoist way
tower is needed, it may consist of double sheet steel panels, each with 18-gauge minimum.
It shall be filled with sound deadening and fire-resistant materials.
8.2.8 Wheelchair
Lifts
A. Classification. Vertical wheelchair lift
or inclined wheelchair lift.
1) Planning. Where
ramp or elevator installations for use by individuals with physical disabilities are
impractical, vertical and/or inclined wheelchair lifts shall be considered. The number and
location of such lifts depend on the general architecture of each building, and shall be
determined on an individual project basis.
B. Features. The lift shall consist of a
12-square-foot horizontal platform enclosed by a combination of panels, railings, doors, a
lifting mechanism to raise and lower the platform, and suitable control and safety
devices.
C. Vertical Wheelchair Lift Performance.
Maximum rise shall not exceed 6 feet. Capacity shall be 450 pounds. Maximum speed shall be
30 fpm.
D. Inclined Wheelchair Lift Performance.
Maximum angles shall be 45 degrees. Maximum travel shall not exceed 35 feet (measured on
the incline), and not more than two consecutive floors. Capacity shall be 450 pounds.
E. Restrictions. Lifts shall not be
installed where lobby areas and inclined areas are greatly reduced or where they present a
hazard. Inclined lifts shall not be installed on stairs with low headroom clearance. When
inclined lifts are installed on egress stairs, lifts shall not encroach on the required
units of egress.
8.2.9 Exterior
Power Platforms
A. Planning. Exterior power platforms, for
window washing and for other maintenance, shall be determined on an individual project
basis.
B. Architectural and Structural
Limitations. The provisions of an acceptable powered platform may restrict, to a minor
degree, the freedom that would otherwise be available in the architectural and structural
design of the building.
C. Safety Requirements. Each powered
platform installation shall be designed, installed, inspected, and tested in accordance
with the latest edition of the American National Standards Safety Requirements for Powered
Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance.
D. Mechanical Design Features. Powered
platforms shall be designed to incorporate the following basic safety and operating
features:
1) Roof cars shall
be gravity stable, considering both overturning moment and wind loading, with an adequate
safety factor. This requirement dictates a lightweight working platform and a relatively
heavy roof car. Tiedowns or safety brackets on the roof car shall be considered only as an
additional safeguard to prevent overturnings. Roof car track and wheels shall be designed
to minimize noise which might be annoying to occupants of the building.
2) Working
platforms shall be supported by four wire ropes, equipped with approved means to detect
and prevent over or under tensions in any rope, attached at or near each end of the
platform. Platform working area shall be clear. Support ropes shall be located in front of
surfaces to be washed.
3) Working
platforms shall be steadied against the building face to prevent swaying in gusts of wind,
or when workmen press against the building in the process of washing windows or making
other repairs. Fixed guides are required in the face of the exterior of buildings, 130
feet and over in height, to accomplish this purpose. The working platform shall travel
only in the level position.
4) The equipment
shall be operable by a single worker. It shall not require any standby worker on the roof
car, or elsewhere, while in use. Sometimes two workers may be used on the working platform
to perform the washing or maintenance operation.
5) Operation and
control provisions shall be as nearly fail-safe as practical. Protective devices such as
limit switches shall be provided to minimize the possibility of malfunctions or improper
operation. Operating buttons shall be of the deadman type.
6) The main power
supply outlets for the power platform located on the roof shall be of a type to prevent
hazards to workers during all weather conditions.
7) Telephone
connections shall be provided for help in the event of power failure, control failure, or
similar emergencies. Rescue provisions shall be included to permit manual lowering of the
platform or to facilitate removal of workers trapped on a platform.
E. Coordination. The designer shall
coordinate to ensure that the architectural and structural design will accommodate the
different manufacturers' equipment. Loads imposed by the power-operated platform on the
roof structure, parapet, mullions, exterior walls, or vertical guides shall be considered
in the design. A garage shall be provided on the roof to protect the equipment during
periods of inclement weather. This garage will improve the appearance of the building when
the power-operated platform is not in use, and will facilitate maintenance of the
equipment.
This page will be reserved for Dr. Kiley's Preamble for Chapter 9.
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 Scope
This chapter provides general guidance for the design of
facilities which support research activities with biohazardous materials. Its objective is
to provide, by incorporating special equipment and features in the design of the facility,
the best possible physical containment of these agents. Such a facility is called a
biocontainment facility.
The entire physical containment system for such a facility
supporting agricultural research is unique in that it must function to prevent the spread
of infectious agents to the environment, to other animals or plants, and between research
experiments, as well as to humans.
Each biocontainment facility is unique in design and function, and
only clear, close, and constant communication between the A-E and the responsible ARS
officials during the predesign and design phases will ensure the development of plans and
specifications that can guide the contractor in the construction, testing and
certification of an effective biocontainment facility.
9.1.2 Objectives
The functional objectives of the biological containment facility
are the: 1) protection of employees, contractors, and visitors from injury, illness, or
accident as a result of work activities; 2) protection of experimental studies by
preventing the spread of disease agents from one biocontainment area to another; and 3)
protection of the environment by preventing the escape of disease agents causing any of
the diseases studied at the facility.
9.1.3 Basic
Requirements
The design of the biocontainment facility shall comply with all
codes and standards applicable to the project, and described in other chapters of this
Manual.
All ARS facilities are subject to Section 619 of Title 40 of the
Code of Federal Regulations, which requires all Federal facilities to comply, to the
maximum extent feasible, with all national codes and standards. If, in the course of
developing the design documents for the construction or renovation of a biocontainment
facility, the A-E becomes aware of a required element of the design in apparent conflict
withnational codes and standards, or with any particular requirement of this or any other
chapter of this manual, the A-E shall submit, in writing, a request for a waiver to the
Contracting Officer (CO). The CO will forward the request to the responsible ARS official
for action. The waiver need not be extensive in nature, but it must clearly describe in
detail the apparent conflict and the absolute need for the waiver.
9.1.4 Biohazard
Biohazard is a contraction of the words
biological and hazard. A biohazard is defined as an infectious
agent, or a part thereof, presenting a real or potential risk to humans, animals, or
plants, either directly through infection, or indirectly through disruption of the
environment. In certain regulations these are referred to as infectious substances.
9.1.5 Barriers
(It must always be remembered that physical barriers do not
substitute for good laboratory practice, as described in such sources as the latest
edition of the CDC/NIH publication Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical
Laboratories.)
To establish multiple protective layers (layered approach) to
contain biohazardous materials, the facility shall be designed and constructed with three
levels of barriers to meet the above objectives:
A. Primary Barriers. Usually these are
specialized items of equipment designed and specified for capture or containment of
biological agents. Biological Safety Cabinets and animal cage dump stations are examples
of larger primary barriers. Trunnion centrifuge cups, bioaerosol centrifuges, aerosol
containing blenders, high speed mixers and related devices are examples of smaller primary
barriers.
B.. Secondary Barriers. These are facility
related design features and operational practices that protect the environment external to
the laboratory from exposure to biohazardous materials (from one interior area to another,
or from the interior of the facility to the outside environment). Examples of secondary
barriers include work areas that are separate from public areas, decontamination and hand
washing facilities, special ventilation systems, airlocks, directional airflow through the
use of air pressure differentials, double door autoclaves opening to the exterior , air
gasketed doors (interior and exterior) and administrative controls such as risk
assessment. All personnel practices that are involved in maintaining these systems, or in
minimizing personal contamination and the spread of infectious microorganisms, are also an
integral part of the secondary barrier system, along with personnel practices and good
laboratory housekeeping.
C. Tertiary Barriers. These are systems
that are designed and maintained to minimize or control access to contaminated areas.
These include physical barriers such as the building proper, perimeter fencing, remote
controls and monitoring devices. Administrative controls may also include security
personnel, controlled access for authorized personnel and for visitors and non- security
cleared personnel to be escorted while in a restricted area.
In certain facilities, it might be
desirable for some spaces surrounding the containment area to act as tertiary barriers.
Examples could be: mechanical and utility spaces; interstitial spaces housing ventilation
ductwork and utility piping; and attics and double-walled construction surrounding the
primary containment zone. No research work or housing of animals takes place in these
areas, so they would not be expected to be contaminated. These areas are not considered
containment spaces but, if ventilated, are referred to as containable spaces.
These areas are kept under negative pressure and their exhaust systems are equipped with
HEPA filters. Penetrations into these areas were sealed at the time of construction to
allow decontamination, but these areas are not required to pass a pressure decay test.
Persons leaving these areas are not usually required to shower before leaving the
facility.
9.1.6 Additional
Reading
A. Animal and Plant Health Inspection
Service (APHIS)
1)
Quarantine Facility Guidelines for Microorganisms
2)
Containment Guidelines for Nonindigenous, Phytophagous Arthropods and Their
Parasitoids and Predators
3) Quarantine
Facility Guidelines for the Receipt and Containment of Nonindigenous Arthropod Herbivores,
Parasitoids and Predators
B. Center for Disease Control and
Prevention/ National Institutes of Health (CDC/NIH)
1) Biosafety
in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories, 4th Edition
2) The Guide
for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals (NIH)
C. American Association for the
Accreditation of Laboratory Animal Care International (AAALAC)
1) See the web
site AAALAC.org.
9.2 HAZARD
CLASSIFICATION AND CHOICE OF CONTAINMENT
9.2.1 General
In consultation with the location scientific programs and
administrative representatives, the ARS Research Programs Safety Officer (RPSO) will
determine the appropriate biosafety level (see the next paragraph) for each new or
renovated space in the Program of Requirements developed for the facility.
9.2.2 Biosafety
Levels
Five biosafety levels are described below. Four are recognized
universally (see the latest edition of the CDC/NIH publication Biosafety in
Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories), and one (BSL-3Ag) is unique to ARS.
These levels consist of combinations of laboratory practices and techniques, safety
equipment, and facility design features appropriate for the dangers posed by the
biohazardous materials, and by the procedures to be performed with these agents. These
five biosafety level designations are applicable to all types of containment spaces,
including laboratories, animal rooms, corridors, greenhouses, necropsy rooms, insect
rearing facilities, carcass disposal facilities, etc.
The five biosafety levels, and the general types of biohazardous
materials they are meant to contain, are:
A. Biosafety Level 1 (BSL-1). Used with
agents of no known or minimal potential hazard to facility personnel, animals or the
environment. They present no potential economic loss to the agricultural industries.
B. Biosafety Level 2 (BSL-2). Used with
agents of moderate potential hazard to personnel, animals, and the environment, with
minimal economic loss to the animal industries. Most research and diagnostics laboratories
are at this level. It is the policy of ARS that any laboratory where research is being
conducted on infectious agents will be designed, built and operated at a BSL-2 standard at
a minimum.
C. Biosafety Level 3 (BSL-3). Used with
agents which may be indigenous or exotic to the United States that can be contracted by
the respiratory route, and may cause serious or lethal diseases to man, animals, or cause
moderate economic loss to the animal industries.
D. Biosafety Level 3 Agriculture (BSL-3Ag).
Used with pathogens that present a risk of causing infections of animals and plants and
causing a great economic harm. (Foot and Mouth Disease is the premier example.)
E. Biosafety Level 4 (BSL-4). Used with
highly lethal exotic agents which pose a high individual risk of life-threatening disease
to man. Certain of these viruses also infect food animals and have the potential to cause
severe economic loss to animal industries.
In certain instances, the RPSO may require
enhancements to the standard design features of a given BSL classification (e.g., under
certain conditions, the RPSO may require treatment of biowaste from a BSL-2 facility).
Some research work, involving transgenic materials, non-indigenous species, or other
exotic organisms, may require that the standard BSL-2 facility be enhanced. These
facilities may require design review and certification by APHIS. Any additional
requirements will be identified by the RPSO during the programming phase of the project.
9.3 PRIMARY
BARRIERS (CONTAINMENT EQUIPMENT)
9.3.1 General
Biological safety cabinets (BSCs) are the principal primary
barriers used to provide physical containment. (Other primary barriers are enclosed
containers, safety centrifuge cups, and personal protective equipment such as gloves,
gowns, respirators, and face shields.) BSCs are used to prevent the escape of aerosols
into the laboratory or outside environment. Certain cabinets can also protect experimental
work from airborne contamination. The selection of the appropriate BSC is based on the
potential hazard of the agent used in the experiment, the potential of the laboratory
operation to produce aerosols, the potential use of certain chemicals, and the need to
protect the experiment from airborne contamination. The types, numbers and locations of
BSCs to be used in the facility will be determined by the ARS Research Program
Representative (RPR), and confirmed by the ARS RPSO in the project's Program of
Requirements.
Complete information on Biological Safety Cabinets can be found in
the CDC/NIH publication Primary Containment for Biohazards: Selection, Installation
and Use of Biological Safety Cabinets, 2nd Edition, September 2000,
available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D. C. 20402.
When large animals can not be housed in ventilated containment
cages/units, certain features of the animal room (HEPA exhaust filters and the sealed and
pressure-tested room surfaces) act as the primary barriers.
9.4 SECONDARY
BARRIERS (FACILITY DESIGN FEATURES)
9.4.1 General
Special containment features, when incorporated in the design of
biological research facilities, act as secondary barriers against the possible
contamination of the immediate and general environment beyond the containment space. The
following paragraphs describe the design features for the five levels of containment
recognized by ARS.
Because of the complexity and expense of the containment systems,
a biological research facility is divided into research (containment) zones and support
(non- containment) zones. The non-containment zones support those research operations that
do not involve the manipulation of extremely biohazardous materials. These zones include:
entrances; offices; support rooms for the preparation of materials; holding rooms for
"clean" animals; spaces for washing already sterilized glassware, media and
equipment; and mechanical and electrical rooms that hold as much of the engineering
support equipment that can be located outside of the containment areas as possible. These
non-containment zones are usually on the perimeter of the spaces that make up the
containment zones. They provide a buffer zone around the containment facilities, and are
the areas from which personnel and materials enter and leave the containment facilities.
Depending upon the architectural layout of the facility, the A- E shall consider
using containable spaces surrounding the containment areas.
9.4.2 Biosafety
Levels 1 and 2 (BSL-1 and BSL-2)
A. In general, a BSL-1 facility represents
a basic level of containment that relies on standard microbiological practices with no
special or secondary barriers recommended, other than a sink for hand washing, and self
closing and lockable doors. The facility must be insect and rodent proof.
B. BSL-2 facilities, in general, support
research with agents that, as aerosols, could increase the risk of infection, and must
have available primary containment such as BSCs, safety centrifuge cups and/or personal
protection equipment. The BSL-2 facility should include the secondary barriers of a foot,
elbow or automatically operated hand washing station located near the exit of each
functional area within containment, and an autoclave, or other appropriate type of
biohazardous waste treatment, to process infectious wastes. With appropriate procedural
controls, non-infectious wastes from a BSL-2 facility could be decontaminated at a remote
site within the same building.
C. If laboratory animals are used, a BSL-2
animal facility must have appropriate cage storage areas and appropriate means of cleaning
the cages or caging systems. Any mechanical cage washer should be capable of producing a
final rinse temperature of at least 180 degrees F, but should also be able to operate at
lower temperatures to save energy and to prevent damage to some types of plastic cages.
D. The BSL-1 and BSL-2 facilities should
provide an internal environment which is easily cleanable. The walls and floors should be
surfaced with or be constructed of materials which can withstand harsh detergents,
disinfectants and decontaminating agents. Horizontal surfaces and open storage cabinets
which may collect dust should be minimized, and suspended fixtures, such as fluorescent
lighting and exposed service piping, should be accessible for cleaning. Bench tops should
be impervious to liquids and resistant to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and moderate
heat.
E. The facility furniture should be sturdy
and readily cleanable. Voids in furniture groupings should be accessible for cleaning. The
use of carpets, rugs, and cloth- covered, porous furniture is inappropriate in a
biocontainment facility. Open shelving should be avoided; closed cabinets minimize dust
buildup on their shelves and contain splashes of liquids.
F. Although the primary consideration in
the arrangement of the furnishings is their suitability for the research program, floor
plans should include environmental control and safety considerations. Work spaces should
be planned to be out of through traffic areas. If BSCs are provided, they shall be located
deep in the laboratory, preferably at "dead ends," where foot traffic that could
disturb the laminar flow of air in the BSCs would be minimized. They shall also be located
away from supply air outlets. The floor plans should separate clean and contaminated
operations. Extraneous traffic should be minimized. Although formal offices should not be
included in the laboratory, an area should be provided to allow researchers to record
notes, possibly at a computer workstation with a laptop, or to fax materials. Doors should
beequipped with self-closing devices to reduce and control the entry of non-facility
personnel, and with locks or key card access.
G. BSL-1 and BSL-2 laboratories shall be
ventilated as required by Chapters 5 and 7 of ARS Manual 242.1, with negative (usually)
pressurization relative to the surrounding spaces, exhaust air being ducted, and
recirculation of laboratory air being prohibited. Operable windows are not allowed in
order to preserve the specified and established air balance.
H. BSL-1 and BSL-2 animal facilities shall
be ventilated as required by Chapter 10 of the ARS Manual 242.1 and the latest edition of
the Guide for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals. Again, the animal
facility rooms shall be maintained at negative pressure relative to the surrounding areas,
the exhaust air cannot be recirculated, and the direction of the airflow is inward.
I. For animal facilities, all wall, floor
and bench surfaces shall be smooth surfaced, and all penetrations will be sealed to
control vermin.
J. For a summary of the general containment
guidelines for BSL-1 and BSL-2 facilities, see Table 9-1.
9.4.3 Biosafety
Level 3 (BSL-3)
A. A BSL-3 facility is designed to support
research activities with serious or potentially lethal biohazardous materials or
infectious substances.
B. All BSL-3 facilities shall have the
secondary containment features listed in sections 9.4.2(A) through 9.4.2(F) above.
C. The unique features which distinguish
the BSL-3 facility from the BSL-1 and BSL-2 facilities are the provisions for: access
control, safety equipment, a specialized ventilation system, and sealed finishes and
penetrations.
1) For access
control, the BSL-3 laboratory or facility should be completely separated from areas that
are open to the public, and from corridors used by laboratory personnel who do not work in
the BSL-3 facility. The change room and shower facility arrangement provides the greatest
access control of any of the examples and is strongly recommended for laboratories; this
arrangement is required for animal facilities at this level of containment. All facility
doors must be self-closing.
2) Safety
equipment includes biological safety cabinets and autoclaves.
Each BSL-3
laboratory or module in a BSL-3 facility should be equipped with an appropriate Class II
or III BSC to contain certain procedures when moderately infectious agents are being
studied. Potentially hazardous procedures shall be confined to ventilated safety cabinets.
Protective cabinets shall be used whenever biohazardous materials are handled outside
fully contained vessels.
An autoclave for
the decontamination of facility wastes must be located within the BSL-3 space. A double
door (having two doors in series) and interlocked autoclave with access outside the
laboratory or facility provides an excellent method for providing clean/contaminated
materials flow. With appropriate procedural controls, an autoclave may be located outside
of the BSL-3 laboratory, providing it is located within the same building.
3) A specialized
ventilation system to control air movement is a requirement for a BSL-3 facility. A ducted
exhaust air ventilation system must be provided. The exhaust air may not be recirculated
to any other area of the building. In general, exhaust air may not require filtration or
other treatments, but special site requirements, or certain activities with, or uses of,
hazardous agents may dictate the use of HEPA filtration. Air from the containment space is
to be discharged to the outside so that it either clears occupied buildings and air
intakes (this is usually done by locating the exhaust stacks on the roof and discharging
upward at a velocity greater than 3,000 fpm). The laboratory staff must ensure that the
flow of air is always into the containment space. A visual monitoring device should be
provided at the space's entry to confirm the inward direction of the airflow. Supply air
systems must be designed to prevent the positive air pressurization of the space and the
reversal of airflow from the containment areas to the non-containment areas of the
building. A device for monitoring airflow, and possibly an alarm, should be provided to
alert facility personnel to an air pressure problem.
4) Balance of the
supply air and exhaust air should provide a directional airflow with the air drawn into
the facility through the entry area. Recommendations to create this infiltration include:
a 15 percent airflow differential between exhaust and supply, or sufficient exhaust to
create a 0.05" water column differential between the containment area and the access
area. With either method, it is recommended that the infiltration of air into the
containment area be at least 50 CFM per doorway, at all times. Within the BSL-3 facility,
the supply and exhaust systems should be distributed and balanced so that the flow of air
between functional spaces is always in the direction of areas of increasing biological
hazard potential.
At this level of
containment, electronic direct digital controls (DDC) should always be used to manage the
ventilation systems unless their use would be impractical due to small project size,
difficulty of operation and/or maintenance due to the facility's location, or some other
factor. In addition, a Building Automation System (BAS), also known as a Facility
Management System, which can manage energy, and control signaling functions such as
security, fire safety, alarms of all types, communications, and data logging, and which
can also provide graphical displays and generate reports, should be provided, unless its
use would be impractical for reasons like those cited for the DDC system.
5) In rare
circumstances, and after having obtained a written waiver from the RPSO, recirculation of
the air within an individual containment space is permitted, if the air is HEPA filtered.
6) The BSL-3 space
must be constructed with sealed finishes and penetrations and sealable doors to permit
gaseous biological decontamination. All furnishings and equipment must be able to be
decontaminated by some proven means, or be able to be disposed of. All utility pipe and
duct penetrations, electrical conduits, utility access and other passages through floors,
walls and ceilings must be sealed to assure isolation of the space environment. The types
of anchors for utility services and their means of attachment to walls, floors, ceilings,
etc., shall be carefully selected and detailed to result in a sealed surface. Floors must
be impervious to liquids, with sealed seams, resistant to chemicals, and present a surface
that will minimize slipping hazards. Heat seamed vinyl flooring and poured epoxy flooring
are acceptable finishes. Walls of laboratories should be constructed of concrete block,
cement board or plastic construction. Walls of animal rooms, animal corridors and necropsy
areas shall be of cast-in-place concrete. All walls must be finished with an enamel,
epoxy, acrylic latex or other sealing compound that will permit frequent decontamination
and cleaning. All joints and seams in the walls must be sealed. This feature will control
air movement and stop entry of insects and other vermin. Ceilings should be constructed,
sealed and finished in the same general manner as walls. Depending on the particular
design, either the ceiling itself, or the structure above the ceiling, could form part of
the biocontainment barrier. If the structure itself forms part of the biocontainment
barrier, standard ceiling materials, either easily cleanable or easily disposable, can be
used. If the structure itself does not form part of the biocontainment barrier, the use of
suspended tile ceilings will be allowed only after a written waiver is received from the
RPSO, because of leakage, dirt and insect control. Light fixtures must be recessed and
sealed to minimize dirt deposits. Ceilingdiffusers should be sealed to control air leaks
from the containment space.
7) Containment
greenhouses must be glazed with double-paned laminated glass. Containment greenhouse
design requirements are discussed further in the referenced APHIS documents.
8) Any windows in
a BSL-3 facility must be inoperable and sealed in the shut position. All facility doors
must be self-closing.
9) Provisions for
dealing with scheduled maintenance or equipment repair problems must be incorporated into
BSL-3 facility design. The design should minimize the need for non-research personnel to
enter the containment space to perform maintenance functions. Where possible, compressor
monitors or gas supplies which can be isolated should be made accessible from outside the
containment space. Compressed gas cylinders supplying carbon dioxide, nitrogen and other
gases should be stored outside the containment space, and manifold piping should be used
to provide the gases inside the area. Central vacuum systems are not recommended, because
of the potential problems of radiological and biological contamination of their piping,
and the potential for exhaust air contamination. Small individual vacuum pumps equipped
with in-line HEPA filters shall be used within the containment space.
10) The HEPA
filtered exhaust air from Class II , Type A ("Laminar Flow") BSC's may either be
returned to the laboratory environment or discharged to the outdoors. Class I, Class II,
Types B1 and B2 (the new 100 percent exhaust "Laminar Flow" cabinet), and Class
III cabinets usually require external exhaust fans and may be directly connected to a
building's exhaust system. The treated exhaust from these BSCs must be discharged
outdoors. Room supply and exhaust systems, and the exhaust systems for these cabinets,
must be designed and operated in a manner that does not interfere with the air balance of
the rooms and the BSCs. The cabinets must be located so that they can easily be
maintained, decontaminated and certified.
D. For a summary of the general containment
guidelines for a BSL-3 facility, see Table 9-1.
9.4.4 Biosafety
Level 3 Agriculture (BSL-3Ag)
A. In ARS, special features are required
when research involves certain biological agents in large animal species. To support such
research, ARS has developed a special facility designed, constructed and operated at a
unique containment levelcalled Biosafety Level 3 Agriculture (BSL-3Ag). Using the
containment features of the standard BSL-3 facility as a starting point, BSL-3Ag
facilities are specifically designed to protect the environment by including almost all of
the features ordinarily used for BSL-4 facilities as enhancements. All BSL-3Ag containment
spaces must be designed, constructed and certified as primary containment barriers.
The BSL-3Ag facility can be a separate
building, but, more often, it is an isolated zone contained within a facility operating at
a lower biosafety level, usually a BSL-3. This isolated zone has strictly controlled
access, and special physical security measures, and functions on the box within a
box principle.
B. All BSL-3Ag facilities require the
features listed in sections 9.4.2(A) through 9.4.2(F), and sections 9.4.3(C)(1) through
9.4.3(C)(3), and 9.4.3(C)(8).
C. In addition, the mandatory special
features for a BSL-3Ag facility include:
1) Personnel
change and shower rooms that provide for the separation of street clothing from laboratory
clothing and that control access to the containment spaces. The facility is arranged so
that personnel ingress and egress are only through a series of rooms (usually one series
for men and one for women) consisting of: a ventilated vestibule with compressible gaskets
on the two doors, a clean change room outside containment, a shower room at
the non-containment/containment boundary, and a dirty change room within
containment. Complete laboratory clothing (including undergarments, pants and shirts or
jump suits, and shoes and gloves) is provided in the dirty change room, and
put on by personnel before entering the research areas. In some facilities, complete
laboratory clothing and personal protective equipment (PPE) are provided in the
clean change room, where they can be stored and stowed for use without entry
into containment.
In general, when
leaving a BSL-3Ag laboratory, where all open handling of infectious materials is done in
BSCs or other physical containment equipment, personnel need not take a shower to go to
any other containment space within the facility, and would be required to take only the
access control shower to leave the facility.
However, when
leaving a BSL-3Ag large animal space (an animal room, necropsy room, carcass disposal
area, contaminated corridor, etc.) that acts as the primary barrier and that contains
large volumes of aerosols holding highly infectious agents, personnel usually would be
required to remove their dirty lab clothing, take a shower, and put on
clean lab clothingimmediately after leaving this high risk BSL-3Ag animal
space and before going to any other part containment space within facility. When leaving
the facility, these personnel would take another shower at the access control shower and
put on their street clothing.
It is very
important for the A-E to realize that the location, size and number of change rooms and
showers within a facility need to be programmed very carefully with the scientists and
staff at the location due to the unique circumstances at each research center.
Soiled clothing
worn in a BSL-3Ag space is autoclaved before being laundered. Personnel moving from one
space within containment to another will follow the practices and procedures described in
the biosafety manual specifically developed for the particular facility and adopted by the
laboratory director.
2) Access doors to
these facilities are self closing and lockable. Emergency exit doors are provided, but are
locked on the outside against unauthorized use. The A-E shall consider the practicality of
providing vestibules at emergency exits.
3) Supplies,
materials and equipment enter the BSL-3Ag space only through an airlock, fumigation
chamber or an interlocked and double-doored autoclave.
4) Double-door
autoclaves engineered with bioseals are provided to decontaminate laboratory waste passing
out of the containment area. The double doors of the autoclaves must be interlocked so
that the outer door can be opened only after the completion of the sterilizing cycle, and
to prevent the simultaneous opening of both doors. All double door autoclaves are situated
through an exterior wall of the containment area, with the autoclave unit forming an air
tight seal with the barrier wall and the bulk of the autoclave situated outside the
containment space so that autoclave maintenance can be performed conveniently. A gas
sterilizer, a pass-through liquid dunk tank, or a cold gas decontamination chamber must be
provided for the safe removal of materials and equipment that are steam or heat sensitive.
Disposable materials must be autoclaved before leaving the BSL-3Ag space, and then
incinerated.
5) Dedicated,
single pass, directional, and pressure gradient ventilation systems must be used. All
BSL-3Ag facilities have independent air supply and exhaust systems. The systems are
operated to provide directional airflow and a negative air pressure within the containment
space. Thedirectional airflow within the containment spaces moves from areas of least
hazard potential toward areas of greatest hazard potential. A visible means of displaying
pressure differentials is provided. They can be seen inside and outside of the containment
space, and sound an alarm when the preset pressure differential is not maintained. The air
supply and exhaust systems must be interlocked to prevent reversal of the directional
airflow and the containment spaces becoming positively pressurized, in the event of an
exhaust system failure.
6) Supply and
exhaust air to and from the containment space is HEPA filtered, with special electrical
interlocks to prevent positive pressurization during electrical or mechanical breakdowns.
The exhaust air is discharged in such a manner that it cannot be drawn into outside air
intake systems. The HEPA filters are outside of containment but are located as near as
possible to the containment space to minimize the length of potentially contaminated air
ducts. The HEPA filter housings are fabricated to permit the scan testing of the filters
in place after installation, and to permit filter decontamination before removal. Backup
HEPA filter units are strongly recommended to allow filter changes without disrupting
research. (The most severe requirements for these modern, high level biocontainment
facilities include HEPA filters arranged both in series and in parallel on the exhaust
side, and series HEPA filters on the supply side of the HVAC systems serving high
risk areas where large amounts of aerosols containing BSL-3Ag agents could be
expected [e.g., large animal rooms, contaminated corridors, necropsy areas, carcass
disposal facilities, etc.])
For these high
risk areas, redundant supply fans are recommended, and redundant exhaust fans are
required. The supply and exhaust air systems should be filtered with 80-90 percent
efficiency filters to prolong the life of the supply and exhaust HEPA filters. Air
handling systems must provide 100 percent outside conditioned air to the containment
spaces.
7) Liquid
effluents from BSL-3Ag areas must be collected and decontaminated in a central liquid
waste sterilization system before disposal into the sanitary sewers. Equipment must be
provided to process, heat and hold the contaminated liquid effluents to temperatures,
pressures and times sufficient to inactivate all biohazardous materials that reasonably
can be expected to be studied at the facility in the future. The system may need to
operate at a wide range of temperatures and holding times to process the facility's
effluents economically and efficiently. Double containment piping systems with leak alarms
and annular space decontaminating capability should be considered for these
wastes.Effluents from laboratory sinks, cabinets, floors and autoclave chambers are
sterilized by heat treatment. Under certain conditions, liquid wastes from shower rooms
and toilets may be decontaminated by chemicals. Facilities must be constructed with
appropriate basements or piping tunnels to allow for inspection of plumbing systems.
8) Each BSL-3Ag
containment space shall have its interior surfaces (walls, floors, and ceilings) and
penetrations sealed to create a functional area capable of passing a pressure decay test
with a leak rate established by the ARS RPSO. This requirement includes all interior
surfaces of all
BSL-3Ag spaces,
not just the surfaces making up the external containment boundary. All walls are
constructed slab to slab, and all penetrations, of whatever type, are sealed airtight to
prevent escape of contained agents and to allow gaseous fumigation biological
decontamination. This prevents cross contamination between individual BSL-3Ag spaces and
allows gaseous fumigation in one space without affecting other BSL-3Ag spaces. Exterior
windows and vision panels, if required, are breakage- resistant and sealed.
Greenhouses
constructed to meet the BSL-3Ag containment level will undergo the following tests, or the
latest subsequent standards: (a) an air infiltration test conducted according to ASTM E
283-91; (b) a static pressure water resistance test conducted according to ASTM E 331-93;
and (c) a dynamic pressure water resistance test conducted according to AAMA 501.1-94.
9) All ductwork
serving BSL-3Ag spaces shall be airtight and pressure tested (see Appendix 9B for testing
and certification details).
10) The hinges and
latch/knob areas of all passage doors shall be sealed to meet pressure decay testing
requirements.
11) All airlock
doors shall have air inflated or compressible gaskets. The compressed air lines to the air
inflated gaskets shall be provided with HEPA filters and check valves.
12) Restraining
devices shall be provided in large animal rooms.
13) Necropsy rooms
shall be sized and equipped to accommodate large farm animals.
14) Pathological
incinerators, or other approved means, must be provided for the safe disposal of the large
carcasses of infected animals. Redundancyand the use of multiple technologies need to be
considered and evaluated.
15) HEPA filters
must be installed on all atmospheric vents serving plumbing traps, as near as possible to
the point of use, or to the service cock, of central or local vacuum systems, and on the
return lines of compressed air systems. All HEPA filters are installed to allow in-place
decontamination and replacement. All traps are filled with liquid
disinfectant.
16) Biological
Safety Cabinets must be provided and must be installed where their operations are not
adversely affected by air circulation and foot traffic. Class II BSCs use HEPA filters to
treat their supply and exhaust air. The exhaust from most Class II cabinets must be
connected to the building's exhaust system. Supply air to a Class III cabinet is HEPA
filtered, and the exhaust air must be double HEPA filtered (through a cabinet HEPA and
then through a HEPA in a dedicated building exhaust system), before being discharged to
the atmosphere.
A BSL-3Ag facility
will be provided only at those locations where the research mission requires this special
type of facility; that is, where the facility barriers, usually considered secondary
barriers, now act as primary barriers. Examples are sealed interior surfaces (walls,
ceilings and floors of each containment space), ventilation systems, pathological
incinerators, effluent sterilization systems, HEPA filters, etc. This requirement exists,
in most cases, to contain biologically hazardous aerosols.
The BSL-3Ag
facility must undergo special testing and certification procedures.
See Appendix B,
Testing and Certification Requirements for Critical Components of the Biological
Containment System, at the end of this chapter, and the Design Details Manual.
D. For a summary of the general containment
guidelines for a BSL-3Ag facility, see Table 9-1.
9.4.5 Biosafety
Level 4 (BSL-4)
A. A BSL-4 facility is designed to support
the safe conduct of research involving biological agents that are extremely hazardous to
individuals, or that may cause serious epidemic disease. Some of these viruses are
zoonotic and infect large food animals and may have a severe economic impact.
B. All BSL-4 facilities shall have the
secondary containment features listed insections 9.4.2(A) through 9.4.2(F), sections
9.4.3(C)(1) through 9.4.3(C)(8), and sections 9.4.4(C)(1) through 9.4.4(C)16). Additional
features are discussed below.
C. There are two types of BSL-4
laboratories, the Cabinet Laboratory and the Suit Laboratory.
D. Additional secondary features for a
BSL-4 facility are as follows:
1) In the Cabinet
Laboratory, primary containment of the biohazardous materials is provided by Class III
Biosafety Cabinets. These are totally enclosed and ventilated cabinets of gas-tight
construction. Operations within these cabinets are conducted through attached rubber
gloves. When in use, the cabinets are maintained under a negative pressure of 0.5 to 0.75
inches of water (125 Pa to 188 Pa). The exhaust system for the cabinet must be a dedicated
system.
2) Class III
cabinets are designed generally as a system of interconnected cabinets which contain
sufficient space for all research procedures. Refrigerators, incubators, centrifuges,
animal cages and other equipment are housed in the cabinets so that the research can be
performed without removing materials from the cabinet system. Double door autoclaves and
chemical dunk tanks are installed as integral parts of the system, to allow the safe
introduction and removal of supplies and equipment.
3) Usually when
animals, especially large animals, are to be used, a Suit Laboratory is preferred. These
laboratories protect the user from the potentially contaminated environment by a
one-piece, positively pressurized suit that is ventilated by a life support system. Air
supplied to the suit is HEPA filtered. The suit's redundant air supply system is provided
with alarms and is further provided with an emergency backup air tank. In these suit areas
(laboratories with Class II BSCs, large animal rooms, animal corridors, necropsy
facilities, etc.), the internal shell of the space must be airtight, and the space must be
able to pass a pressure decay test as required by the ARS RPSO. Redundant supply fans are
recommended; redundant exhaust fans are required. Emergency lighting and communications
are provided in these suit areas. Personnel can enter and leave these suit areas only
through a ventilated airlock containing a chemical shower for suit decontamination. The
airlock is created by a pair of airtight doors with air-inflatable gaskets. These doors
are interlocked so that only one door can be opened at any time. All spaces are designed
to be free of sharp edges or protrusions that could tear the suits. Glassware is
prohibited and unbreakable plastics substituted.
4) The chemical
shower is used to decontaminate the positively pressurized suit before its removal. The
exhaust air from this chemical shower room is filtered through two HEPA filters in series.
The negative pressure in this shower room is greater than in any adjacent area.
Clean researchers leaving a BSL-4 Cabinet Laboratory and the facility will go
through the access shower only. Researchers leaving a BSL-4 Suit Laboratory
and the facility would take a chemical shower to decontaminate the suit, and then go
through the access shower to take a personal shower before dressing in street
clothing.
5) In general,
laboratory animals infected with BSL-4 agents must be housed with individual caging
dependant on the species. Farm animals must be housed and restrained in a way designed to
protect the physical safety of workers in suits. When infected animals are housed in a
partial containment system (e.g., open cages placed in ventilated enclosures; cages with
solid walls and bottoms, covered with filter bonnets and opened in laminar flow hoods; or
other equivalent primary containment systems), then the room itself acts as the primary
barrier, and all personnel would be required to wear the one-piece, positive pressure
suit.
6) Large animals
infected with BSL-4 agents must be housed in BSL-4 animal rooms acting as primary
barriers. These rooms must have an adjacent vestibule having a chemical shower to allow
the area to become a true ventilated suit area. All personnel would be required to wear
the one- piece positively pressurized suit. The large animal facility must have an
integral necropsy room equipped to handle the largest animal housed in the facility, and
an animal carcass disposal system that can inactivate all the pathogens being studied.
E. The BSL-4 Facility must undergo special
testing and certification procedures. See
Appendix 9B, Testing and Certification Requirements for Critical Components of the
Biological Containment System, at the end of this chapter, and the separate Design
Details Manual.
F. For a summary of the general containment
guidelines for a BSL-4 Facility, see Table 9-1.
Table 9 -1
General Containment Guidelines
Biosafety Levels: | BSL-1 | BSL-2 | BSL-3 | BSL-3 Ag | BSL-4 |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Facility Features: | |||||
1. Personnel Entry/Exit through Clothing Change & Shower Rooms | n/a | n/a | recommended | required | required |
2. Materials, Supplies, & Equipment enter/leave through Double-Door Autoclave, Fumigation Chamber, or Airlock | n/a | n/a | required | required | required |
3. Work Conducted in Primary Containment Equipment. | open bench tops |
as required | required | required (If the space is a lab.) |
required |
4. Hand Washing Station *(Foot, elbow or automatically operated) |
required | recommend ed* | required* | required* | required* (not where a suit would be worn) |
5. Laboratory and Animal Room Wastes from the Containment Area Decontaminated or Sterilized | n/a | recommend ed | recommended | required | required |
6. Lab Clothing Decontaminated Before Being Washed | n/a | n/a; to be disposed of in the lab or washed by the facility | required | required | required |
7. Animal Cages Autoclaved or Thoroughly Decontaminated Before Cleaning | cages washed, then rinsed at 180 degrees. | cages washed, then rinsed at 180 degrees. | cages washed, then rinsed at 180 degrees. | required | required |
8. Appropriate Cautionary Signs | n/a | required | required | required | required |
9. Separate Building or Isolated Zone Within a Building | n/a | n/a | required | required | required |
10. BSC or other Appropriate Personal Protective or Physical Containment Devices | n/a | Class I or Class II BSC |
Class II or Class III BSC |
Class II or Class III BSC |
Class III or Class I or II BSC with ventilated suit |
11. Suit Room | n/a | n/a | n/a | n/a | AS REQUIRED |
12. Steam and/or Ethylene Oxide Sterilizers: | recommended | required | required (integral, double door) | integral, double-door | integral, double-door |
13. Liquid Effluent (Bio-Waste) Treatment System | n/a | not required | required | required | required |
14. Personnel Change Room | n/a | n/a | recommended for laboratories; required for animal facilities. | required | required |
15. Shower Available Within Facility | n/a | n/a | recommended for laboratories; required for animal facilities. | required | required |
16. Lab Contiguous with Shower | n/a | n/a | n/a | as required for lab; required for high risk areas | required |
17. Work Surfaces: Bench Tops Impervious to Water, Resistant to Acids, Alkalis, Organic Solvents and Moderate Heat. | required | required | required | required | seamless required |
18. Interior Surfaces of Walls, Floors, and Ceilings: Monolithic, Resistant to Liquids and Chemicals, all Penetrations Sealed. Any Drains in the Floors Contain Traps Filled with Chemical Disinfectant | n/a | walls, floors, and ceilings are monolithic, resistant to liquids and chemicals. | required | required | required |
19. Windows | not recommended for animal rooms. For other areas, if provided, fitted with fly screens | not recommend ed for animal rooms. For other areas, if provided, fitted with fly screens | all windows closed and sealed. | no windows recommended (If with windows: breakage resistant and sealed) |
no windows recommended (If with windows: breakage resistant and sealed |
20. Animal Room: Cages Solid-Sided, Cages Ventilated or Filtered, Restraining Devices. | n/a | n/a | as required | as required | required |
21. Vacuum Outlets (if provided)
Protected by HEPA Filters & Liquid Disinfectant in Traps |
n/a | n/a | required | required | required if central vacuum systems are used |
22. Other Liquid & Gas Services Protected by Backflow Preventers | n/a | n/a | required | required | required |
23. Sewer & Other Vent Lines Protected by HEPA Filters | n/a | n/a | required | required | required |
24. Ventilation (Facility): Individual Supply & Exhaust Air Systems. (For animal facilities, HVAC to be provided as per latest edition of Guide for Care and Use of Laboratory Animals) |
ducted exhaust required | ducted exhaust required | ducted exhaust required | required | required |
Single Pass (No Recirculation) | required | required. | required | required | required |
Directional Air Flow | required | required | required | required | required |
Pressure Gradient | recommended for animal rooms; n/a for other areas. | recommend ed for animal rooms; n/a for other areas. | required | required | required |
Supply/Exhaust Coordination (Exhaust Confirmed before Supply Operates ) | n/a | n/a | required | required | required |
HEPA Filtered Supply and/or Exhaust | n/a | n/a | HEPA exhaust recommended | HEPA supply & exhaust for labs; HEPA supply and 2 in series HEPAs exhaust for high risk areas | HEPA supply & exhaust for Cabinet Lab; HEPA supply and 2 in series HEPAs exhaust for Suit Areas |
25. Ventilation (Containment
Equipment): Class III BSC |
n/a | n/a | HEPA supply filters & tandem (2 in series) HEPA exhaust filters | HEPA supply filters & tandem (2 in series) exhaust filters. | HEPA supply filters & tandem (2 in series) exhaust filters |
Class I and II BSC | n/a | n/a | Class II; HEPA supply and exhaust | Class II: HEPA supply and exhaust | Class II; In Suit Lab, HEPA supply and exhaust |
26. DDC and Building Automation Systems | to be considered | to be considered | required unless impractical | required | required |
27. Leak Tightness Testing & Certification of Critical Components of the Biological Containment System Prior to Final Acceptance of the Completed Work | n/a | n/a | BSC, HEPA filter assemblies (if required), welded ductwork (if required). | BSC, HEPA filter assemblies, containment room, welded ductwork. | BSC, HEPA filter assemblies, containment room, welded ductwork. |
9.5 SPECIAL
DESIGN ISSUES
9.5.1 General
This section provides special design issues to be addressed in the
design of BSL-3, BSL-3 Ag and BSL-4 facilities. If a feature is required only for a
specific biocontainment level, it will be noted.
9.5.2 Architectural
Elements
A. Facility Layout
A containment area shall be separated, by
controlled access zones, from areas open to the public and from other laboratory
personnel, who do not work within the containment area.
During the development of the POR, the
A-E, the RPM, the RPR and the RPSO will coordinate to ensure maximum possible compliance
with the requirements of UFAS, consistent with the successful performance of the
facility's research mission.
Each laboratory module of the containment
facility shall be capable of accommodating a biological safety cabinet.
Adequate means of egress shall be provided
from all laboratories without breeching containment or promoting cross contamination.
Airlocks, when required, shall be provided and located at transitional points between the
spaces of different biocontainment levels through which personnel and/or materials must
pass. The design must include storage areas for chemicals and chemical wastes.
Animal facilities shall be designed to
provide an adequate number of rooms to assure proper separation of species or tests,
isolation of individual projects, quarantine of animals, and routine or specialized
housing of animals. Separate areas will be provided for the diagnosis, treatment and
control of the diseases of laboratory animals. These areas will provide effective
isolation for the housing of animals either known or suspected of being diseased, or of
being carriers of disease, from other animals.
When animals are housed, storage
facilities shall be provided for feed, bedding, cages, supplies and equipment. Storage
areas for feed and bedding shall be separate from the areas where any tests are conducted,
and shall be protected from infestation and contamination. Perishable supplies shall be
preserved by appropriate means. Portable fencing or dividers, restraining devices, and
tables and carts as needed are to be provided.
B. Room Envelope and Interior Finishes
The design shall include construction
materials and finishes that are compatible with research programs, activities taking place
in the spaces, and decontamination methods. Materials and finishes for spaces that will
accommodate large animals (holding rooms, corridors, necropsy facilities, etc.) need to be
especially durable, to withstand impact and abrasion, and high temperature and humidity,
and high pressure cleaning agents. Floors should be of seamless or epoxy or trowled epoxy
materials, impervious, abrasion resistant, nonslip when wet, cleanable, and able to
withstand animal feces, urine and disinfectants, and to be washed with 180 degree F water
containing detergents and deconning liquids under hose pressure. The floor must be
non-skid, but not abrasive to the animals. The facility's animal care veterinarian must be
consulted on the proper flooring material. The flooring materials for containment
greenhouses shall be vinyl ester resin, polyurethane resinous mortar, or a similar
material. Walls should be constructed of glazed masonry units with an epoxy grout, or of
concrete blocks with an industrial-grade epoxy paint. Drywall ceilings are not acceptable
for animal spaces; cement board or plaster with an impervious finish that can withstand
the same cleaning conditions as the walls is required. For insect facilities, the A-E will
select lighting systems and color schemes that will draw insects away from exits and
toward locations where they can be easily captured.
Openings in walls, floors, and ceilings
through which utility services and air ducts penetrate shall be sealed to prevent release
and to permit space decontamination. These openings can be effectively sealed by the use
of sleeves and the application of a liquid silicone plastic. Seals shall be installed on
both sides of all penetration openings, at locations that can be easily inspected and
maintained.
Facility doors shall have locks and /or
key card access to control admittance.
Airlock doors must have flat or low
thresholds to provide for easy movement of carts and animals, and to allow accessibility
for physically challenged personnel. The sill must be high enough above the finished floor
to prevent water from pooling and causing corrosion, and to prevent abrasion of the door
gasket.
All laboratories shall be provided with
adequate casework, and storage areas for respirators, if required. Work surfaces shall be
impervious to water and resistant to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and moderate heat.
Any window in the laboratory will be
breakage-resistant and sealed.
9.5.3 Mechanical
Elements
A. Airflow Patterns. For isolation
purposes, separate air handling systems shall be provided for non-containment and
containment areas.
Each air handling system serving a
containment space shall be designed to supply 100 percent outside air for heating,
ventilation and air conditioning. The A-E will perform a life cycle cost analysis
on all 100 percent outside air systems to determine if an exhaust air heat recovery is
economically feasible. The HVAC system shall be on emergency power.
Direction of flow. The established
direction of air flow shall be from less contaminated to more contaminated spaces, and
shall remain unchanged under all conditions. Airflow direction within a containment space
shall be from the entrance door toward the rear of the space. All rooms must be provided
with a visual monitoring device that indicates and confirms directional inward airflow at
the laboratory entry.
Airflows. The air flow rate to each room
shall remain reasonably constant. Air flow rates shall not be varied for purposes of
temperature controls. Room air change rates per hour generally shall be 6 to 8 for
offices, and 8 to 10 for laboratories; the HVAC systems for animal rooms shall be designed
for 15 air changes per hour at full filter loading, although they will normally be
operated in the range of 10-12 air changes per hour, or to meet the latest AAALAC
standards. The A-E shall consider setbacks of normal airflow to conserve energy during
times of low or no occupancy.
Negative Pressures. A series of
differential pressures of approximately 0.05 in wg (12.5 Pascal) between separate
functional spaces shall be used to control the direction of movement of airborne
particles. Air pressures shall be more negative in those zones at higher risk for
contamination by biohazardous materials than in those with lower risk. At some locations,
strong winds can cause abnormally high and low temporary atmospheric pressure conditions
near the building. The A-E must use care to ensure that, in sensing and responding to
these unusual outside pressure conditions, the controls of the facility's HVAC systems
maintain the proper pressure relationships among and between the various levels of the
containment spaces.
B. Supply and Exhaust Systems
Insect Screens. For facilities using
insects for research, provide screens on diffusers and registers.
Location. For ease of maintenance, the
active components of HVAC systems shall be carefully arranged outside the containment
envelope. Space for doing maintenance work must be provided around equipment.
Capacity. The capacity of the exhaust
system, fan, motor and drive shall be 15 percent greater than the capacity of the supply
air system.
Controls. The HVAC system shall be
controlled by an electronic direct digital control (DDC) system, unless it can be shown to
be impractical by the A-E for reasons of economy, operation, maintenance or some other
basic reason.
Heat Recovery. Heat recovery studies shall
be conducted for all 100percent outside air systems.
Gas-tight ductwork. Exhaust ductwork
(including all joints and seams) for contaminated air shall be made pressure tight, as
determined by passing the specified in-place acceptance test at + 4 inches wg.
Air filtration. The exhaust air from all
types of containment equipment, and all types of containment spaces, shall be filtered
through high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters before being discharged to the
outside. HEPA filtration shall also be provided on the supply air side where required by
this document. HEPA filters shall be provided on exhaust systems serving insect-rearing
facilities to generally improve air quality and to trap insect scale, which may cause
allergic reactions. The 99.97 percent efficiency filters listed by the National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) shall be specified.
Pre-filters shall be located upstream of
all HEPA filters (supply and exhaust) to prevent premature loading. For supply side
applications, pre-filters are typically installed at air handling equipment intakes to
protect coils and other system components. In addition to those pre-filters, consideration
shall be given to the installation of additional pre-filters, located after the supply air
fans and immediately before the supply HEPA filters. These will protect the supply side
HEPA filters in the event that an access door located between the intake pre- filters and
the HEPA filters is opened to a dirty environment while the building is operating under a
negative pressure.
Pre-filters shall be installed upstream of
all exhaust HEPA filters to prevent premature loading of those HEPA filters. Consideration
shall be given to locating these exhaust pre-filters within the containment space where
they can be changed by the facility staff without impacting the system's operation or
compromising the containment barrier. The used pre-filters would be decontaminated before
removal from the containment area, as is other solid waste leaving the facility.
The specifications will require in-place
testing of the HEPA filters to assure the integrity of the filter frame seal to the filter
housing and that no damage occurred during shipping or installation. Specification of the
99.97 percent (at a minimum), factory-tested HEPA filters is required.
HEPA Filter Location and Housings. The
supply and exhaust HEPA filters shall be located as close as possible to the containment
space to minimize the length of containment ductwork. The HEPA filter housings shall be
selected to allow physical isolation from the ductwork using bioseal dampers (meeting all
of the factory and field testing and certification requirements of ASME N509 and N510), or
any other approved mechanical means, to allow in-place decontamination of the filters
before they are removed, and to allowcertification testing after they are replaced. The
HEPA filter housing units shall be fabricated to allow reasonably convenient scan testing,
decontamination and replacement of the filters. The HEPA filter housing arrangement shall
allow ease of access for a human of standard proportions. Access ports for the use of
chemical agents to perform all actions necessary to decontaminate the HEPA filters must be
functional, properly located and sealable. In some instances, HEPA filters arranged both
in series and in parallel might be required.
Autoclave Venting. Vent hoods and separate
exhaust systems shall be carefully provided on both the containment and non-containment
sides of the autoclaves to eliminate steam, hot air and odors from the work area. If the
autoclave is to be located across a biocontainment barrier, a rubber gasket or some other
sort of equivalent bioseal is required at the barrier. To the maximum extent possible,
locate all controls and serviceable components on the side out of containment. The steam
condensate from the jacket of the autoclave should be recovered, but the steam condensate
from the autoclave compartment must go to the contaminated sewer.
Designing for Redundancy. As a general
principal, the design must ensure that the failure of one electrical or mechanical device
or power source will not shut down a critical biocontainment system or piece of equipment.
A critical biocontainment system or item of equipment is one that acts to contain,
inactivate, remove or decontaminate biohazardous materials. Examples are: all HVAC systems
and their appurtenant equipment and control systems that maintain directional airflows in
containment spaces; personnel and suit showers; wastewater decontamination systems;
material and space decontamination systems (including carcass disposal facilities);
autoclaves and gas sterilizers; compressed air systems serving air-gasketed doors;
refrigerators, freezers and cold rooms storing biohazardous materials; BSCs and fume
hoods, etc. For the more costly elements being studied, an analysis considering both
system redundancy and diversity shall be performed to determine which approach would
provide the greater overall economy.
Redundant fans and pumps shall be
considered in the design of the supply and exhaust air ventilation systems, and the
facility's hydronic systems, respectively. To prevent the overheating of the interiors of
animal rooms and containment greenhouses, N+1" chillers should be considered (N
being the number of the best size of chillers for the installation.)
Outside Air Intake. Outside air intakes
must be designed so that rain and snow, that could wet or clog the supply air filters, are
excluded from the air stream. For northern locations, all 100 percent outside air systems
should be provided with a convenient space/access to remove ice accumulations from the
outside airintake. The points of intake shall be separated, as far as practicable, from
the points of exhaust. In selecting locations, consideration shall be given to the area's
prevailing wind patterns. The use of insect screens may increase maintenance
due to tree lint, mowing debris, etc., and are much more easily/quickly iced up. Air
intakes may be better protected with 1/4" or �" hardware cloth bird screens. A
supply HEPA filter is required in certain supply ventilation systems in addition to the
prefilters.
Material of Construction. All materials,
and their protective coatings, used for the fabrication of all exhaust system components,
shall be selected to withstand any corrosive and erosive conditions characteristic of the
gases to be handled. In some harsh marine environments, Type 304 stainless steel has been
required for supply ductwork to avoid rusting and the depositing of corrosion material
into the research spaces.
C. Services
Service Piping. Service piping shall be
installed with sloping lines. Use backflow preventers to isolate branch water lines. To
avoid crevices that might permit a buildup of contamination, and to promote ease of
painting and cleaning, piping not in a wall will not be mounted in direct contact with a
wall.
Air Systems. Compressed air, instrument
air and containment room pressure taps shall be protected by small, in-line, commercially
available HEPA filters.
Floor Drains. Each floor drain will have a
5-inch deep (minimum) trap which is connected directly to the liquid waste decontamination
system. All drain cleanout plugs must be located within the containment zone. Floor and
sink drains shall be equipped with insect screens in insect rearing facilities. Since
straw, hay and various other bulky materials are frequently used for farm animals, either
as food or as bedding, all floor drains should be equipped with traps and cleanouts, and
shall have a means of flushing readily available. The minimum size of the sewer pipe for
farm animals is normally 6 inch, but shall be coordinated with the design approach to
decontaminating the liquid wastewater and to handling the solids in the wastewater stream.
If possible, the drains in the facility should be the same size to minimize maintenance
and protection problems. These floor drains are always kept filled with an effective
disinfectant.
Waste Disposal. The A-E is required to
investigate Alternative Treatment Technologies in solving the waste disposal issue at the
facility.
Vacuum System. Individual vacuum pumps are
highly recommended for use inBSL-3Ag and BSL-4 laboratories. If a central laboratory
vacuum system is used, it shall not serve areas outside of the containment spaces, and
in-line HEPA filters shall be placed as near as practicable to each use point or service
cock. HEPA filters shall be installed to permit in-place decontamination and replacement.
Vacuum receiver tanks must be fitted with a single HEPA filter, with decontamination ports
for the tank itself and for the mechanical pump.
Waste Lines. Waste lines must prevent the
release of untreated waste to the environment. Consideration shall be given to providing
double containment piping for waste lines leaving BSL-3Ag and BSL-4 spaces. The A-E will
consider requiring: (1) a leak alarm system for the annular space between the two pipes;
(2) a means of deconning the annular space; and (3) a verifiable means of deconning the
interior of the carrying pipe from the floor drain to the effluent treatment system..
Protection of the environment from contaminated waste venting shall be accomplished with
HEPA filters in the vent lines. Additionally, the waste venting system shall be connected
into the containment space ventilation system in such a manner that the waste venting
system will operate at a lower static pressure than the containment rooms served.
Sprinkler Systems. For all types of
containment spaces, the A-E and the RPSO will determine, on a case by case basis, if
sprinklers are required. The A-E shall perform a risk assessment to identify whether the
greater hazard is posed by: (1) a fire in the facility not equipped with sprinklers; or
(2) the sprinkler discharge becoming contaminated, and, in turn, contaminating the
environment. This risk assessment shall include life safety considerations, potential
economic loss, building combustibility, nature of the biohazardous materials, value of the
research being performed, etc. Whenever sprinklers are to be installed, the A-E and the
RPSO will determine how the biologically contaminated sprinkler discharge shall be
treated.
Other Utilities. Water and gas services to
the containment facility shall be protected by backflow prevention devices.
Hand Washing Facility. A foot, elbow, or
automatically operated hand washing station shall be provided near the exit of each
functional space. The sink shall be constructed of materials, such as stainless steel or
epoxy-coated resins, which are resistant to possible chemical and other spillage. The
drain shall have a removable, cleanable strainer to prevent solid materials from getting
into the drainage system.
9.5.4 Electrical
Elements
A. Distribution Panels. Separate power and
lighting distribution panels shall be provided for containment and non-containment spaces.
All distribution panels shall be located outside of containment spaces.
B. Conduit and Wiring. Conduit in
containment spaces shall be exposed. In locations where conduit is not subject to physical
damage, PVC conduit may be considered. In all other locations, conduit shall be rigid
steel, hot-dipped galvanized type. An approved means shall be detailed and included in the
design to prevent circulation of air inside or around electrical conduits in the following
situations:
1) On the inside
openings of any conduit going from a non-containment space to a containment space, or
going between containment spaces of different levels; and
2) On any opening
between the outside of the conduit and the wall, floor or ceiling that separates a
non-containment space from a containment space, or that separates containment spaces at
different levels.
All seals shall be installed at locations
readily accessible for inspection and maintenance.
For areas outside containment, the use of
rigid/PVC conduit systems with specialized seals is not required.
C. Lighting Fixture Installation.
Fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be installed flush against the ceiling to prevent dust
accumulation. In an animal room, the fixture arrangement is critical due to extensive
cleaning and vermin control requirements. Recessed fluorescent fixtures, with prismatic
lenses, fixture faces flush with the ceiling, and with triple gaskets are typically used
in animal rooms. Gaskets are used between the lens and the frame, the frame and the
housing, and the housing and the ceiling. All lenses must be mounted smooth side out to
provide an easily cleanable surface. When the room face of the fixture is the containment
barrier and the lamps and ballasts are serviced fromoutside containment, the requirements
for containment wiring would not apply. In some instances, sealed and removable fixtures
might be a feasible option.
D. Lighting Levels. Animal rooms require
multi-level lighting arrangements. A night cycle of 0-1 foot candles, a day cycle of 30-50
foot candles with a wide spectrum fluorescent light source, and a cleaning cycle of 70-100
foot candles are required. Night levels should be as low as possible, with as few light
leaks as possible from corridors or nearby rooms. The lighting levels should be regulated
by a computer-controlled system.
E. Distribution System. In an animal
facility, redundancy of the electrical distribution system is critical. The recommended
form of power distribution for an animal facility is the secondary selective radial (or
the double-ended) system.
F. Redundant Emergency Power. A standby
generator shall be provided, to be automatically switched on in case of a power outage, to
serve life safety (e.g., egress lighting, animal room lighting, fire alarms, fire pumps,
smoke control, elevators for the disabled) and critical equipment (exhaust systems, fume
hoods, sump pumps, freeze protection systems, environmental rooms for long term samples or
experiments, selected refrigerators and freezers within lab areas, fuel pumps, and
boilers). A priority list of the life safety and critical equipment to be supplied with
emergency shall be developed by the A-E, the RPSO, and the RPR.
G. Receptacles. Waterproof, duplex outlets
shall be placed at convenient locations throughout the room, located so as to be
inaccessible to the animals. All circuits should be equipped with GFCI devices.
H. Special Systems. The A-E shall
investigate whether special systems such as Uninterrupted Power Supplies, voltage
regulation equipment to ensure utility power to the facility does not vary more than +/-
10 percent, line conditioners to regulate electric power to special items of equipment to
+/- 1 or 2 percent, isolation transformers, special shielding, etc., are needed by the
facility.
I. Building Automation System. A complete
and expandable Building Automation System (BAS), capable of performing energy management,
signaling, monitoring, communications, and reporting functions, shall be provided for the
facility, unless it is judged to be impractical for the same reasons as cited for DDC
systems.
J. Interlocks. All air locks, pass boxes
and double-door sterilizers shall be equipped with interlocks so that both doors cannot be
opened simultaneously. The supply and exhaust ventilation air fans shall be interlocked to
preventpositive pressurization of a containment space in the event of an exhaust fan
failure.
K. Decontamination. The electrical system
must have sufficient circuits and power to support the facility's decontamination needs
and activities.
9.6 BID
DOCUMENT PREPARATION
9.6.1 Scope
This section provides special requirements for the preparation of
plans and specifications for a biocontainment facility.
9.6.2 Summary
of Biological Containment Design Elements
During the pre-design and design efforts for a biological
containment facility, the RPSO or APHIS certification officials need to be kept appraised
of how the requirements of Chapter 9 are being addressed in the project. These individuals
may or may not be skilled in reading and interpreting construction drawings and technical
specifications. In order to expedite the review of the biocontainment design features, the
A-E shall provide a separately bound Summary Document which outlines the approaches to the
project containment requirements and provides information regarding the key features of
the facility's design. This document shall be provided as part of each progress
submission.
As a minimum, this Summary Document shall include the following:
A. A set of schematic drawings at
adequate scale to illustrate the following:
1) A floor plan of
the facility which delineates the containment spaces and bioseal doors and indicates the
Biological Safety Level each space should be designed to meet.
2) A typical
section of the building or greenhouse which shows the construction of the ceiling and wall
assemblies which comprise the containment boundary and equipment and distribution space
relationships.
3) A pressure zone
diagram showing the pressure gradients between spaces, including symbols (arrows)
indicating the air flow direction from less contaminated to most contaminated.
4) Schematic of
mechanical systems to include HEPA filtration, redundancy, primary monitoring and control
points, and line of demarcation between the containment side and the clean
side of systems.
5) Schematic of
the biological waste treatment system showing containment methods and treatment capacity
calculations.
B. A typed narrative description on 8 � x
11 inch paper which includes the following:
1) Copies of all
correspondence related research program definition, risk assessment, and RPSO or APHIS
designation of space BSL classification.
2) Copies of all
correspondence related to waivers from Chapter 9 requirements.
3) A narrative
description of options considered and proposed methods to meet the following containment
design principles:
a)
Movement, control and decontamination of personnel and materials
in and out of the containment space.
b)
Physical isolation and security of containment spaces.
c) Handling
and treatment of solid and liquid wastes leaving containment spaces (to include animal
bedding and carcass disposal where applicable).
d)
Type of construction of all architectural elements comprising the
containment barriers.
e)
Description of types of finishes for the containment area with
respect to durability, ease of cleaning and disinfection, and chemical resistance.
f)
Description of mechanical systems to include maintaining required
pressure gradients, system redundancy, and filtration schemes. Include diagram/sketch for
HEPA filters access for DOP scanning.
g)
Description of electrical systems and emergency back-up.
h)
Description or diagram of methods proposed to seal barrier
penetrations.
i)
Description of proposed testing methods for rooms, ductwork, HEPA
filter assemblies, etc.
j)
Description of the building and process control system discussing
ability to control, monitor, and record critical functions.
k) For
insect facilities and greenhouse facilities which are certified by APHIS, the summary
shall address the applicable facilities criteria on a point by point basis and shall
address barriers and means employed to contain the appropriate insect species.
9.6.3 Location
Access and Special Conditions
Each project location will have specific procedures for
biosecurity and physical security that will apply to the Contractor and all contractors
and subcontractor employees. The plans and specifications, typically in Section 01000,
shall fully describe all location requirements and special conditions so that the
Contractor fully understands the requirements, and that they may be enforced by the
contract conditions.
The contract documents shall address:
A. Sign-in/out locations and
procedures for workers, site visitors, suppliers, etc. and maintenance of a log of
contractor personnel on the site.
B. Use of security or ID badges and/or
keycards on contractor/subcontractor employees and vehicles.
C. Worker Right to Know/Hazard
Identification training to be completed prior to beginning work--including if training
will be required for supervisors, foremen, and/or all workers, delivery persons, etc.
D. Delivery procedures and requirements.
E. Special shower out and clean up
procedures.
F. Limitations of workers to visit farms
following work at the site.
G. Parking for contractor/subcontractor
employees and service vehicles.
H. Access routes and roads to the work
location within the site.
I. Warning that contractor/subcontractor
employees shall not enter buildings and facilities not specifically a part of the project
due to disease control and health requirements.
J. Requirements for contractor-supplied
jobsite sanitary facilities, phone service, storage trailers, and jobsite offices.
K. Restrictions and/or authorizations for
contractor use of existing utility services, including water, sewer, compressed air,
electricity, and other utilities.
9.6.4 Demolition
and Temporary Work
For renovation of a containment facility, the overall work shall
be carefully examined for its impact on the adjacent facilities to remain undisturbed. The
construction drawings and specifications shall address the following:
A. All materials, equipment and work to be
to be provided by or performed by the contractor in support decontamination requirements.
All biological decontamination activities for the affected spaces shall be coordinated and
monitored by the Government, including the necessary testing and verification functions,
prior to turning the space over to the contractor for renovation work.
B. Debris disposal guidelines during
demolition shall be defined.
1) Temporary
conditions required by demolition and phasing (dust partitions, security partitions,
temporary AHU requirements, limitations regarding hours of operations in some areas,
limitations to use jackhammers or other equipment that may damage containment facilities,
etc.).
9.6.5 Utilities
The contract documents shall provide guidance on the following
issues:
A. Where there is a necessity for a utility
shutdown for connections or other purposes, a written request for approval for shutdown
must be submitted a minimum of 10 days before the anticipated event.
B. Shutdowns of utilities must not be
initiated before approval in writing is received.
C. There will be no unauthorized shutdown
of utility services.
D. The guidelines shall identify the number
and types of skills of standby support personnel required for the approved shutdown.
E. Specific procedures to be followed for
implementing critical operations, such as opening contaminated sewer lines, shall be
provided.
F. There shall be no unauthorized altering
of any of the following during any phase of construction:
1) building air
balance
2) building air
pressure zone levels
3) any utility
that provides support for the safe operation of any containment space.
9.6.6 Containment
Boundaries
The contract documents shall include separate floor plans and
sections showing all elements which comprise the containment boundaries. The drawings
shall indicate the location of barriers which may and may not have unsealed penetrations.
9.6.7 Penetration
Details and Sealing Openings
The contract documents shall include special details for sealing
all penetrations through containment barriers, e.g., structural, ductwork, all types of
pipe, conduit, wire, gang boxes, telephone/data cabling, control tubing, etc. These
details shall also include methods of sealing all new and existing openings. This shall
include any surface materials required to provide a monolithic surface capable of passing
the required tests.
9.6.8 Pressure
Levels and Directional Airflow
The contract documents shall include separate containment floor
plans and schematics showing pressure levels and relationships, airflow directions, and
airflow capacities. One common base atmospheric reference point should be used for all
mechanical ventilation systems. The effects of dynamic actions (elevators, doors, hood
changes) on pressure relationships and system response shall be considered.
9.6.9 Specialized
or Uncommon Products
In biocontainment construction, it may be necessary to specify
materials and products which are very specialized, not in common use, or which may be hard
to find. In such cases, a source of the specialized product should be specified by stating
the supplier's name and address, and the trade name of the product. Review these
specialized items with the EPM/CO and provide sole source justification, alternate
supplier information, and/or documentation as required for compliance with Federal
Acquisition Regulations.
9.6.10 Testing
Requirements
The specifications shall list all testing to be performed by, and
all documentation and certifications to be provided by, the contractor. An itemized list
of the equipment to be tested, and of the types of testing required shall be approved by
the RPSO and included in the contract documents. For containment areas, the requirements
for testing of ductwork, BSC's and rooms must be specified. Unless specifically addressed
in another manner, all testing listed in Appendix B shall be witnessed by an Independent
Testing Agency hired by the Government. At a minimum, the following equipment and systems
shall be tested and validated.
A. Leak tightness of the supply and exhaust
ductwork, at the pressures specified.
B. Factory-testing of HEPA filters, filter
housings, isolation valves and other critical components.
C. Field-testing of HEPA filters and
housings after installation.
D. Differential pressures and/or
directional airflows between adjacent areas.
E. Field testing of biological safety
cabinets.
F. Pressure decay testing of containment spaces.
9.6.11 Project
Close-Out Requirements
The contract documents shall clearly define the project quality
assurance and close-out requirements. Issues to be addressed in the
specifications shall include: warranties, certifications, inspection punch lists,
equipment start-up and testing, system start-up and testing, biocontainment testing,
acceptance criteria, documentation of testing and reporting test results, etc. The A-E
will provide a listing of all proposed testing and close-out requirements to the RPSO for
approval prior to incorporation in the final contract documents.
9.6.12 Commissioning
A. A properly designed and constructed
biocontainment facility, including its structural and mechanical safety systems, must meet
predetermined performance criteria and be operational upon completion of
construction. The integrity of the critical components of the biological containment
systems shall be verified by the testing and certification requirements listed in Appendix
B.
B. On a predetermined need basis, and/or
when specified by national, department, agency standard, rule, regulation or code, the
systems of a biocontainment facility must also be periodically be evaluated in meeting the
performance criteria. Detailed records of the activity and the test results should be
maintained indefinitely at the facility.
C. Certification of the facility, including
structural components and safety systems, should be included as part of the overall
commissioning processes normally undertaken to verify that the design and construction
meet applicable standards and that the facility can operate in accordance with the design
intent.
It is essential that the facility satisfy
itself that it has met the required predetermined standards before putting the
biocontainment facility into service.
D. Initially, the facility must pass a
series of inspections and tests to meet standards that have been pre-developed,
authorized, and specified in the design and construction documents before biohazardous
agents are used in the facility. These shall be specified in addition to the desired
outcomes by the commissioning team identified prior to initiation of construction
activities.
E. These predetermined standards for the
initial and periodic testing must be realistic, achievable, repeatable, and be
statistically valid. They must also be performed without degradation to the facility or
mechanical system that is being tested. In addition, they must be applicable for the
degree and type of risk that is anticipated with regards to biohazardous agent use with
those standardsidentified upfront that will be used for periodic evaluation.
Appendix
9A: Project Team Roles and Responsibilities as They Relate to
Biological Safety Issues
9A-1. Research Programs Safety Officer (RPSO)
The RPSO performs a risk assessment for the research program to be
conducted in a given facility and will make the determination which of the level of
biological safety required for the research activities and specific details required to
accomplish these requirements. The RPSO retains final authority for decisions on these
issues and is the sole authority for granting waivers or deviations from standard
biosafety level requirements. The RPSO relies upon the Research Program Representative for
an accurate description of the proposed research program.
During the design phase, the RPSO participates in reviewing
and approving all design submissions with primary emphasis on biological safety issues.
The RPSO will provide written concurrence with the final design documents.
During the construction phase, the RPSO will be invited to
participate in construction progress meetings. The RPSO provides clarification of
biological safety criteria, and will be consulted for concurrence on construction changes
that relate to biological safety matters.
9A-2. Research Program Representative (RPR)
The RPR is usually the Location Coordinator, Research Leader, or
Laboratory Director. The RPR prepares the description of the research program for use by
the RPSO in determining the type of biological containment required.
During the design phase, the RPR is responsible for reviewing and
approving all design submissions with primary emphasis on function, program, and special
local issues/interest. The RPR will provide written concurrence with the final design
documents.
During the construction phase, the RPR participates in regular
construction progress meetings, clarifies established program criteria information, is
always consulted for concurrence on construction changes that relate to research program
requirements, and is informed of all other changes.
9A-3. Engineering Project Manager (EPM)
The EPM is an ARS Architect or Engineer whose primary
responsibility, with other Project Team members, is to ensure Agency needs are met within
the approved scope, budget, and schedule. The EPM provides technical oversight and
direction and is assigned to the project early in its conception during the time of
establishing the project scope and budget. The EPM role will continue throughout the
planning, design, and construction phases of the project. The EPM will serve as the lead
point of contact and shall disseminate information to the appropriate Project Team members
for their action or involvement. It is the responsibility of the EPM to see that all
Project Team members are kept advised of the actions, plans, and progress of the project.
All Project Team members will keep the EPM advised of their needs and concerns. The EPM
also is the lead point of contact between the Project Team and contractors for day-to-day
business, working within the terms of the contracts.
During the planning phase, the EPM will coordinate the development
and review of the Action Plan and Fact Sheet which summarizes the general scope, budget,
and schedule for the project for approval by the Administrator. The EPM will work closely
with the RPR in the development of the preliminary POR's for the project. After
consulting with other Project Team members, the EPM will prepare a design Statement of
Work (SOW) for the project and a cost estimate for all professional services. The EPM will
chair the A-E Evaluation Board to evaluate and recommend the A-E selection for a
particular project.
During the pre-design and design phases, the EPM will be
designated as the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) and will act as the principal
liaison with the A-E firm. The EPM will coordinate A-E visits with the members of the
Project Team, conduct design progress meetings and design reviews, review all A-E
submittals, and make recommendations to the CO for approval of payment. During the
development of the POR, the EPM will ensure that the project complies with the approved
Action Plan and Fact Sheet and that the RPSO has provided information regarding the
appropriate biological safety levels for the research spaces. The EPM will take the lead
to ensure that all Project Team members, including the A-E and the DR, incorporate all
project requirements of the POR and that the documents are in compliance with applicable
codes and safety standards.
During the construction phase the EPM is usually appointed as the
COR. The assignment as COR is made at the beginning of the contract by an official
designation letter from the CO outlining the responsibilities, authority, and limitations.
A copy of this designation letter will be provided to both the contractors and the Project
Team members.
The COR is responsible for interpreting technical data in the A-E,
construction, and CIC contracts. The COR may approve minor changes to the project that do
not affect the program requirements, price, scope, or performance time of the
contracts. Such changes will be documented and communicated to the Project Team. The COR
will provide the CO technical and administrative recommendations and documentation
regarding changes to terms and conditions of these contracts.
The COR is responsible for ensuring that all Team Members are kept
advised of the actions and progress of the project. Working within the terms of their
delegation, the COR is usually the primary point of contact for day-to-day business
between the Project Team and the A-E, the construction contractor, and the CIC contractor.
9A-4. Area Office Engineer (AOE)
The AOE serves as the technical advisor and resource to the
Project Team during the planning, design, and construction phases of all projects within
his/her Area. It is the responsibility of the AOE to see that the Area and location
personnel are advised of the actions and status of projects during all phases. The AOE is
responsible for coordinating the involvement of Area and location personnel, such as the
Area Safety and Health Manager (ASHM), Location Monitor (LM), Location Administrative
Officer (LAO), and others as appropriate. The AOE will assist the Project Team by
addressing location specific technical questions and coordinating the review comments from
the Area and location personnel.
During the planning phase, the AOE is usually involved in the
development and review of the POR, Investigative Report, and SOW for A-E services.
During the design phase, the AOE will review the design submittal
with particular emphasis on location specific issues such as utility requirements or
unique location requirements.
During the construction phase, the AOE will provide assistance to
the Project Team and is invited to participate in progress meetings, equipment testing,
and final inspections.
9A-5. Location Engineer (LE)
At those locations which have an onsite Location Engineer, many of
the responsibilities of the AOE may be delegated to the LE. The LE will insure that
location specific issues are addressed in the design documents and may be required to
assist with coordination with location personnel and local government entities.
9A-6. Area Safety and Health Manager (ASHM)
The ASHM serves as the safety, health, and environmental advisor
and resource to the Project Team during the planning, design, and construction phases on
projects within his/her Area. The ASHM shall be consulted on safety, health, and
environmental issues.
During the planning phase, the ASHM may be consulted to provide
input on developing the POR and the SOW for design. The ASHM will assist in the
preparation of the variances on safety, health, and environmental issues during the
planning and site investigation phases. Also, the ASHM may assist in prioritizing safety,
health, and environmental items to be incorporated in the SOW for design.
During the design phase, the ASHM may, as assigned, review the
design submittal and develop priority for safety, health, and environmental items to be
incorporated into the contract documents.
During the construction phase, the ASHM is to ensure that all
appropriate safety, health, and environmental management related regulations are in place.
The ASHM may participate in final inspection and acceptance of the project.
At locations where a location safety or biocontainment officer is
available, they may be delegated most of the responsibilities outlined for the ASHM.
9A-7. Location Safety and Health Manager (LSHM)
At locations which have an onsite Safety and Health Manager, the
many responsibilities of the ASHM may be delegated to the LSHM. The LSHM will ensure that
location safety and health issues are addressed. Responsibilities of the ASHM may also be
delegated to the LSHM, and the LSHM may work in concert with the RPSO.
9A-8. Industrial Hygienist and Safety Manager
(IHSM)
The facility's or Center's IHSM would be responsible for
industrial safety requirement issues as they relate to design of the new or renovated
biocontainment facility.
9A-9. Architect-Engineer (A-E)
The A-E is a private contractor who provides professional services
of an architectural- engineering nature with primary emphasis on the design of research
facilities, laboratory support facilities, and administrative facilities. For
biocontainment facilities, knowledge and experience in the design of containment
facilities will be a critical selection factor. The design is performed under the
supervision of a registered or licensed professional architect or engineer as required in
the State where the project is located. The A-E also provides investigative studies,
assists in quality assurance of the construction project, assists in project management,
reviews submittals during construction, and provides consultative services as needed.
During the planning phase, the A-E finalizes the POR, and prepares
the Environmental Assessment and other investigative reports as may be required.
During the design phase, the A-E develops conceptual drawings and
provides a preliminary cost estimate. After approval of the conceptual plans, the A-E is
tasked with preparation of the final design and working drawings in a manner which
incorporates the various adjustments approved through the design review process. Upon
approval, various submittals of plans, specifications, and cost estimates are submitted
for program, technical, and budget review through completion of final design. The A-E may
formally conduct presentations at the various stages of design development and shall
provide complete documentation of all such meetings. The A- E shall prepare waiver
requests for any deviations from the biological containment standards outlined in this
chapter.
The A-E is tasked with incorporating all necessary biological
containment features into the construction documents to insure that the facilities meet
all standards for the biological safety level assigned to the individual spaces by the
RPSO. The design effort will include evaluation of unique requirements for biocontainment
measures and will require technical recommendation regarding how the requirements of
Chapter 9 are best met for a given facility. The A-E must be particularly sensitive to the
testing and accreditation requirements necessary for acceptance of the facility and to the
unique maintenance requirements of the containment envelope and equipment.
During the post-design and construction phase of the project, the
A-E may be required to participate in the pre-bid, pre-construction, and other meetings.
The A-E may be tasked to review and approve shop drawings, material submittals, review
andcomment on construction contract modifications, and other related activities as
directed by the Government. The Government may confirm construction compliance with design
intent through a separate inspection contract or may contract for these services through
the design A-E firm.
9A-10. Design Reviewer (DR)
The DR is an independent contractor who provides professional
services to review the design submissions prepared by the design A-E. The DR is required
to perform services under the supervision of a registered or licensed professional
architect or engineer. For biocontainment facilities, knowledge and experience in the
design of containment facilities will be a critical selection factor.
The DR is to provide assurance to the Government that the design
A-E is proceeding in accordance with the project requirements. The DR will review the
major design submittals including cost estimates, referencing project requirements cited
in the design A-E contract, (i.e., final POR), geotechnical study, applicable Codes and
Industry Standards, and good practices of design. The DR will use the ARS Design Review
Check List as part of his/her review and will be responsible for seeing that all project
requirements are being satisfied.
The DR will be tasked to perform value engineering studies for
major construction projects, when required. The DR may be tasked to perform the services
of a CIC for major construction contracts.
9A-11. Construction Inspection Contractor (CIC)
The CIC is an independent contractor, generally an A-E firm, whose
primary role is to provide quality assurance that the construction project is being
constructed as designed and to provide oversight to the Quality Control Plan of the
construction contractor. The CIC will consist of a CIC manager that has access to a
technical staff that can report to the project site in a timely manner on an as-needed
basis. For major construction projects, the CIC responsibility may be assigned as a task
order to a construction management firm or an A-E firm separate from the design A-E.
The CIC will monitor the Quality Control Plan of the construction
contractor and ensure that special test results, material certifications, etc., are
obtained as required. This is particularly critical in testing of biological containment
envelopes and mechanical equipment as outlined in this chapter. In cases where test
results or certifications, etc., are not satisfactory, the CIC will take immediate action
to notify the construction contractor's superintendent and the COR.
The CIC is to report to the COR all findings, observations, and
communications with the construction contractor. A daily construction log will be
maintained by the CIC, and daily Quality Assurance reports will be submitted concurrently
to the CO and COR. If it is identified that the construction contractor has made
deviations from the plans, the CIC will document these observations and bring them to the
attention of the construction contractor's superintendent, the CO, and the COR.
Appendix
9B: Testing and Certification Requirements for the Critical
Components of Biological Containment Systems
9B-1. General
This section provides the requirements for testing and
certification that must be conducted at the factory and/or the field to verify the
containment integrity of the critical components of biological containment systems. Copies
of all testing and certification results are to be made to the facility. These copies will
be retained indefinitely by and at the facility.
9B-2. Testing and Certification of Biological
Safety Cabinets
Biological Safety Cabinets shall be tested in accordance with the
latest version of NSF Standard 49, Class II (Laminar Flow) Biohazard Cabinetry.
9B-3. Testing and Certification of HEPA Filter
Assemblies
A. Factory Testing. The filter housing
pressure boundary shall undergo factory testing per ASME N5-1989 to 10" w.g. with a
maximum permissible leak rate of 0.2 percent of the housing volume per hour. The filter
element sealing surface shall be factory tested by the pressure decay method as specified
in ASME N 510-1989.
B. In Place HEPA Filter Testing. Field
test and provide written certification of all HEPA filter units with Polyalphaolefin (PAO)
after installation to verify that the filters do not contain pinhole leaks in the filter
media, the bond between the filter media and the filter frame and the filter frame gasket
to filter housing.
Filter testing is intended to be completed
in a similar manner to industry standards for certification of HEPA filters in Biological
Safety Cabinets. The testing contractor may submit an alternate written testing procedure
for approval by the RPSO prior to making filter certifications. If the alternate testing
procedure is not approved, the following procedure shall be used.
Approved Testing Procedure:
1) Utilize an
aerosol photometer with either a linear or a logarithmic scale and a threshold sensitivity
of at least 1 x 10 -3 micrograms per liter for 0.3 micrometer diameter PAO particles and a
capacity for measuring 80-120 micrograms per liter concentration. The air sampling rate
shall be at least1 cfm.
The PAO generator
shall be the Laskin nozzle(s) type which generates an aerosol of PAO particles by flowing
air through liquid PAO. The compressed air supply to the generator shall be adjusted to 20
psi, measured at the entrance to the nozzle and downstream of all restrictions. The
nozzles shall be with liquid PAO to a depth not to exceed 1 inch.
2) Adjust the air
flow to approximately 10 percent of the design air flow rate of the filter. Place the PAO
generator to uniformly introduce PAO aerosol upstream of the HEPA filter. Measure and
record the upstream PAO concentration approximately in the center of the filter face.
For linear readout
photometers (graduated 0_100), adjust the instrument to read 100 percent while using at
least one Laskin type nozzle per 500 cfm airflow, or increments thereof. For logarithmic
readout photometers, adjust the upstream concentration to 1 x 10-4 above the concentration
necessary for one scale division (using the instrument calibration curve).
3) With the nozzle
of the photometer probe not more than 1 inch from the surface, scan the downstream side of
the HEPA filters by passing the probe over the entire filter surface in slightly
overlapping strokes. Scan the entire periphery of the filter, and the junctions between
the filter media and the filter frame, and the filter frame and the housing. Scanning
shall be done at a transverse rate of not more than 2 inches per second.
4) Identify and
repair all points of leakage which exceed 0.01 percent of PAO penetration at any point,
measured by a linear or logarithmic photometer for acceptance.
9B-4. Testing and Certification of a Containment
Room
A. General. The purpose of testing the
containment room or envelope is to determine if the walls, floors, ceilings, penetrations,
and other containment barrier features have adequate integrity to prevent leakage of air
from the containment space. Testing is typically completed by subjecting the containment
area to negative or positive air pressure in excess of the anticipated operating
conditions, and monitoring the containment air pressure over a test period.
Testing and Certification will typically
consist of three progressive steps:
1) Pretesting for
gross leaks by raising/lowering the containment space air pressure to about � inch W.C.
(125 Pascal), then looking and listening for major leaks.
2) Soap bubble
pretesting.
3) Pressure decay
testing for final certification.
An individual containment testing plan
shall be developed for each project and the Contractor's role shall be clearly identified
in the project specifications. The Contractor's role may include: (a.) full responsibility
for testing and documentation through the use of third-party testing subcontractors; (b.)
sealing and repairs as needed to comply with Owner completed/subcontracted testing; or
(c.) simple visual inspection. If third-party testing is to be coordinated by the
Contractor, the project specifications shall include prior testing experience and
submittal of qualifications prior to approval of the testing subcontractor.
For new construction, the Contractor will
typically have greater responsibility for testing and certification than for renovation
work, where access conditions will vary and all existing conditions may not be known. The
project approach may also vary depending on the availability and expertise of location or
agency safety staff.
B. Pretesting
The integrity of the containment space to
prevent leakage will largely be the result of the care used by the Contractor and
subcontractors to install products in accordance with the plans and specifications. The
project quality assurance/quality control measures should include pretesting prior to
testing for certification--even if the Contractor is not responsible for final acceptance
testing and certification.
Prior to testing, supply and exhaust
ventilation openings shall be sealed closed, and all doors and other openings through the
containment perimeter shall be placed in their normal closed positions. If the doors in
the containment perimeter are not gasket sealed, they will need to be temporarily caulked
or otherwise sealed to complete the testing. The testing plan should address how the
openings are to be sealed.
A calibrated digital or inclined manometer
shall be installed across the containment perimeter in a manner to minimize interference
with wind or ventilation turbulence and to accurately represent the interior and exterior
differential air pressure. The manometer shall have a display with capabilitiesto be
easily read to an accuracy of 0.05 inch W.C. (10 Pascal) and capability to accurately read
pressures to 3 inches W.C. (750 Pa).
When pretesting for large/gross leaks, the
containment space may be pressurized or depressurized by installing a variable speed
blower door or other approved means to generate a nominal � inch W.C. (125
Pa) differential pressure across the containment perimeter. The building surfaces, joints,
penetrations, etc., are then inspected for air leakage and sealed in accordance with the
plans and specifications. The testing plan should include a warning that generating
excessive negative or positive pressures can apply significant stress to the facility, and
may cause damage that will be repaired at the Contractor's expense. The testing plan and
specifications should also remind the Contractor to complete sealing repairs while the
space is not under test pressures, and that adequate time is to be allowed for sealants to
properly cure before retesting.
Following completion of sealing of all
leaks identified at � inch W.C. (125 Pa), pretesting may proceed to soap bubble testing.
Depending on the location of the containment barrier and construction, soap bubble testing
may be completed under positive or negative differential pressure. Typically testing is
completed under negative pressure, when the soap bubbles are readily visible on the inside
surface of the containment barrier.
Provide a fan/blower unit with the
capacity to create and maintain a 2 inch W.C. (500 Pa) differential pressure for the time
required to inspect all surfaces and to mark leaks. As the containment zone is sealed, the
fan/blower capacity required to maintain adequate differential pressure becomes
significantly smaller. A simple shop vacuum unit may be adequate for a large building.
Provide a valve or other means of throttling the fan/blower unit to slowly
load the building with pressure differential, and to keep from creating too
large a pressure differential and causing damage to the structure.
Apply a soap or detector solution (e.g., a
liquid detergent with a low surface tension, or a commercial test solution such as
Leak-Tek, Search, or Snoop) to all joints, corners,
sealed penetrations, or other locations which could be point sources of air leakage.
Potentially porous construction surfaces such as wood, masonry units, and mortar joints
should be carefully checked. Mark all locations of bubble formations and air leaks. Remove
the pressure differential and repair the leaks in accordance with the plans and
specifications. Following adequate curing time, repeat the soap bubble testing.
Repeat testing and sealing cycles until it
appears that the containment zone will pass pressure decay testing. If a ball valve is
located in the fan/blower piping from the containment zone, the valve can be closed to
seal the containmentzone. With the valve closed, monitor the time for the containment
pressure to drop from 2 inches W.C. (500 Pa) to 1 inch W.C. (250 Pa). If the time
approaches 20 minutes or more, the containment zone may be ready for pressure decay
testing.
C. Pressure Decay Testing and Certification
Prepare for testing by closing openings at
the perimeter of the containment envelope and setting up testing equipment as described
for pretesting. The fan/blower unit shall be capable of creating a 2-inch W.C. (500 Pa)
pressure differential in the containment zone, and shall have a ball valve in the piping
to the containment zone to allow the room/zone to be sealed once the testing pressure
differential has been reached.
Testing shall be completed under generally
stable conditions of outside wind, temperature, barometric pressure, and humidity. Testing
shall be under negative differential pressure with respect to the surrounding environment.
Air pressure testing ports/openings for the digital or inclined manometer instruments
shall be located where the readings will not be affected by wind, air disturbances, or
traffic.
Pressure Decay Testing Procedure:
1) Operate
fan/blower unit to slowly (5 to 10 minutes) bring the differential pressure to 2 inches
W.C. (500 Pascal).
2) Close the valve
between the fan/blower and the test zone to seal the containment zone at 2 inches W.C.
negative pressure with respect to the adjacent areas.
3) Record the
differential pressure each minute for 20 minutes.
4) Slowly open the
seal valve to allow the room/containment zone to return to normal pressure.
Decay testing may be repeated after a 20
minute wait period. Visually inspect the containment surfaces between testing and make
repairs as necessary. If the acceptance criterion is not met, repeat the soap bubble
testing and make repairs before retesting.
Acceptance Criterion:
Two consecutive pressure decay tests
demonstrating a minimum of 1 inch W.C.(250 Pa) negative differential pressure remaining
after 20 minutes, from an initial negative pressure differential of 2 inches W.C. (500
Pa).
Reports:
At a minimum, reports for each decay test
shall include start time, start and end room temperature, date, manometer data (brand,
model, serial number, date of last calibration, full scale reading, and smallest scale
increment), description of fan/blower unit and control means, tabulation of pressure
differential readings for each test minute, a graphical plot of test data (time on the
horizontal scale and differential pressure on the vertical axis), a floor plan
illustrating the containment envelope and location of the fan/blower unit, and a
description of the test, including seals and blockouts. Reports shall be signed and dated
by the person completing the test.
9B-5. Testing and Certification of Gas Tight
Ductwork and Isolation Valves
Testing shall include all portions of the gas tight ductwork and
filter systems that may potentially be exposed to contamination: from the rooms to the
respective isolation dampers on the upstream side of the supply HEPA filters and on the
downstream side of the exhaust HEPA filters.
Perform in-place positive pressure testing and written
certification. All welds and /or duct joints shall remain fully exposed and accessible for
inspection and repair until testing is completed and certified.
A. Preliminary testing shall be completed
using soap bubble leak detection and/or helium gas to detect leaks for repair prior to
final testing and certification. Use of Freon or other CFC gas is not
acceptable.
B. Certification testing shall be completed
using helium gas and a leak detector. The detector shall be an industrial type, capable
and adjusted for detection of leaks of 1 x 10 -7 cc/sec. Pressurize duct or assemblies to
4 inches w.g. (1,000 Pa) with a helium concentration adequate to insure leaks will be
detected. Scan the interior surfaces of all ducts, seams, joints, gaskets, and other areas
of possible leakage at a distance of 1/4 to � inch from the surface and at an approximate
rate of 1 inch per second. Acceptance shall be no detected leaks in excess of 1 X 10 - 5
cc/sec.
At a minimum, the testing certification
report shall include the date, time, detailed location, description of materials being
tested, brand and serial numberand calibration date of detector, name and signature of the
person completing the testing, and shall be submitted in a format approved by the COR.
C. Alternative pressure testing may be
approved on a case-by-case basis if temperature and other environmental conditions will
not affect the test. Pressure testing shall be completed by pressurizing the gas tight
assembly or ductwork to the specified pressure criteria, closing all valves and monitoring
for pressure drop. Acceptance shall be zero pressure drop in one hour.
9B-6. Testing and Certification of
Biocontainment Greenhouses
Greenhouses constructed to meet the BSL-3Ag containment level will
undergo the following tests: (a) an air infiltration test conducted according to ASTM E
283-91; the test pressure difference will be 6.24 pounds per square foot positive static
pressure; the allowable leakage rate is 0.03 cfm per square foot; (b) a static pressure
water resistance test conducted according to ASTM E 331-93; the minimum test pressure will
be 10 pounds per square foot; the passing standard is no water penetration to the interior
surface; and (c) a dynamic pressure water resistance test conducted according to AAMA
501.1-94; the minimum test pressure will be 10 pounds per square foot; the passing
standard is no water penetration to the interior surface.
Appendix
9C: Glossary of Terms
Absolute Filter. See HEPA filter.
Aerosol. A suspension of very fine particles of solid or liquid in air or gas.
Air Lock. A section of corridor isolated by doors, used to separate areas with different levels of biohazard and at different air pressures. An airlock permits the passage of personnel and/or equipment, normally without airflow. Under special conditions, air locks may be pressurized by the addition of a HEPA filtered air supply. When an air lock is used for fumigation, the doors shall be gas tight and the room exhausted by a dedicated exhaust system equipped with HEPA filtration.
Airtight. See "Gas tight."
Aircraft Grade Compound. A sealing compound used for sealing biological safety cabinets and for other caulking uses where a gas tight seal is required.
Alternative Treatment Technology. A validated and certifiable waste treatment process other than incineration or autoclaving.
Animal Cage. Container, generally metal, but may be of plastic, either autoclavable or disposable, designed for permanent housing of (usually individual) animals; may be individually ventilated or open to surrounding atmosphere. Used in both non-biohazard or biohazard areas.
Animal Cage Rack. Stack of steel shelves, generally movable, used to hold animal cages.
Area. Generally used in this section to designate a portion of a building at a given level of biohazard as set off from adjoining portions of different biohazard levels. Used somewhat interchangeably with "space."
Attic. An important utility service area for the laboratories; contains much service equipment including the central ventilation equipment.
Autoclave. A pressurized vessel using saturated steam under pressure to sterilize or
decontaminate materials and equipment.
Back Flow Preventer. A manufactured piping device of the type that has two independently
acting check valves and one spring-loaded, diaphragm-activated differential pressure
relief valve. It is installed in a water supply line to prevent reversal of water flow in
case the supply pressure falls below the downstream pressure. See also "Vacuum
Breaker."
Building Automation System (BAS). A computerized system with a multitude of points for measuring and in some cases controlling HVAC system parameters as well as performing fire protection, communications, security requirements, energy management, systems monitoring and reporting functions.
Biocontainment (Biological Containment). The safe methods for managing infectious materials in the laboratory environment where they are being handled or maintained with the purpose of reducing or eliminating exposure of laboratory workers, other persons, and the outside environment to potentially biohazardous materials.
Biohazard. An infectious agent, or a part thereof, presenting a real or potential risk to humans, animals, insects or plants, either directly or through infection, or indirectly through disruption of the environment. In certain regulations, these are referred to as infectious substances.
Biohazard Area. A building area with definite boundaries where hazardous biological work is being carried out, separated from non-biohazard and other biohazard areas by suitable barriers.
Biohazardous Material (Biohazardous Agent). Any pathogenic agent, infectious substance to humans, animals or plants, microbial toxins or materials containing the agent, substance, toxin or materials, including known human, animal, or plant pathogens.
Biohazard Service. A service or utility, such as water or vacuum, which serves a biohazard area and is therefore segregated from similar services to non-biohazard areas even though the service itself is non-biohazard.
Biohazard Suite. A group of biohazard laboratory rooms that is isolated from non-hazard areas and other areas by change rooms and air locks.
Biological. An infectious microorganism or toxin that is being handled in the course of research, development, or testing.
Biological Safety Cabinet, Class I. See Class I Biological Safety Cabinet.
Biological Safety Cabinet, Class II. See Class II Biological Safety Cabinet.
Biological Safety Cabinet, Class III. See Class III Biological Safety Cabinet.
Biologically Separated. Term applied to areas that are isolated from each other by air locks,change rooms, and shower.
Blowcase. See Waste Collection Treatment Unit.
Cabinet, Class I. See Class I Biological Safety Cabinet.
Cabinet, Class II. See Class II Biological Safety Cabinet.
Cabinet, Class III. See Class III Biological Safety Cabinet.
Cabinet Array. (Referred to Cabinet Line.) A number of Class III biological safety cabinets joined together. An array may be divided into two or more cabinet systems by gas tight doors or fixed partitions.
Cabinet System. A number of Class II biological safety cabinets joined to provide a single space with a single inlet and exhaust for ventilation.
Cage. See Animal Cage.
Cage Rack. See Animal Cage Rack.
Caulking. Such as silicone sealant; see also Aircraft Grade Compound and
Construction Grade Compound.
Change Room. The dressing room designated to remove clothing. It may be an exterior
clean dressing room where street clothing or clean clothing is
removed prior to entering the laboratory, or an interior biohazard dressing
room where laboratory protective clothing or dirty clothing has been worn
while in the laboratory facility and removed prior to exiting the facility. These rooms
may also be connected with a personal decontamination shower or air lock when required by
appropriate biosafety level practice.
Class I Biological Safety Cabinet. A prefabricated, ventilated enclosure that provides a
physical barrier between a worker and a hazardous operation. It may be used with an open
front (or open glove ports or with attached gloves) and a high rate of ventilation away
from the operator, like a fume hood, or with a closed front and attached rubber gloves. In
the latter use, protection depends upon a negative pressure maintained within the cabinet.
The ventilated air exhausts through a HEPA filter.
Class II Biological Safety Cabinet. A prefabricated ventilated enclosure for personnel,
product, and environmental protection having an open front with inward airflow for
personnel protection, HEPA filtered laminar airflow for product protection, and HEPA
filtered exhaust air for environmental protection. Different models are available; See
text for description of types.
Class III Biological Safety Cabinet. A prefabricated, gas tight, and ventilated enclosure maintained at negative pressure in which some BL3 or all BL4 work is done using attached rubber gloves with a single HEPA filter on the inlet and a double HEPA filter on the exhaust.
Clean. Has been commonly used in the past to mean free of harmful microorganisms but has been replaced by non-biohazard (except in the term clean change room) to avoid possible confusion with the special meaning (of being dust free) given to clean room or clean area in the aerospace industry. When used in this chapter, clean has its ordinary meaning of unsoiled, without reference to microorganisms.
Clean Change Room. Dressing room for removal of street clothes and donning laboratory clothing before entering biohazard change room through an air lock. (Clean is an exception to the use of non-biohazard.)
Clean Room. See Clean.
Construction Grade Compound. A sealing compound used for all exterior and interior
caulking, except where aircraft grade compound is required (see Aircraft Grade
Compound.)
Containable Space. A space, acting as a tertiary barrier, kept under negative pressure, with its exhaust HEPA filtered. The space is sealed and can be gas fumigated, but is not required to pass a pressure decay test. The space is not considered to be within containment, and any person leaving the area need not take a personal shower
Decontamination. A process whereby viable microorganisms are removed from solutions, surfaces, or materials by filtration, heating, radiation, or chemicals to an acceptable level.
Decontamination Shower. See Disinfectant Shower.
Demand Factor. Percent of total connected load (for utilities).
Diaphragm Valve. Widely used in biohazard service because of zero leakage at the stem (also referred to as a Saunders Valve).
Dioctylphthalate. See DOP.
Direct Digital Control. A means of using distributed and programmable microprocessors to perform local control of equipment.
Disinfectant Shower. Unit at exit from ventilated suit area in which suit is externally decontaminated for a specified time, by a mist or spray of disinfectant such as peracetic acid, before being removed.
DOP. The abbreviation for dioctylphthalate, which has been commonly used and specified
to generate smoke for the purposes of testing HEPA filters and assemblies. Often replaced
with PAO for testing due to concerns about the health effects of DOP.
Exfiltration. (Ventilation Term) ductless flow of air from a space to an adjoining space at lower pressure.
Freon-Tight. See Gas tight.
Gas Sterilizer. An autoclave that has been designed to permit optional use of a gaseous
decontaminates instead of steam for sterilizing materials. Gas sterilizer can be purchased
specifically for GAS USE ONLY.
Gas Tight. Free from leakage when subjected to the standard halogen leak test.
Germfree. Free of all microbial life detectable by examination.
Glove Box. See Class III Biological Safety Cabinet.
Gravity Exhaust. (Ventilation term) discharge of air, resulting only from pressure differential, from a ventilated room to the outdoors through an exhaust duct.
High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter. Often referred to as an Absolute Filter. A throwaway, extended/pleated medium, dry-type filter with: (1) rigid casing enclosing the full depth of the pleats; (2) minimum particulate removal of 99.97 percent for thermally generated monodispersed dioctylphthalate (DOP) smoke particles with a diameter of 0.3 micrometer; and (3) maximum pressure drop of 1.0 in wg (25.4 mm) when clean and operated at rated airflow capacity. Other types of HEPA filters are available; e.g., ceramic sintered metal, etc., for pipeline filtering and other uses.
HEPA. See High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter.
Hood Area. See Ventilated Suit Area.
Infectious Microorganisms. As used in this chapter, the term is restricted to microorganisms infectious for man, plants or domestic animals.
Infiltration. The ductless flow of air into a space from an adjoining space at higher pressure.
Insect Vector. Any insect capable of transmitting a pathogen from one host to another.
Laminar Flow. Straight-line, eddy-free flow, applied specifically to airflow as a means of controlling spread of aerosols in the ventilation of biohazard work areas. Employed in clean rooms, down flow rooms, and crossflow rooms in the aerospace and pharmaceutical industries.
Magnahelic Gauge. An instrument used to measure differential pressure; i.e., between Class II safety cabinet and a room and/or between a laboratory room and a hallway.
Mask. See Respirator.
Mask Air. Piped supply of conditioned air for ventilated personnel suits and hoods. See also Ventilated Suit.
Non-Biohazard Area. An area with definite boundaries designed to be free of harmful microorganisms. See also Clean.
Microorganisms. In this chapter, when not qualified, refers to infectious microorganisms.
Non-Biohazard Change Room. See Clean Change Room.
PAO. The abbreviation for polyalphaolefin which is aspirated into smoke for testing HEPA filters and assemblies.
Pass Box. A double-door chamber arranged to permit transfer of material and equipment between two confined spaces of different biohazard levels such as a safety cabinet and the room, two safety cabinet systems, a room and a corridor, etc. May employ steam, gas, or liquid as the decontamination agent. See also Autoclave.
Pasteurization. Heat treatment of a liquid under conditions of time and temperature (usually 200 degrees F) that will substantially reduce, but not completely eliminate, the population of microorganisms.
Peracetic Acid. One of the compounds used for disinfecting the one-piece, positive pressure, protective suits.
Peracetic Shower. See Disinfectant Shower.
Personal Assistance Alarm. An emergency manual alarm activated by pull station (usually located near an exit) and/or emergency shower flow switch.
Pipe Line Filter. A HEPA filter designed to withstand sterilization.
Plenum. When not otherwise specified, refers to a filter chamber or a filter housing in a central ventilation system.
Polyalphaolefin. See PAO.
Post-Wide Alarm System. A system to detect abnormal operation of any critical or important mechanical device or system. Warning is given at a building annunciator panel and at a central annunciator panel that is manned 24 hours a day.
Pressure-Tight. Free from leakage in a soap test at +4 inches wg pressure.
Receiving Room, Biohazard. An area for holding biohazard equipment and materials until they can be sterilized and passed through double-door autoclaves or gas sterilizers that open into the non-biohazard receiving room.
Receiving Room, Non-biohazard. A service room generally at the rear of the building that is maintained as a non-biohazard area. Supplies delivered to the building are placed in the receiving room before transfer through an air lock to the biohazard receiving room.
Refuse Incinerator. A fuel-fired furnace for the combustion of organic wastes, in which all gases will have reached a minimum temperature of 1400 oF before discharge.
Respirator. The device that is the last resort or temporary control measure to reduce contaminant exposures in the workplace to feasible levels or to provide sufficient oxygen for breathing. All uses of respirators must be in accordance with a site-specific Respiratory Protection Program.
Rodent-Proof. Incorporating prescribed structural and architectural features in building design that prevent access or harboring of rodents and other vermin.
Safety Cabinet, Class I. See Class I Biological Safety Cabinet.
Safety Cabinet, Class II. See Class II Biological Safety Cabinet.
Safety Cabinet, Class III. See Class III Biological Safety Cabinet.
Safety Shower/Eye Wash Station. A combination emergency plumbing fixture with drench-type shower and two eye/face wash heads. Installed in every chemical, battery, and radiological use area and as otherwise required.
Sealant. See Aircraft Grade Compound and Construction Grade Compound.
Service Piping. Piping other than waste piping or process piping.
Shower. See Change Room, Disinfectant Shower, and Safety Shower/Eye Wash Station.
Speaking Diaphragm. Plastic sheet installed in wall, door, or window to permit voice communication through barrier between areas of different biohazard levels.
Steam Seal. Section of piping between two valves, kept filled with steam when not in use, to isolate a vessel or line from another vessel or line from waste drain lines, etc.
Sterilization. An act or process of destroying all forms of microbial life on and in an object.
Sterilizer. See Autoclave.
Suit Area. See Ventilated Suit Area.
Suite. See Biohazard Suite.
System. See Cabinet System.
Toxin. A metabolic product of microorganisms poisonous to man or animals.
Vacuum Breaker. A device that is installed in a line or tank, where the breaker is not subjected to a downstream back-pressure, to prevent reversal of flow in case of accidental occurrence of an upstream suction.
Ventilated Air Lock. A section of corridor isolated by doors, used to separate areas at different levels of biohazard and at different air pressures, which permits passage of personnel and/or equipment, normally without airflow.
Ventilated Cages. See Animal Cage.
Ventilated Hood. Hood covering entire head, pressurized with conditioned air by same
hose system serving ventilated suits.
Ventilated Suit. Pressurized outer garment (including head, hands, and feet), supplied by
hose with conditioned air, and worn in areas of high risk from infectious aerosols such as
some animal rooms.
Ventilated Suit Area. Area of high hazard in which workers are protected by ventilated suits and which is separated from adjoining area of lower biohazard risk by various barriers including change rooms provided with disinfectant showers.
Vermin Proof. See Rodent Proof.
Viewing Panel. Fixed window suitably sealed into an interior wall or door between two areas of different biohazard levels.
Viewing Window. See Viewing Panel.
Waste Collection Tank. See Waste Collection Treatment Unit.
Waste Collection Treatment Unit. A waste collection and treatment unit, generally serving one building, consisting of a tank in which the biohazard liquid waste is collected, sterilized or pasteurized by steam either continuously or batch-wise, and discharged to the main municipal-type sewer system. Commonly called blowcase.
Waste Piping. Unless specified as sanitary or storm water, refers to piping handling biohazard waste (biohazard sewer).
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Scope
This Chapter provides general guidance in the planning and design
of animal research and care facilities.
10.1.2 ARS
Policy
ARS animal research and care facilities shall be designed in
accordance with the Animal Welfare Act (9 CFR Parts 1, 2, and 3) and the latest edition of
the NIH Guide for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals, and other applicable Federal
laws, guidelines and policies.
The design of facilities for animal research and care shall
provide for living conditions of animals appropriate for their species and contribute to
their health and comfort. Design must ensure that all research animals are protected to
prevent transmission of diseases among animals and to and from humans.
10.2 ANIMAL
WELFARE CONSIDERATIONS
10.2.1 General
The caging or housing system shall be designed carefully to
facilitate animal well-being and meet research requirements.
10.2.2 Housing
System
The housing system shall:
A. Provide space that is adequate as
defined by law and guidelines (See section 10.1.2), permits freedom of movement and normal
posture adjustments, and has a resting place appropriate to the species, and exercise (if
required by law for the species).
B. Provide a comfortable environment.
C. Provide an escape-proof enclosure that
confines animals safely.
D. Provide easy access to food and water.
E. Provide adequate ventilation.
F. Meet the biological needs of the
animals; e.g., maintenance of body temperature, urination, defecation, and if appropriate,
reproduction.
G. Keep the animals dry and clean,
consistent with special requirements.
H. Avoid unnecessary physical restraints;
and protect the animals from known hazards.
10.2.3 Caging
Systems
The caging systems shall be designed to comply with the Animal
Welfare Act (9 CFR Parts 2 and 3) and the NIH Guide for the Care and Use of Laboratory
Animals, 1985 (or later revisions). They shall be constructed of sturdy, durable materials
and designed to minimize cross- infection between adjoining units. To simplify servicing
and sanitation, cages shall have smooth, impervious surfaces that neither attract nor
retain dirt and a minimum number of ledges, angles, and corners in which dirt or water can
accumulate. The design shall allow inspection of cage occupants without disturbing them.
Feeding and watering devices shall be easily accessible for filling, changing, and
servicing. Where practical, the design of large animal pens shall include alleys around
their sides and back to allow researchers access to the animals without having to enter
the pens.
10.3 HOUSING
FACILITIES - GENERAL
10.3.1 General
Housing facility shall mean any land, premises, shed, barn,
building, trailer, or other structure or area housing or intended to house animals.
10.3.2 Structural
Strength
Indoor and outdoor housing facilities shall be structurally sound
and shall be maintained in good repair, to protect the animals from injury, to contain the
animals, and to restrict the entrance of other animals and to restrict the entrance of
unauthorized humans.
10.3.3 Water
and Electric Power
Reliable and adequate electric power and adequate potable water
shall be available. A separate emergency generator shall power all environmental controls
that are required for systems essential for the animal's health (e.g., heating, cooling,
air supply).
10.3.4 Storage
Supplies of dry food and bedding shall be stored in special rooms
in animal facilities which adequately protect such supplies against moisture accumulation
and infestation or contamination with vermin.
10.3.5 Waste
Disposal
In animal facilities, a separate exit (not used for arrival of
clean supplies) shall be provided for the removal and disposal of animal and food wastes.
Provisions shall be made for the removal and disposal of animal and food wastes, bedding,
and dead animals and debris. Disposal facilities shall be so provided and operated as to
minimize vermin's infestation, odors, and disease hazard.
10.3.6 Washrooms
and Sinks
Facilities such as washrooms, sinks, or basins, showers and
toilets, shall be provided to maintain cleanliness among animal caretakers.
10.4 HOUSING
FACILITIES - INDOORS
10.4.1 Heating
Indoor housing facilities for species shall be sufficiently heated
when necessary to protect animals from cold, and to provide for their comfort. The
temperature ranges are listed in the Animal Welfare Act and/or NIH Guide for the Care of
Laboratory Animals. The ambient temperature shall not be allowed to fall below 50 oF
for animals not acclimated to lower temperatures.
10.4.2 Ventilation
Indoor housing facilities shall be adequately ventilated to
provide for the health and comfort of the animals at all times. Facilities for small
animals shall not have windows in the core animal housing rooms. They shall have air
intake and exhaust vents and air conditioning organized so that air makes a clean sweep of
the room and scrubs all zones where air stratifies (without dead spots) and there shall be
at least 15 exchanges of new (not recirculated) air per hour, unless the animal room load
is shown to need more or less. Moisture content shall be in the range appropriate for the
species. Air conditioning shall be available at all times to maintain the temperature
within the range appropriate for the species. The entire ventilation system shall also be
served by an emergency generator that assures proper ventilation to the animals during
power problems.
10.4.3 Lighting
Indoor housing facilities for animals shall have ample, good
quality artificial light in the appropriate spectrum and daily light cycle required by the
species. Room lighting shall provide uniformly distributed illumination of sufficient
light intensity to permit routine inspection and cleaning during the entire working
period. Animals that require choice of dark or light during the day period
shall be provided with the means (through cage design) to make this choice.
10.4.4 Interior
Surfaces
The interior building surfaces of indoor housing facilities shall
be constructed and maintained so they are substantially impervious to moisture and coated
with mold-resistant paint whenever possible. Floors should be seamless (to minimize
microbial contamination and facilitate cleaning).
10.4.5 Drainage
If closed drainage systems are used, they shall be equipped with
traps and so installed as to prevent any backup of sewage onto the floor of the room.
10.5 HOUSING
FACILITIES - OUTDOORS
10.5.1 Shelter
From Sunlight
When sunlight is likely to cause overheating or discomfort,
sufficient shade shall be provided to allow animals kept outdoors to protect themselves
from the direct rays of the sun.
10.5.2 Shelter
From Rain or Snow
Animals kept outdoors shall be provided with access to allow them
to remain dry during rain or snow.
10.5.3 Shelter
From Cold Weather
Shelter shall be provided for animals kept outdoors when the
atmospheric temperature falls below 50 oF. Sufficient clean bedding material or
other means of protection from the weather elements shall be provided when the ambient
temperature falls below that temperature to which the animal is acclimated.
10.5.4 Drainage
A suitable method shall be provided to rapidly eliminate excess
water.
10.6 DESIGN
FEATURES
10.6.1 Physical
Relationship of Animal Facilities to Laboratories
Locate animal housing areas adjacent to or near laboratories, but
separated from them by barriers such as entry locks, corridors, or floors.
10.6.2 Functional
Areas
The size and nature of a facility will determine whether areas for
separate service functions are possible or necessary. Sufficient animal area is required
to ensure separation of species or isolation of individual research projects when
necessary; receive, quarantine, and isolate animals; and provide for animal housing.
Generally, facilities shall make provisions for the following
service functions:
A. Specialized laboratories or individual
areas contiguous with or near animal housing areas for such activities as surgery,
intensive care, necropsy, radiography, preparation of special diets, experimental
manipulation, treatment, and diagnostic laboratory procedures.
B. Containment facilities or equipment, if
hazardous, biological, physical, or chemical agents are to be used.
C. Receiving and storage areas for food,
bedding, pharmaceuticals and biologics, and supplies.
D. Space for the administration,
supervision, and direction of the facility.
E. Showers, sinks, lockers, and toilets for
personnel.
F. A room or suite of rooms for washing and
sterilizing equipment and supplies, and, depending on the volume of work, machines for
washing cages, bottles, glassware racks, and waste cans; a utility sink; an autoclave for
equipment, food, and bedding; and separate areas for holding soiled and clean equipment.
G. An area for repairing cages and
equipment is desirable, but may not be practical in the same building if the animal
facility is small.
H. An area to store waste prior to
incineration or removal.
10.6.3 Noise
Control
Noise control is an important consideration in facility design.
Equipment noises and low pitch rumbles can lead to animal stress and human caretaker
stress. Major equipment such as used for heating and cooling (including emergency
generators) should be separated from animal housing rooms and offices for caretakers by
partitions designed to minimize transfer of stressful sounds and vibrations.
Within animal facilities, noisy activities, such as cage washing
and refuse disposal, shall be carried out in special rooms separated from the for animal
housing rooms by a combination of (1) placement of clean storage rooms between those in
which noisy activities take place and animal housing rooms, and (2) surrounding the rooms
in which the noisy activities take place with extra thick walls.
Noisy animals, such as dogs and nonhuman primates, shall be housed
away from rodents, rabbits, and cats.
10.6.4 Water
Supply
Animals shall be provided with continuous access to fresh,
potable, uncontaminated drinking water, according to their particular requirements.
Watering devices, such as drinking tubes and automatic waterers shall be provided.
10.6.5 Materials
and Finishes
Building materials shall be selected to facilitate efficient and
hygienic operation of animal facilities. Durable, moisture proof, fire resistant, seamless
materials are most desirable for interior surfaces.
Paints and glazes, in addition to being highly resistant to the
effects of chemical solvents, cleaning agents, and scrubbing, shall be highly resistant to
the effects of high pressure sprays and impact. They shall be nontoxic if used on surfaces
that come into direct contact with animals.
10.6.6 Floors,
Walls, and Ceilings
Animal laboratories shall have impervious surfaces and structural
joints that are vermin-proof and easily cleaned and decontaminated. The walls and floors
shall be monolithic and made of washable and chemically resistant plastic, baked enamel,
epoxy, or polyester coatings. The monolithic floor covering shall be carried up 8 inches
of the wall to prevent accumulations of dirt and wastes in the corners.
Corridors subject to heavy traffic from transportation of cage
racks and hand trucks handling feed and wastes shall be constructed of materials resistant
to wear and frequent washing with detergents and disinfectants.
Walls in corridors and animal holding rooms shall be provided with
buffer strips as necessary to prevent cage racks and hand carts from colliding with the
walls and thereby gouging the surface and rupturing the monolithic coatings. Exposed wall
corners shall be reinforced with steel or other durable material.
Suspended ceilings shall not be used.
10.6.7 Doors
and Windows
Exterior windows and skylights are not recommended in animal rooms
because they can contribute to unacceptable variations in environmental characteristics
such as temperature. Animal room doors shall be at least 42 inches wide and 84 inches high
to facilitate passage of racks and equipment.
Metal or metal-covered doors with viewing windows shall be
provided in animal rooms. Doors and frames shall be completely sealed to prevent the
entrance or harboring of vermin. Self-sealing sweep strips are desirable. Doors shall be
equipped with locks and kick plates and be self-closing. Recessed or shielded handles and
locks are recommended.
10.6.8 Heating,
Ventilating and Air-Conditioning
Animal laboratories require rigid control of temperature,
humidity, and air movement in animal rooms at all times to provide optimal conditions for
the health and growth of the species housed therein. The animal rooms shall be capable of
an adjustable temperature range between 65 oF and 84 oF and a
relative humidity range between 30 and 70 percent. All animal rooms must have at least 15
fresh (not recirculated) air changes/hour.
Room air in animal facilities shall not be recirculated. Air
pressure in animal rooms and surgical suites shall be higher than that of corridors to
minimize contamination of animal rooms. Air pressure in dirty equipment washing rooms
shall be lower than that in corridors to minimize spread of contamination and noxious
odors. Air pressure in rooms that are used to store clean equipment and materials shall be
higher than that in the washing rooms.
10.6.9 Illumination
Lighting shall be uniformly diffused throughout the animal
facilities and provide sufficient illumination to aid in maintaining good housekeeping
practices, adequate inspection of animals, safe working conditions for personnel, and the
well being of the animals. Over illumination is stressful for some animals (e.g.,
albinos): These animals should have shaded shelters provided in their cages.
Provision shall be made to use variable-intensity controls to
ensure light intensities consistent with needs of animals and personnel working in animal
rooms and energy conservation. A time-controlled lighting system shall be used when
required to provide a regular diurnal lighting cycle.